Mind Control Secrets

By William D. Horton, Psy. D.

© 2009 William D. Horton. All rights reserved.

Mind Control Secrets
How to Get Others to Do What You Want,
and Have Them Think It Was Their Idea!
Table of Contents

WHAT PEOPLE ARE SAYING

PROLOGUE
AUTHORS NOTE
AN INTRODUCTION TO MIND CONTROL
THE BRAIN AND THE MIND
RAPPORT: THE FIRST KEY
COMMUNICATION STYLES: THE SECOND KEY
THE THIRD KEY: EFFECTIVE LISTENING AND PUTTING IT
TOGETHER
STRATEGIES
ANCHORING
INFORMATION GATHERING
BELIEFS
CHANGING WITH LOGICAL LEVELS
CALIBRATION
REFRAMING FOR CHANGE!
THE FOURTH KEY: TURNING YOUR FEAR INTO POWER AND
CONTROLLING YOUR INTERNAL STATE
TWENTY-ONE-DAY EXERCISE
PUTTING IT TOGETHER—EINSTEIN’S BRAIN
REMOTE BRAIN CONTROL
AN EXAMINATION OF BARACK OBAMA’S USE OF HIDDEN
HYPNOSIS TECHNIQUES IN HIS SPEECHES
MK ULTRA
APPENDIX 2
GLOSSARY OF COMMON NLP TERMS
BIO
What People Are Saying
If NLP is something that you thirst to use and apply in business, or in
everyday life, then you want to pick up Mind Control 101 today! Wil
Horton collects a treasure trove of NLP techniques and strategies designed
to influence and persuade others into one easy-to-read text. Where else are
you going to get this many practical applications for this little investment.
Get it today!

—Richard Alexander,
Master Hypnotist, NLP Trainer

It was a summer afternoon in Chicago. 1995. Across from me was Dr.

William Horton. We talked NLP, influence, everything there was to talk
about motivating others to do things they need to be doing in life. Ten years
later after having taken two divergent paths to teach others how to persuade
and how to master the art of mind control, we meet again here, in Dr.
Horton’s new book on Mind Control. His desire for all techniques and
strategies to be used to help people be better, be happier, be healthier shines
through a vast array of tools you can use to influence others.
You’ll learn how to anchor resourceful states in others, build rapport, and
even get a list of Dr. Horton’s “bypass words.” I’ll save that surprise for
you.
Where else are you going to get all of the NLP techniques designed to
influence others crystallized into one workable tome? They are here.
NLPers in particular will enjoy this journey because it will be like coming
home.
What Dr. Horton does so well is make some of the more seemingly
complex elements of NLP easy to understand and far more importantly
apply.
Enjoy your journey and take this book with you on all of yours.
The only problem I have with this book is I wish I would have written it!

—Kevin Hogan, author of The Science of Influence and The Psychology of

Persuasion
Prologue
“Mind control” is a term filled with mystery, intrigue, and fun. Control of
the mind . . . what does it mean, really! So-called experts have been writing
and arguing about the mind for as long as people have been able to
communicate.
The elusive and mystical control we seek is possible. In Mind Control, Dr.
William Horton takes us closer to the practical application of mental
discipline for ourselves.
Dr. Horton applies NLP communication techniques (special language to
structure change in the mind) so that we can manage and control of others.
This control takes the form of better understanding of what we see feel and
hear as other talk to us. We are afforded the opportunity through these
techniques to use the best possible angle while talking with others.
In our culture, control can be regarded as a negative term. Here we use it as
a positive action. When we say control, we really refer to the control of our
own thoughts, our own state of mind, and the way we communicate.
Dr. Horton uses his ability to break down systems and processes to share a
new understanding of the function of the mind as we interact with the
people around us.
Can you imagine your life in a world where people simply do what you ask
them to do? The processes outlined in this book will install the skills needed
for maximum success.
Self-control and mental discipline give you the ability to have more success
in any part of your journey through career and personal goals. Personal
relationships become more rewarding. You have an easy time controlling
money. Your ability to retain information grows. This is all possible because
you are choosing the way you communicate with yourself and the other
players in your life.
Imagine a life where you control your emotional reactions to the obstacles
you encounter on your path to success. See yourself as an individual who
can consider the effects your reactions have on others. Hear your own
thoughts as they become useful to your goals. You can have all of this and
more. All you must do is master the techniques in this book.
Even more exciting news awaits you. With the techniques you learn, you
can enable others to reach their dreams and goals in a more effective
manner. It’s easy to remember times in your life when you wanted other
people to simply do what you have asked them to do. What if you knew
exactly how to talk and act to get others to take action? The more you
understand “mind control,” the easier your interactions with other people
become.
As you remember each technique in this book, you will enjoy Dr. Horton’s
unique take on the material and his passion for life itself.

—Elsom Eldrige, author of The Obvious Expert,

Founder of The International Guild of Professional Consultants
Authors Note
As I read the edited manuscript for this book, I am reminded that I am one
of the luckiest men in the world. A little over 20 years ago I was exposed to
the technology in this book and it not only saved my life, it gave me a life
worth living. I was caught in a cycle of addiction and self destruction that I,
with my limited thought processes, could not escape. I have done nothing
special to have the opportunity to live the life I currently have. I have a
beautiful home, a beautiful wife, a successful daughter, and I have had more
success financially in one month than I thought possible.
I just returned from a trip to Asia teaching the techniques outlined in this
book.
The idea that a man who at one point was living in a run-down trailer and
could not stop drinking and other self destructive behaviors could, in a
relatively short period of time, become a licensed psychologist, author and
world traveled speaker on Hypnosis, NLP and Mind Control boggles my
mind and fills me with a gratitude I can never repay.
The magic does not stop there; these techniques have also allowed me to
overcome a severe physical injury where I was told I would always have a
limp and my athletic days were over, I’ve since become a 4th-degree black
belt in karate and have won tournaments and medals in various
competitions. Today I ran an 8:45 mile, not bad for someone told they could
never do this!
None of this would have been possible without the techniques I have
outlined in this book. I pray that you read and take in the information and
that you use it to live the life you deserve. It is one of my primary missions
to share this information with as many people as I can. I have taught
thousands of students and always learn new things. I know that you too will
one day be able to share with me new and wonderful applications of the
technology you are about to learn.
I hope to see you on the road to happy destiny!

William Horton, Psy.D, CAC, CMI

Chapter 1
An Introduction to Mind Control Secrets
The human mind is a remarkable thing, but we often take it for granted; we
don’t give it the full respect it deserves. I guess this is largely because the
mind is capable of taking care of itself. It usually doesn’t demand any
attention from us, so we don’t give it any. What if we did, though? What if
we stopped for a minute or two and thought about the range of activities
going on in the human mind, and the amazing faculties that our minds
have?
Only a reflection along these lines helps us understand what a wonderful
entity the human mind is. Our minds are capable of carrying out so many
routine activities like thinking, feeling, remembering, calculating,
analyzing, and reasoning. Oh! The list could go on and on and on.
Apart from this, we’re also capable of doing so many other things that are
totally alien to the rest of creation. For example, we can enjoy music,
appreciate beauty in many forms and create beautiful works of art…all
things only humans are capable of doing. Isn’t it these finer qualities that
distinguish man from beast?
All this is, of course, thanks to the human mind. All of us have been
endowed with a mind. However, if the human mind is capable of such an
astounding range of qualities, it makes one wonder whether we’ve actually
tapped its potential. Forget about tapping it to the fullest possible extent; do
we use even a third of the potential our minds have?
Pondering a question like this opens up another avenue of thought: If the
human mind is capable of so many activities and functions, and if the
human mind is so powerful, can’t this power be used to exercise some
degree of power over other human minds?
It seems logical enough, doesn’t it? Most of us don’t use even a fraction of
our mind’s faculties. So if some of us start doing that, if we start directing
and focusing our mental energy toward the minds of others—which, mind
you, function in very similar patterns to our minds—can’t we exercise a sort
of mind control over them?
If this concept interests you, then you’re in luck, because this book is
completely dedicated to the use and development of mind power. Believe
me; you’ll be surprised at the amount of power you can exercise over
others!
Hold on a second, though. We’re not talking about looking at the guy
standing across the street and being able to control his mind to such an
extent that he turns toward you and starts waving his hand or clucking like a
chicken. That kind of thing only happens in comics, cartoons, and movies!
No, we’re talking about something more practical. We’re talking about
using mind power so you can talk convincingly to a person and effectively
bring that person to your line of thinking. Who would want to do that? Well,
a lot of people would, indeed, love to do just that—and they succeed!
Take, for instance, a single day in your life. How many people do you meet
in a day? Out of that, how many of those people do you talk to? You may
not be a salesman, but trust me when I tell you that all of us do a lot of
marketing in the course of our daily lives. We try to sell our ideas; we try to
sell our thoughts; we try to sell our feelings, our desires, our likes and our
dislikes. When two people meet and start talking, there’s bound to be an
exchange of different views. So, how do we get others to accept our views?
How do we sell our opinions? How do we bring others to accept our ideas?
Mind you, the people I’m talking about aren’t necessarily strangers. They
can be members of your immediate family—your parents, your kids, your
spouse, your siblings—or they could be your teachers, your friends, or your
neighbors. They could also be people you do daily business with, like the
postman or the grocer or the shopkeeper or the maid, or even your
colleagues or your boss. All these transactions give rise to situations that
may end in one of three ways:

• The “win-lose” situation, in which one party wins and the other
party loses.
• The “lose-lose” situation, in which neither party wins—it’s like a
tug-of-war in which both parties hold on strongly to their views and,
together, they get nowhere.
• Finally, there is the “win-win” situation, in which both parties are
convinced that each got the best out of the situation.

Let’s discuss the situation in which one party eventually wins…the “win-
lose” situation. The other party, in effect, loses. However, when the two
people part ways, the second party leaves with the conviction that he or she
won the struggle. This happens when you use your mental faculties to get
the better of others, but they’re unaware of the end result. They beat a
graceful retreat and feel good about it, so much so that, though you got your
way, they believe they got theirs! That is precisely what mind power is all
about.
This is a technique worth learning. It will be of immense help to you in
tackling the different situations you face in life. After all, how many times
in life have others gotten the better of you? How many times over the years
have you had to negotiate and then left feeling that you got a raw deal?
In the course of this program, you’ll learn how to use the techniques of
neuropsychogenics and neurolinguistic programming (NLP) to develop
mind control. Before we really hit the road, though, here’s an eye-opener
about NLP.

What Is NLP?

As we said, NLP is neurolinguistic programming…but what’s that? Simply

put, NLP is a unique model of how people learn, motivate themselves and
change their behavior to achieve excellence in any endeavor. Throughout
history a perplexing question of mankind has been, “Why are some people
more successful than others?” While the complex explanation involves the
interplay between genes, physical environment, and socioeconomic and
cultural indicators, the simple explanation involves programming.
The term, neurolinguistic programming, was coined by author and founder
of general semantics Alfred Habdank Skarbek Korzybski. Richard Bandler
and John Grinder then brought it to the public. From their trainings, this
science has grown to what we know today. These men are to be
commended on advancing this art and science of the human mind.
In the early 1970s, a team of scientists at the University of California at
Santa Cruz set out to answer the question of why people with similar
backgrounds in education, training and experience were not similarly
successful. They wanted to explore what they called “the secrets of
effective people” and wanted to “model human excellence.” What they
discovered was that, while people’s backgrounds were similar, the brain
wiring—or programming—was distinctly different. What developed out of
this research was the field of neurolinguistic programming.
Neurolinguistic programming rests on the premise that thought patterns are
largely responsible for an individual’s success or failure; that preconceived
thoughts and mental conditioning effect our social interactions and
accomplishments. The theory is that if you remodel your negative thoughts,
you can change your personal situation.
So, NLP is an integration of neurology, psychology, linguistics, cybernetics,
and systems theory:

• Neuro—because our experiences, both conscious and subconscious,

are derived through and from our senses and central nervous system.

• Linguistic—because our mental processes are also coded,

organized, given meaning and transformed through language.

• Programming—because people interact as a system in which

experience and communication are composed of sequences of patterns or
“programs.”

The functions of NLP include letting you model or copy human excellence
and helping you become adept at whatever you want to do.
NLP helps you become a better communicator in terms of:

• Business consultation
• Parenting
• Management
• Nursing
• Negotiation
• Public Speaking
• Education
• Sports Performance
• Counseling
• Therapy
• Relationships

NLP can:

• change past impact on a client

• turn a poor speller to a good speller
• assist a business person to gain rapport nonverbally and handle
meetings efficiently
• help an athlete improve concentration
• be used as a method of therapy
• can serve as a process of teaching people to use their brains

Most therapy is remedial. That is, it’s directed toward solving problems of
the past. NLP, on the other hand, studies excellence and teaches skills that
promote positive changes, which in turn generate new possibilities and
opportunities.
This Mind Control program is designed to equip you with all that you need
to become a master of mind power. We’ve written it in a very simple, lucid
style, with no stone left unturned in terms of rendering all scientific jargon
into layman’s lingo, because we want you to understand these methods
completely. This book can help even a beginner become a master in no
time! That said, let’s proceed to the first step toward exercising mind
control.
First, you need to open your senses, because you, and your ability to learn,
will be only as good as the information you allow in. We want you to allow
more information to enter into your awareness. The first step is to practice
opening your senses.
Try the following.

Sensory Acuity Exercises

Kinesthetic (Sense of Touch)

First, find your center for the sense of feeling. You need to get in touch with
a time when you were really in tune with your body during a physical
activity such as working out, dancing, sports, etc. The focus should be on
your feeling center.
Take several items and feel them. Use normal everyday items such as an
apple, a pencil, a newspaper or some cloth. Enter into the feeling of the
experience of touching it.
Close your eyes and repeat the last step. Imagine expanding your sense of
touch so you’re ten times more sensitive.
Stay in your center and think of some states of feeling…happy, sad,
energetic, depressed, etc.
Repeat the above and see how it alters your experience.
Now, go through a day and stay focused on your sense of touch/feeling.

Auditory
First, you’ll focus on your center of hearing. Think of a time when you
were really in tune with your sense of hearing, such as listening to music,
the sounds of nature, etc.
Keep your focus on this auditory center as you listen to sounds. Do this in
several places. At home, listen for the background sounds you normally
screen out…fans, air conditioning, or the sound of the Television in another
room. Notice how you can expand your hearing. Next, do this in a public
place and do the same; notice how you can hear others’ conversations.
Listen closely in your conversations. Notice if your hear more. Listen for
inflections, tone, pace and rhythm. Really listen to the people you normally
screen out.
Spend the day expanding your hearing; you’ll be surprised at the results!

Visual
Now you’ll focus on your center for the sense of vision. Think of a time
when you were visually in tune with your body at a movie, while looking at
a painting, etc.
Look at several items and imagine your vision expanding. Notice all the
little things you normally skim over.
Watch a movie or TV show, and watch the sides, not just the center. We
naturally are drawn to the center, so notice how it may change your
experience of the film. Watch a movie you like and force yourself to do this.
Focus on what you see when you’re talking to someone. See how it changes
your communications. Then focus approximately three to four feet behind
the person you are conversing with.
Your senses are, in many ways, the gatekeepers for your mind. When you
attune your senses to your environment, you’ll be amazed at how many
details you pick up on…and how easy it is to use those details to practice
mind control. So, now that you’ve mastered this sensory acuity, let’s take a
look at the power contained in your amazing mind.
Chapter 2
The Brain and the Mind
The brain and the mind have different jobs. In order to understand how
“mind control” works, you need to understand what is occurring inside your
head (and your subject’s head) as you use NLP to achieve the best results
possible.

The Brain

The brain is a tangible thing. You know where it is, roughly what it looks
like and what it’s made of. It has properties that dictate how it functions,
and we know what those properties are. One of them, the one that is most
important for mind control, is subconscious communication.
The human brain is a miraculous tool that is made up of a very unique
structure. There is nothing that compares to the brain; its integral working is
amazingly flexible. Imagine how efficient each structure needs to be for all
the operations it carries out.
Think for just a moment about all the things that your brain does in an hour.
It’s amazing. The makeup of the brain is another fascinating factor. About
78 percent of the brain is made up of water, with the remaining 22 percent
composed of fat and protein.
Here’s some more information on how your amazing brain separates its
processes:

Nerve fibers cover the top of the brain and carry narrow bands or paths.

Underneath this nerve fiber cover is the layer that’s known for processing
sensory data.

Next is the area of the brain that pairs sensory information with feelings and
thoughts
Below this is the last layer, the Limbic system, which regulates feelings and
allows the body to remain in a state of homeostasis.

Auditory, visual, motor and somatosensory processes make up the

associative center of the brain.

The occipital (visual), parietal (spatial), temporal (speech) and frontal

(organization) areas of the brain all serve different functions.

Finally, the brain is divided into two hemispheres: the left for linear
processing and the right for spatial and negative affect.

The brain is made up of all this, of billions of neurons, dendrites and nerve
fibers, yet is only two percent of the human body weight.
Neurogenesis
Another fascinating function of the brain is neurogenesis. Simply described,
neurogenesis is the creation of new nerve connections in the brain. These
nerve connections are somewhat similar to the hardwiring of a computer.
While the computer relies on hardware composed of digital circuitry, the
human brain relies on hardware composed of neural circuitry composed of
billions of nerve cells (neurons) that form a complex nervous system. These
neurons assess the human environment and react accordingly by sending
chemical messages to each other through electrical impulses. These
messages form the basis of our learning, productivity, behavior and very
survival.
Neurogenesis is essential to success in humans. Since we often look to
scientific studies of other species to explain processes in humans, let me
share a fascinating study of canaries. Frederick Nottebohm's studies,
performed in the early 1990s, illustrate the importance of neurogenesis in
songbirds. The songbird depends on its beautiful melodies to attract a mate
and produce offspring, ensuring its lineage.
In his studies, Nottenbohm discovered that, in order to sing these complex
melodies, the male birds continually generated new brain cells in their song
centers. In fact, approximately one percent of the birds’ neurons are newly
created in the song center each day. Because human behavior is so
individually varied, we can’t assess the daily potential of new neural
connections in exactly the same way, but just compare the canary brain
capacity to that of a human and imagine the possibilities!
While you may have heard the statement that humans use only 10 percent
of their brains, this isn’t exactly true. The correct statement is that humans
use only 10 percent of their neurons at any given time (due to the sheer
volume and task specifications). However, this means that the more new
neural connections you build, the greater the productivity you can expect
from your active 10 percent.

The Brain as Computer

We previously compared the brain’s neural circuitry to the hardwiring of a
computer. Let’s explore this comparison a bit more. Both the computer and
the human brain have massive information processing abilities that are
based on the transmission of electrical signals, and each has a memory that
can grow and learn to accommodate changing needs. However, both can
also become damaged with faulty programming information. For a
computer, this faulty information comes in the form of viruses; for the
human brain it is negativity. Fortunately, both systems can be changed and
modified to correct this damage.
However, there is a fundamental difference between computer hardware
and the human neurological system. The difference is that, while hardware
may vastly vary from computer to computer, every person possesses the
same neural hardware. There is a common, basic, physical neurology with
billions of neurons processing approximately 40,000 bits of information per
second, aiding the brain in reasoning, learning and memory. In the absence
of a disease process, or physical damage or defect, we all possess the same
neural hardware. Consider this carefully: every human being shares the
same neural hardware. So, if we all share the same hardware, then we all
share the same potential!
Imagine…all of this from an organ that weighs only three pounds! That’s
only the physical make-up of the brain. The functions are even more
unimaginable.
The level at which our brain operates dictates how we feel, how we behave
and how we perform. There are four levels of brain activity, known as beta,
alpha, theta, and delta. There’s been a lot of research into the four levels of
brain activity, which we’ll go over in a minute. Basically, the mind control
state is attained by taking your brain from beta, which it’s probably in right
now, to either the alpha or theta states, depending on what you want to
achieve.
Beta state is the home to logic, analysis, and reason. You’re awake, alert,
and in a normal state of consciousness. You are experiencing sight, sound,
smell, taste and touch. It significantly affects the brain’s ability to store
information and memories, and access creativity, focus and concentration.
Beta state only makes up approximately 12 percent of our total conscious
being, but we spend about 90 percent of our day stuck in this state. It’s no
surprise, then, that it’s also where we get most of our tension and negative
thinking.
Alpha state is the strongest and most prominent brain state. It’s also the best
state to be in when preparing for competition and for decision making.
Alpha state is a state of calm, relaxation, and lucidity. You must be in alpha
state to modify, add, and delete “programs” for behavior modification. You
can also control dreams while in this state. You’re in alpha in the
approximate twenty minutes or so while you are falling, but not quite,
asleep.
Theta state is where you end up after leaving alpha state when you fall
asleep, but before you’re sleeping deeply. This is the state of active
dreaming and rapid eye movement. It’s also the level you can reach when
you are hypnotized by someone else, and where deep programming can
take place. It is a state of deep relaxation and clear mental imagery.
Delta state is the deepest state of deep, dreamless sleep. This is where
healing and recovery in the body and brain can take place. The body is
completely at rest.
If we all have the same potential shouldn’t we all be equally successful?
Again, programming is the underlying answer to why some people are more
successful than others. Most of us have heard the old axiom of, “It’s not
what you have but how you use it.” This rings true in brain neurology. The
actual wiring of your brain—the number of neural connections—depends
on your individual programming. Too often, mental resources are
underutilized and the wiring is subsequently damaged through faulty
programming. Proper programming involves positive nurturing input.
Until the last decade, the prevailing scientific theory of neurology was that
the human brain could not establish new neural connections. In other words,
what you are born with is what you have and, as you age, they will die. It’s
now known that the more than one hundred billion neurons of the brain are
geared to reinvest in themselves. Positive, enriched environments stimulate
the brain to create more neural connections. The more you learn, the more
you become capable of learning. You can actually rewire, or reprogram,
your brain! You can do this at any age; the more you stimulate it, the more
it grows!

The Conscious Mind

Think of yourself as having two minds: your conscious mind and your
subconscious mind. Your conscious mind is your thinking, awake state of
awareness, yet it comprises a remarkably paltry 12 percent of your mind.
Mind control happens when you bypass the 12 percent conscious mind and
get to the power center. But first, let’s review.
Your conscious mind has five functions:

1. Analysis
2. Rationalization
3. Willpower
4. Functional memory
5. Voluntary body functions

Analysis
Your conscious mind is logical because it is analytical. Its job is to study
your problems and solve them. This is the place where people try to
influence with logical reasoning. True mind control experts understand this
is the least effective use of influence.

Rationalization
This part of your mind tells you why you do things, gives you reasons to do
things and helps you understand. The problem is, it’s usually wrong,
because true motivation for behavior and responses comes from a much
deeper part of our mind, a place we don’t normally have access to with our
conscious mind. Think of smokers. Most say they smoke because it relaxes
them. That’s not really why, but it’s the rationalization their brain told them.
It’s a tidy, neat, logical answer. Not a complete answer, and certainly not
correct, but logical.

Willpower
This is what makes you stop and think before doing something. The
problem here is that the conscious mind really isn’t good at this function. (If
it were, there would be a lot of therapists, counselors and hypnotists out of
jobs!)
Functional Memory
The short-term memory, your functioning memory, is usually all you need
to get through life. That’s why, even though in third grade you needed to
know how to get from your classroom to the bathroom, decades later you
can’t even remember where your third-grade classroom was. The brain
drops (but doesn’t totally “lose”) the stuff that we don’t need to survive on a
day-to-day basis.

Voluntary Body Functions

As long as you aren’t physically impaired by injury, illness or other
physical conditions, your brain tells your legs, “Hey, let’s go,” and they go.
Your brain tells your hand to keep away from that hot stove, so you don’t
touch it. However, if you tried to control your internal bodily functions that
are normally on autopilot—like digestion and blood pressure—unless
you’ve been trained to do this, you normally can’t unless you access them
through some form of hypnosis.

Remember, your conscious mind makes up approximately 12 percent of

your entire mind. That’s not a lot! So somewhere else, there must be some
pretty exciting stuff going on with which we need to learn how to
communicate.

The Subconscious Mind

The key to mind control is the subconscious mind. That 88 percent of your
mind is the power center; it’s the motherboard of your body. Just like with a
computer’s wiring, as long as it’s working properly, you never know it’s
there. If it wasn’t there, though, nothing else could happen. Its single most
significant characteristic is that it literally runs your life without you
knowing it. The problem is that many people spend too much time listening
to that loud and obnoxious 12 percent instead of tapping into the true power
center. Like an iceberg, the subconscious is hidden beneath deep, dark
waters, with only a small part showing on the surface.
Our mind was meant to function differently, but we don’t understand it.
We’re like a monkey pounding away on a keyboard with no comprehension
as to how the computer works. Sometimes the monkey gets lucky and
something good happens.
Of the people who do know how to tap into the subconscious, many have
made it a point to present it as a huge, mystical secret that takes years of
patience to master. The truth is, it’s just a matter of knowing the way to
activate it.
The key to mind control is simple:

• The subconscious mind cannot think, reason or argue. So what does

it do? It FEELS.
• The subconscious mind is the emotional center of your being.
Control someone’s emotions, and you control THEM. Many times, your
emotions are actually out of sight, buried beneath your conscious mind or
disguised by rationalization.
• Your subconscious mind controls who you are, how you respond,
and what you believe. You (usually) don’t stop and think about your beliefs
when you respond to a situation. But your responses are based upon your
belief system.
• Your habits are a function of your subconscious mind. When you
repeat the same action over and over, eventually it will become a habit. A
habit is an automatic response. It is an action that starts in the conscious
mind and, through repetition, shifts into the realm of the subconscious, like
using a turn signal (for some of us). The subconscious mind is a huge
storage unit for all memories, thoughts, dreams, fantasies and experiences,
whether real or imagined. The subconscious simply records everything; it
doesn’t make judgments as to reality.
• The subconscious protects you from real and imagined dangers.
This is good to keep you safe, but bad because it’s how phobias take root.

Putting Them Together

The conscious and subconscious minds work together. Your subconscious

mind holds all your long-term memories. While your subconscious
influences how your conscious mind works and acts, it can be programmed
(or reprogrammed) to do what you want it to do.
The conscious mind is the active master; it shows the effect of who you are.
It thinks, perceives, exerts will and is aware; it instigates activity and can be
objective. The subconscious mind acts like a servant but is really the source
of who you are. It controls your feelings, blindly records your experiences
and thoughts, is the source of your personal power and is totally subjective.
Mind control is about taking control of the subconscious mind. This is very
powerful, because if a suggestion is allowed to travel from your conscious
to your subconscious mind, then it has the power to change your beliefs and
behaviors.
First, though, a suggestion has to make it through the critical factor of the
conscious mind. That is the part of the conscious mind that works to protect
the status quo of your subconscious mind. It’s the part of you that keeps you
from believing every single thing you are told; it keeps you from getting
manipulated. It acts as a filter to make sure what you’re hearing is in
agreement with what’s already stored.
Political and religious debates really bring critical factor to the forefront.
But how can you break through that filter to get through to the subconscious
mind?
Mind control bypasses the critical factor of the conscious mind to allow you
to access the subconscious and focus the mind to accept new positive
information such as suggestions.
Now, if that was all there was to mind control, we’d always be able to
control others. That’s not the case. We need to use several tools to bypass
the critical factor and obtain the success we want.

Example:
A great example of this was in the 2004 presidential election. President
Bush and the Republicans constantly used the terms “September 11” or “9-
11 changed everything.”
I remember a question about education and how to fund college
scholarships. Without missing a beat, the Vice President replied, “Well, we
have to remember 9-11 changed the world; we have to defeat the terrorists,
and there are bad people who want to kill us. The Democrats would rather
talk to them and find out why they hate us.” He then answered something
about education. But why mention 9-11 and terrorists?
FEAR! It elicited a state; then he could link it to whatever he wanted. This
is a great use of bypassing the critical factors and moving people. Start to
look for examples of this in the real world!

Using Your Brain to Achieve Your Goals

Everyone wants to succeed and be the best they can be, so what’s holding
most people back? Most don’t bother to try “mind control” on themselves!
Many people speak a good game; they understand that they must have goals
and dreams to achieve the money, freedom and great lifestyle that they
desire. When it actually comes to planning and having the correct goals,
though, people often fail miserably. For most, their goal consists of only the
things that they desire, not true, long-lasting goals.
You might wonder why there’s a problem with that. It’s simple. When your
goals are only driven by immediate or short-term desires, you’ll be left
feeling frustrated and disappointed when you don’t achieve them. The key
is to focus on personality and behavioral changes when setting goals. If you
change the way you think about your goals, you’ll succeed. If, on the other
hand, you’re only looking for that $100,000 car, you may be disappointed.
When you set goals, you must reach for the stars (which is the easy part).
You must then be truly committed to what you desire. FOCUSED
ATTENTION IS VITAL! If you get frustrated because success doesn’t fall
in your lap, you’ll spend the rest of your days agitated. You’ll never
accomplish anything productive.
Think about it this way; if you really want something, you know you have
to continue working until you achieve it. If a person wants to succeed in
business, yet isn’t willing to make the necessary contacts, give countless
hours and work hard, how far do you think he will get? Not very far! To
achieve goals, you have to be able to “think outside the box.” You have to
be willing to work for it and change your thinking. You must be willing to
step outside your comfort level and push ahead. Failure is not an option.

Setting Yourself Up For Success

I’m sure you’ve heard stories of the extraordinary power or strength of a
mother whose child was in danger? Do you know why she was able to
achieve that "goal" of protecting her child? It’s because, when a person’s
goal is a necessity, that person’s thinking changes. When people are
required to achieve their goals, they stand up to the pressure and go the
extra mile to ensure they complete the necessary actions. This is because
there is a sense or urgency and need. This is an excellent quality in the
human mind, because it allows us to see the fact that we can control our
motivation and programming.
Your potential for success lies in your "self talk"…the words you feed
yourself every day. You must set yourself up for success. The excuses and
"will do tomorrows" have to cease. There needs to be a sense of urgency in
completing your goal. Do you think if a person told you that he would kill
your loved one if you didn’t lose weight or bring him a million dollars, that
you wouldn't achieve that goal? You bet you would! The stakes would be
raised and you would require more of yourself. You’d also give yourself
positive feedback by telling yourself you must achieve, or else.
There are few individuals in this world who are incapable of achieving
success in their lives. When it becomes a "must" to succeed, people pull all
the stops and jump all the hurdles. The best way to accomplish this is to
raise the stakes and give yourself the credit you deserve. Don’t sell yourself
short; this is why people fail. They give themselves negative feedback and
give up because they feel they simply can’t meet the expectations of the
goal. This is where frustration comes in. They eventually give up and look
for a new goal. Instead of a "should," your goal has to become a "must." If
it doesn’t, you’re in danger of failing.

Think About Your Past Achievements

Think back to the events in your life and your past goals. What was your
mindset, why was it achieved, and did you give up along the way? The
chances are that there was a point in time when you thought about throwing
in the towel, but didn’t. For some reason, your goal was a “must" to you. It
may have been a job, money or the act of drawing someone to your point of
view, but you achieved it. Use that example and draw from the behavior.
When it came time to file your taxes, did you get it done? The answer is
yes, because you knew if you didn’t, you’d have to answer to the taxman (a
subject I truly know). Think about your education. You knew that if you
didn’t finish, you’d spend the rest of your days making minimum wage or,
worse, digging a ditch. It was a requirement (must) and you knew that, no
matter what the obstacle, you must overcome it. It’s no different with the
goals you set in life; you must tell yourself you have no choice. There’s no
room for quitting or “tomorrow.” It must be done today.
Take a few minutes and think of the things you want to accomplish, but
have been putting off. Be honest with yourself and give no slack. Don’t
start making excuses; that’s the reason you haven’t succeeded before today.
List these three things, and then we will look at how to get the ball rolling.

1.
2.
3.

Raise the Bar on Your Acceptance Level

When we dream, we generally dream big--like owning a high dollar home
or car—but when we set our goals, we settle. Sure, we’d like to make
$10,000 a month, but we’re willing to settle for $3,000 a month. Why is
this? We sell ourselves short, every time. If we settle, then we don’t reach
for any other expectations. If we don’t reach for further expectations, we’ll
be left settling for the rest of our lives.
If, on the other hand, we’re satisfied with $3,000 per month but continue on
to achieve that $10,000 per month and more, we’ll achieve the higher
amount. People gravitate toward their goals, especially when they feel they
must.
Think about it this way; when you’re short on cash for the month, but the
bills haven't been paid and the cabinets are bare, you pull some over-time or
take on a second job. You know you must achieve another $500 dollars, or
your family will go hungry and your electricity will be shut off. That is not
an acceptable option. So, regardless of how tired or worn out you are, you
continue on to achieve that goal. You’ve raised your expectation level and
are telling yourself you can’t settle for what you have today.

Change Your Language

Give up words such as should, would, could and if. They can no longer be a
part of your goal or dreams. Instead, "I wish" becomes "I will." It may
sound trivial or silly, but it truly works. Look at people like Donald Trump,
Bill Clinton, Oprah and others who have achieved the ultimate success in
their lives. Do you hear their speech? Is it “I wish I could have”? NO! They
speak as if everything is a work in progress, because it is. They continually
reach for higher standards and dreams. They don’t settle and they don’t sell
themselves short.
You must foster your creativity, be good to yourself and allow yourself to
grow. If you don’t grow as a person, your dreams and goals will go right out
the window. Creating a positive self-esteem and identity is one of the most
important feats in achieving success. Instead of telling yourself that you’ll
do that tomorrow, tell yourself it will be completed today. No more settling
or giving excuses for why you can’t achieve a goal. There’s no choice; it
has become a must. Could of, would of and should of are gone from your
vocabulary.
If you raise the bar on your inner dialog, it will bring it to new levels. You’ll
respond more to those things that you MUST do, so start using “must”
language with your internal dialog. I also suggest you adopt the phrase,
“Failure is not an option.” When Cortez landed in the New World, he
burned the boats so his men knew they couldn’t fail.
Try that inner attitude on for a change!
Chapter 3
Rapport: The First Key

We start with the relatively simple concept of rapport. Put simply,

establishing rapport is getting a person to trust you. “Is that important?” you
ask. Of course it is.
Let’s take a look at the situation this way. Go back in time, maybe to the
prehistoric era, when cavemen roamed the earth. If you could conjure up
images of the Flintstones, it certainly would help you get a clearer picture
of what I’m talking about.
In those days, survival was indeed a very crucial issue. With the threats
from wild animals on the one hand, and the forces of nature on the other, it
was survival of the fittest! That apart, there was also a lot of fear arising
from the existence of other cavemen. Man had not yet become a social
animal, and there was a lot of hostility among the cavemen. Each caveman
regarded another as a threat to his own survival…his food, his domain, and
yes, his mate, too! Of course, they had not yet begun living together, and so
the first instinct was to attack one another.
When two cavemen met, it was a question of who should attack and kill
first. Killing meant the survival of the killer. They didn’t have an
established language; their speech probably consisted mostly of grunts and
sounds. Gradually, though, they started accepting the fact that they could be
friends and that there was safety in numbers. However, how could each
know whether the other caveman they met was hostile or friendly?
It’s quite easy to picture the scene. Caveman Ugg is on his way to the local
caveman shopping mall (looking out for a beast to clobber for dinner),
when all at once he comes across this other caveman, Caveman Ogg. They
spot each other and freeze.
They eye each other from a distance. Ugg is dressed in deerskin while Ogg
is dressed in bearskin—clearly signs of different cultures!
As they advance, their hearts race. Each one suspects the other’s motives
and wonders if the other is going to attack. Apparently, neither wants to
start the fight that could end in loss of life. Once they come within a safe
distance, they start circling each other like they’ve seen animals do. They
scan each other for signs of weapons. Each one has a sharp flint in his hand.
After a while of circling, there is no sign of attack. So what do they do?
Both decide that there is not much danger. In an instant, they both drop their
weapons and advance toward each other with exposed palms indicating
they are unarmed.
This process of building trust, when each party feels there is no threat from
the other, is what’s called building rapport. It’s a concept that came into
existence during the time of the cavemen and continues to this very day.
Of course, today’s conditions are very different. We usually don’t start
attacking strangers we meet on the way to work. But one thing is still the
same: we still don’t trust most of the people we confront! Maybe distrust
was handed down by cavemen, or maybe it’s because there are just too
many con men and swindlers walking around today.
Whatever the reason, trust is not something that comes easily. The funny
thing is, we’re more likely to trust a person who has been introduced to us
by a common friend than a person we meet directly. This process of trust-
building is rapport.
Before we go on, just a reminder: the ‘t’ in rapport is silent—the word is
pronounced “rappor.” Got it?

Establishing Rapport

When we talk about “mind control,” we must understand the importance of

rapport. Rapport is the first and most important step toward building a
relationship. Unlike the cavemen, we don’t walk about with weapons that
we can throw down to show others we mean them no harm. We have to use
more subtle ways to convince them of this.
Rapport in modern terms means meeting people on their terms, not yours.
This is where you establish trust and credibility. To do this, you must first
be able to meet people on their conditions, because people tend to have the
“What’s in it for me?” idea running in the background. This is a mistake
most of us make; we always try to judge others by our level of thinking,
when it is much easier to use to their level of thinking. Most people are
driven by profit motives, profit meaning not just money, but benefit to
themselves, their family, etc. All you have to do is convince them that not
only do they have nothing to lose from this transaction, but that, on the
contrary, they have a lot to gain.
This might seem very difficult at first glance. How do you convince a
person they have a lot to gain from a relationship with you when you
apparently don’t have much to offer? The secret to remember is that you
don’t really have to give the person something in terms of material goods.
There’s a lot more a person can offer. You can call it the dynamics of social
relationships, if you wish. You can give a person a lot without parting with
your material goods and money. As a matter of fact, people are looking for
people like you, people who have a lot to offer. Give it to them, and you
will have them eating out of your hand.
Here’s how to do it. We all know that a lot of, if not most, communication
takes place in a nonverbal manner. You don’t even have to open your mouth
and speak to get an idea across. You can depend on body language to do it
for you. Why not use this to our advantage?
How many times have you heard that it’s not just what you say but how you
say it that matters? Keep this in mind and you’ll find things are a whole lot
easier. You should also remember that, from now on, you’re moving toward
becoming an expert communicator. Whatever you’re doing is now no
longer the product of the unconscious; rather, you’re working on the
conscious level.
The other person, by contrast, is not fully aware of what’s happening. You
are working on their unconscious mind. The person will then have no idea
what hit them. Before the person can actually think of what happened, you
will have your wish fulfilled.

Rapport Key: People like others who are like them.

This does not necessarily mean there should be a physical similarity

between two people. It can have the same effect if two people are in fact
doing the same things like standing or sitting in the same positions,
assuming the same postures and talking about a topic on which they
mutually agree.

• Have you ever yawned because someone else yawned?

• When a friend stubs his toe, do you flinch and make the same type
of face?
• Have you ever looked up because others were looking up?
• Have you ever started itching because you watched someone else
scratch?
• Have you ever ended up picking up a Southern accent because you
were talking to someone from the South a tad too long?

Mirroring and Matching

The most basic level of rapport is physically mirroring the person you are
targeting. When you mirror someone, you’re simply offering that person a
reflection of himself or herself. As a matter of fact, you’ve been
“mirroring” all your life. This is how you learned as a child. You learned
verbal communication by going through three stages: babbling, mirroring,
and echolalia. You AUTOMATICALLY will mirror anyone you have a
rapport with. This doesn’t really come out of a conscious effort, but is
rather spontaneous.
This simple technique has a super-powerful impact because of the way
people respond to their own behavior. It’s quite remarkable how people take
a cue from somebody who apparently is trying to imitate them. There’s an
old saying that goes, “Imitation is the sincerest form of flattery.” How true
that really is! All of us seek approval and appreciation, and what better way
to show appreciation than to do and say like the other person is doing or
saying?
When you offer back to your target their own behavior, they relate to it on a
subconscious level and experience a sense of unity. There is little in life as
satisfying as seeing a reflection of ourselves in another. This is one of the
most powerful tools in mind control.
When you see a couple of friends at a coffee shop in conversation, chances
are you’ll find them sitting in the same position and making the same
movements and gestures. If you are in a relationship (and you’re getting
along), you will notice how you and your partner sit in the same physical
position if you’re in close proximity with each other. You will also breathe
with them.
In physics, there is a law called “entrainment,” which states that if two
items in motion are in close enough proximity, they will synchronize. If you
put two grandfather clocks in the same room, for instance, their pendulums
will eventually swing together. This seems also to work for living creatures.
I remember being in New York City teaching this concept. During a break, I
had a few of the students look around the room as we drank our coffee. You
could plainly see that the people engaged in conversation were mirroring
and matching each other to the point of having nearly all the same gestures
and movements. They had known each other for only a few hours, and yet
had established a common bond (learning mind control techniques), thereby
establishing a very natural rapport with each other. Later that day, while
walking to dinner with several of the students, we saw several examples of
this natural occurrence:

• Two NYPD officers talking at a coffee shop, both leaning against

the wall, gesturing with the hand not holding coffee.
• A couple in love, sitting on a park bench in intimate conversation,
their movements perfectly synchronized.
• Two cab drivers in a very loud, animated conversation on directions
to an address.

Since this happens in nature, let’s speed up this phenomenon.

What you want to do is present to your target’s subconscious mind a mirror
image of herself. This puts your target at ease at a subconscious level, since
rapport is natural in friendship, and it speeds up the rapport process. First
you want to match physically your target’s stance. You assume the same
position as they maintain, sitting the same way or standing the same way.

• Breathe at the same rate as they do.

• If they lean slightly, you lean the same way.
• If they cross their legs, you cross yours.
• If they adjust their clothes in some way, you adjust yours in like
manner.

You have to be careful about something very important: your targets must
not feel that you are trying to consciously mimic them or are in any way
making fun of them. So how can you match them without making it too
obvious?
That’s easy! Try this:
1. Slow down your responses. Wait about one to three seconds before
matching their action or posture.

2. Keep your focus on your target; never mind if the movement is not
natural to you. If your target does it, then you do it. If you’re focused on
how you feel, you are not focused on your target. Your internal state is not
important. Only the goal of establishing rapport matters.

Try this as an experiment. The next time you’re in a conversation with

someone and you feel there’s a rapport, lean against a wall or lean back and
continue talking.
Watch what happens. A few seconds later, the other person will lean as
well. Then cross your arms…the other will follow suit.
The more you are in rapport, the more mirroring and matching will occur.
Once you are in complete rapport, you’re in a position to persuade the other
to do as you wish.

A Word of Caution!

Now that you’re aware of this powerful tool, you will begin to understand
why it’s so important that you be careful and aware of the messages you’re
transmitting to your target nonverbally! If you are in rapport, the people you
are communicating with will mirror your:

• Frustration
• Hatred
• Anger
• Disbelief (in them, yourself, or a product)

I stress this because we see this all the time. In fact, historically, leaders
have taken societies to war by having the populace mirror their feelings. Of
course, this can also happen very subtly. Once, while teaching a class, I
received some bad news. Even though I tried to not let my anger show, the
class suddenly took on a very negative tone. The students were mirroring
my internal state. I’d spent a great deal of time getting into rapport with the
class, and now it was coming right back at me! It renewed my respect for
this technology, which indicates that people will mirror their environment.
Exercises to Master Rapport

Breathing:
Mirroring someone’s breathing is subtle because breathing itself is such an
extremely subconscious process. When you mirror and match another
person this way, it’s almost impossible to detect, because it’s something we
all have to do.
Pick some targets (people) to match breathing with, in:

• A coffee shop
• A business meeting
• A party

Physical Posture:
As stated before when people are in rapport, they mirror each other. When
you do this consciously, you move into the area of gaining trust and
confidence at will.
To achieve this, you must practice being able to mirror and match others at
will. The following steps will help you to get the hang of it.

1. Start in an easy place—your workplace preferably.

2. Pick and choose people you know rather well and mirror and match
them in a conversation—you’re doing this anyway, but now move into the
conscious level.

3. Pick a coworker you know the least and start a conversation,

physically mirror and match the other person, maintain your focus on
him/her.

4. Start a conversation with your boss and do the same.

Note: Stay away from controversial subjects at this level.

Now you are ready to move into a social setting. Start a conversation with
someone in a coffee shop or restaurant, using the mirror and match
technique.

Special Bonus: Remote Rapport Targeting

To prove the power of this technology, go to a public place again, like, say,
a coffee shop. Pick a target. Once you have the target spotted, get into the
other’s peripheral vision (off to the side) and begin to mirror and match
from a distance. This is especially fun at a coffee shop. Sit the way the other
does. Breathe with the other. The other takes a sip; you take a sip (have the
same kind of drink, if possible).
You will be amazed at how, before long, your target will start a
conversation with you. The other person will be drawn to you.
The following story will illustrate the efficacy of this technique:
I was driving down from Chicago to Florida to teach an advanced mind
control class. On the way, I decided to test my “targeting” skills. I stopped
at a Waffle House about midnight. I picked a person sitting at the counter.
He was not like me at all physically. He was a big man (belly way over
belt!) with long hair pulled back into a ponytail and a full beard, a leather
vest, and a trucker’s wallet (the type with a chain to the belt). I’m short, in
shape, short-haired, and clean shaven, and I was wearing dress slacks and a
sport shirt. Opposites, if you will!
After sitting for a while, I assumed the same physical posture as my target. I
noticed my target was reading a paper while he drank his coffee and ate. I
had a magazine, so I pretended to be reading it. He turned a page; I did also.
If he took a bite of food, I would. He took a drink of coffee; of course, I did
too.
He refilled his coffee, so I got the waitress to refill my cup. About this time
he started a conversation. He asked who I drove for (he assumed I, too, was
a trucker). I just said I was on my way to a seminar. He looked at my
reading material and asked if it was a martial arts seminar. I just nodded; as
we talked, I kept the focus on him and on what he wanted from life.
I knew I needed to test the level of rapport. As we talked more, my target
stated that after this cup he was going to pull out and get back on the road.
As he drank his coffee, every time he took a sip, I would also, only a very
small sip. When his cup was empty, mine was still half full. I picked up my
coffee and, taking a deep gulp, said it was good and that I would have one
more.
My target looked around, looked at his watch, and said, “I think I will have
one more, too—have to drive late anyway! Could use the coffee.” He was
in rapport and wanted to stay that way, so his conscious mind rationalized
why he would stay (maybe this is why it is hard to get out of a bar with
friends!).
Before our conversation was over, he told me all of his personal
problems, including a prostrate problem that caused sexual dysfunction. I
state this because guys do not talk about this difficulty easily, except with
close friends…even then, rarely. He stated it as if he knew me for years.
When I suggested he see a hypnotist, he answered that he would. This again
reminded me of the power of rapport and mind technology.
Amazed? Practice these skills and see how much more you will be amazed!
Chapter 4
Communication Styles: The Second Key
The goal here is to learn how your target thinks!
Now that you know how to get into a subconscious rapport with someone,
you need to know the secret to decoding their thoughts. When you begin to
think about how people think, the process of how your mind works really
becomes important.
Many of us start to think about all the things psychology has taught us in
recent years. Unconscious motives and the theories Freud, Jung and all the
other great psychological minds have come up with in the last one hundred
years come to our minds.
I know all of this is great information, but it’s of little use to any of us who
want to quickly influence people to our way of thinking (and acting). What
you want is a quick way to decode what’s going on in your target’s head.
Right?
Well, the process of discerning that is what is called “neuropsychogenics.”
We want to know, quickly, how a person’s mind is processing information.
As for the why, which constitutes the deep psychological theories, we shall
leave that to the researchers!
I’ve hypnotized well over seventy-five thousand people, fifty thousand of
those in the last three years. While I was doing this, I researched what
worked in the real world. What I found was startling: people think in very
simple ways. This is not to say people are simple—no! We are not! We each
have a complex psychological makeup that affords us options relative to
how we respond to the world. At the same time, how we really think is
rather simple. The way people process information is very basic.
You have five senses…visual, auditory, kinesthetic (feeling), olfactory
(smell), and gustatory (taste). These are your only senses, and these are
what your brain uses to process information. It’s logical to project that this
is how other people will also process information. Most of the people you’ll
ever deal with process information primarily in one of three ways:

1. Visual (seeing)
2. Auditory (hearing)
3. Kinesthetic (feeling)

We use all of these to communicate, but there’s usually a predominant way

in which a person likes to think and communicate. If you know how your
target thinks and communicates, it puts you into a deeper level of rapport,
thus causing the other to open up to your influence, i.e., to your way of
thinking.
I’d bet if you monitor most of your friends, especially your closest friends,
you’d find you use the same communication styles. This is natural. You
don’t have to work at communicating with them, because you’re already on
the same wavelength. It sounds good to all of you, or it just feels right
talking to them.
See if any of the following apply to you, or to someone you know:

Visual people are those who:

• Speak fast (remember, a picture is worth a thousand words!) they

also use broken sentences and may jump ahead and finish your statements.
• Gesture a lot with their hands. Use a lot of pointed movements.
• Breathe shallow and fast; they may even get breathless if speaking
on a subject they like.
• Are very mindful of how they look—colorful, and like to match
(would rather look good than be comfortable!).
• Look up a lot with their eyes.
• Socialize a lot—like being seen in the right places at the right time!
• Are neat freaks.
• Are impatient.
• Are result-oriented—get the job done.
• Use SHOW ME as their watch words!
• Think very fast (speed of light versus speed of sound).
• Love graphs, charts, visual presentations, EYE CANDY.
• Like short clear, concise presentations that get to the point.
• Hate being interrupted—they may lose their thoughts.
• Ask questions that stimulate visual responses—“How will this look
to the others?”
• Are keen on: “Can you see this happening? Would you like to see
our information?”
• Use visual words: look, see clear, sharp, focus.

Auditory people:

• Speak slower and are rhythmic.

• Like long conversations.
• Tug at their ears or touch their mouths.
• Have deeper breathing, mid-chest range.
• Are more casual in dress—no bright colors, but still like to
“match”!
• Are slower in their thought process but are more deliberate in their
thinking.
• Like to talk things over with others as well as with themselves to
check on how it sounds.
• Love animals, have a kinship with nature.
• Look to the sides a lot.
• Would rather live in the quite countryside than in a city.
• At a party, will huddle with others to talk.
• Like soothing music at work.
• Are good at handling people.
• Are more open to both sides of an argument.
• May over-explain things!
• Need to be told what to do.
• Need to be listened to.
• Do not like charts and graphs.
• Use a lot of stories and metaphors
• Can be talked out of things by others.
• Use auditory words: hear, talk, discuss, cry, buzz.

Kinesthetic people:

• Speak very slowly and deliberately.

• Touch chest or rub chin, use gestures that draw you in.
• Look down.
• Breathe slow and deep.
• Are very casual in dress, comfort being the key.
• Need to apply feeling to thoughts (“I am not sure how I feel about
this”).
• “Huggy,” and may be moody.
• Like parties where they feel comfortable.
• Make great counselors and brilliant business people.
• Like hands-on learning.
• Can read through manipulative presentations and people.
• Do not like graphs or charts.
• May be one step ahead of others in negotiations.
• Use feeling words: touch, grasp, handle, dig in.

To make it even easier, nature has given us a cue to find out how our target
is processing information. In neuropsychogenics we call it the EYE-
MOVEMENT PATTERN. This is simply automatic, unconscious eye
movement that usually accompanies a particular thought process, indicating
the accessing of one or more of the three primary sensory representational
systems. Of course, when people are talking, they’re also thinking. In the
process of thinking and talking, they move their eyes in what are known as
eye-movement patterns. These movements appear to be signals of their
attempts to gain access to internally stored or internally generated
information in their brains. This information is encoded in the speaker’s
mind in one of the representational systems.
When a person “goes inside,” or retreats within, to retrieve a memory or to
create a new thought, the person “makes pictures,” and/or “talks to herself,”
and/or “has feelings and kinesthetic sensations.”
With a little bit of practice, eye-movement patterns are easily observable
behavior. When you watch people talking—and, of course, simultaneously
thinking—you’ll notice that their eyes are constantly in motion, darting
back and forth, up and down, occasionally glancing at objects and people,
but just as much “focused” on inner experiences. As previously stated, these
movements are signals of the way they are thinking. In the descriptions that
we will be discussing, “looking” would refer to the movements of a
person’s eyes in the direction indicated, “left” meaning toward the speaker’s
left, and “right” toward his/her right.
It would be helpful to keep in mind that this accessing behavior represents
“looking” internally; i.e., during the moment of information retrieval,
people are generally not conscious of external visual stimuli. Rather, they
are concentrating on internally stored or generated images, sounds, words,
and feelings. Please observe also that the words in parentheses in each
category indicate the kind of information being accessed.
Internationally famous therapist Virginia Satir discovered that the eyes
move as they access memories and came up with Eye-Accessing
Movements.

• How you ask the question determines where your eyes will go.
• How people move their eyes tells you what part of their brain they
are accessing.
• You process information internally either visually, auditorily or
kinesthetically, olfactorily or gustatorily.

A small percentage of people are reversed. Some say if you are left-handed,
then your eye-accessing movements are reversed. This also varies from
nation to nation. The French, for instance, use more gustatory and olfactory
accessing than we do.
The easiest way to remember these is:

• If you look up, you are making pictures.

• If you look side to side, you are making sounds.
• If you look down, you are either talking to yourself or accessing a
feeling.

Until you get used to it, just remember: pictures, sounds, feelings. Then
learn each side. The diagram illustrates the direction of a person’s eye-
accessing movements as you are facing the person, that is, your left is the
other’s right.

When we process information internally, the process itself can be visual,

auditory, or kinesthetic. It is possible to access the meaning of a word in
any one, or in a combination of the three primary sensory channels.
Vc Visual Constructed: Seeing images of things never seen before,
or seeing things differently than they were seen before. Questions include:
“What will you look like at ninety?”

Ac Auditory Constructed: Hearing sounds not heard before. Questions

include: “What would your name sound like backward?” “How would a
dog barking, a car horn, and children playing sound?”

K Kinesthetic: Feeling emotions, tactile sensations (sense of

touch), or proprioceptive feeling (feelings of muscle movement). Questions
include: “Is your nose cold now?” “What does it feel like to run?”

Vr Visual Remembered: Seeing images of things seen before, in the

same way they were seen before. Questions include: “What does your coat
look like?”

Ar Auditory Remembered: Remembering sounds heard before.

Questions include: “What’s the last thing I said?” “What does your alarm
clock sound like?”

Ad Auditory Digital: Talking to oneself. Questions include: “Say

something to yourself that you often say.” “Recite the Pledge of
Allegiance.”

V Visual: The blank stare is visual—either constructed or

remembered.

To keep this as simple as possible while you’re learning this, it is best to

focus on the fact that if your target looks up, they are making a picture. If
they look to the sides, they are making sounds. If they look down, they are
talking to themselves or feeling something.
A good example of how you can use eye-accessing cues is in the case of a
car sale. A salesman might stress different features to a customer depending
on the customer’s primary representational system in order to “step into his
model of the world.”
For an auditory customer, the salesman could stress the thud of the
reinforced doors, the upscale stereo system, the whisper-quiet ride. To a
visual customer, the salesman would stress the clean, sleek lines, the clear
view of the scenery through the large tinted windows and sunroof, and
might ask them to picture themselves behind the wheel. A kinesthetic
person might respond more to the feel of the full grain leather seats, the
thought of the wind in their hair, and the warm sun on their face through the
sunroof as they drive along the highway.
You also have to stress that even though they have a primary system, you
should try to appeal to all systems, because we all use more than one. This
would also take into account another person who might be involved in the
decision making process, i.e., the spouse or parent accompanying the buyer.
Consider an example from your personal life. An auditory husband might
leave socks on the floor, dishes on the table, shoes in the corner, newspapers
here and there. A visual wife might feel that she married a total slob who
doesn’t appreciate her effort to create a pleasant, tidy house. “If he loved
me,” she would think, “he would care that I spend all day cleaning.”
On the other hand, the auditory husband may come home from work and sit
down to read the newspaper. Meanwhile, the wife has the food processor
running, the TV is on, and one teenager is blasting the CD player while the
other is teasing a barking dog. The husband, who is auditory and trying to
engage a visual task, screams, “Can’t I get some peace and quiet in my own
home?” Again misunderstandings can occur. It might save a trip to the
divorce court if both partners realized that:

• To this wife, the visual appearance of the home or her clothes or the
lawn is important to her, though it makes little impression on an auditory
person.
• To this husband, the bombardment caused by of all these sounds at
once would be like a visual person watching a laser show in an electrical
storm!

Just understanding differences can make things run much smoother.

Finally, the situation of teenagers coming home late and the parents asking
where they’ve been is one way to utilize eye-movement cues. If the
teenager looks up and left, they are visually remembering and telling you
where they were. If they look up and right (visual construct), it is possible
they are fabricating a story that you would accept. It doesn’t necessarily
mean that they are lying, but it may be that the parent ought to ask a few
more questions.

Eye-Accessing Cues—A Coworker

For this exercise, ask a coworker (or business associate) to sit opposite you
in a comfortable chair as you ask the following fifteen questions. Next to
each question, note the eye-accessing cues you observed by writing beside
each question the abbreviations in bold below:

Vc Visual Constructed—movement up and to the person’s right

Vr Visual Remembered—movement up and to the person’s left
V Visual—movement straight ahead and eyes defocused
Ac Auditory Constructed—movement sideways to the person’s right
Ar Auditory Remembered—movement sideways to the person’s left
K Kinesthetic—movement down and to the person’s right
Ad Auditory Digital—movement down and to the person’s left

Example: How does your car’s engine sound? Ar

1. Think of your favorite song and hum it to yourself. _____

2. Which is colder, your right or your left hand? _____
3. What would you look like if you weighed fifteen pounds less?
_____
4. Who was the first person you saw yesterday? _____
5. Think about the last time someone cut you off when you were
driving your car. _____
6. What does a car alarm sound like? _____
7. What does your mother’s voice sound like? _____
8. When you are feeling sad, what lifts your spirits? _____
9. How much is 125 divided by 5? _____
10. Who was the last person you spoke with before you came here?
_____
11. Recite “Mary had a little lamb” silently. _____
12. What does it sound like when the television is on, the phone rings,
and someone knocks on the door? _____
13. Think about the last time you felt proud of something you did.
_____
14. What color are the walls in your bedroom? _____
15. Imagine what a purple dog would look like. _____

Representational Systems Overview

Seeing (Visual)
Eyes These people look up to their right or left,
unfocused.
Gestures Their gestures are quick and angular, and include
pointing.
Breathing High, shallow, and quick.
Speech Fast.
Words The words that capture their attention include:
See, look, imagine, reveal, perspective.
They prefer pictures, diagrams, movies.

Hearing (Auditory)
Eyes These people look down to the left and may appear
“shifty-eyed.”
Gestures Their gestures are balanced, touching one’s face
(i.e., rubbing the chin).
Breathing and Mid-chest, rhythmic.
Speech Speak rhythmically.
Words The words that capture their attention include:
Hear, listen, ask, tell, clicks, in-tune.
They prefer lists, summaries, quotes, readings.

Feeling (Kinesthetic)
Eyes These people look down to the right.
Gestures Their gestures are rhythmic, touching their chest
basically true for men)—Clinton.
Breathing and Deep, slow with pauses.
Speech Speak slowly.
Words The words that capture their attention include:
Feel, touch, grasp, catch on, contact.
Presentations Toward [Goals]: achieve, attain, gain.
Away from [Problems]: avoid, relieve, out.

To be more persuasive with all groups, make the representation BIGGER,

CLOSER, MORE COLORFUL, 3-D, MOVIE.

The following lists are predicates in language (verbs, adverbs, and

adjectives) that have specific representational systems. A way of detecting
the primary (most commonly used) representational system a person has in
consciousness is by listening to the language, the sentences generated, and
noticing the predicates used.

Visual
See
Picture
Perceive
Notice
Look
Show
Appear
Clear
Pretty
Colorful
Hazy
Observe
Flash
Focus
Bright
Scene
Perspective
Imagine
View
Vista
Horizon
Make a scene
Tunnel vision
Plainly see
See eye-to-eye
Mind’s eye
Bird’s-eye view
Catch a glimpse
Bright future
In light of
Audtitory Sound
Hear
Discuss
Listen
Talk
Call on
Quiet
Inquire
Noisy
Loud
Outspoken
Articulate
Scream Pronounce
Remark
Resonate
Harmony
Shrill
Oral
Whimper
Mention
Tongue-tied
Ring a bell
Loud and clear
Idle talk
To tell the truth
Word for word
Rap session
Unheard of
Feel
Relax
Grasp
Handle
Stress
Pressure
Smooth
Clumsy
Rough
Hard
Grip
Warm
Rush
Firm
Euphoric
Clammy
Touch
Calm
Dull
Burning
Stinging
Get the drift
Boils down to
Hang in there
Sharp as a tack
Slipped my mind
Pull some strings
Moment of panic
Smooth operator
Get the drift Think
Decide
Understand
Know
Develop
Prepare
Activate
Manage
Repeat
Advise
Indicate
Consider
Motivate
Unspecified
Plan
Anticipate
Create
Generate
Deduce
Direct
Achieve
Accomplish
Initiate
Conclude
New knowledge
Creative option
Aware of
Intensify
Incorporate
Differentiate
Represent

Olfactory/Gustatory
Smell
Fragrant
Stink
Reek
Aroma
Pungent
Sour
Sweet
Acrid
Musty
Fresh
Bland
Stale
Fresh
Bitter
Salty
Nutty
Delicious
Salivate
Spoiled
Sniff
Smokey
Bitter pill
Fish notion

Once you learn these, you can transpose them to their representational
system. Don’t be like the therapist who says, “Get in touch with your
feelings,” when the client is visual. Women like therapy more than men
because they are more feelings-oriented (kinesthetic). It is harder for men to
“get in touch” with their feelings. A person can also be thinking feelings
and talking pictures. A nationally-known motivational speaker and expert in
the psychology of peak performance, Tony Robbins, is auditory but
represents himself visually on stage.
Always communicate in the other person’s world. Use their terminology.
Mirror their words, tonality, speed, etc. Using sales is all that therapy is . . .
asking questions. Talk their language. Step into their model of the world.

Representational Systems Chart:

Seeing (Visual) (60 percent)

Eyes: Look up to their left or right or may appear

unfocused
Gestures: Are quick and angular, include pointing
Breathing and speech High, shallow, and speak quick, staccato
Words: Visual terms: see, look, imagine, reveal
perspective
Presentations: Prefer pictures, diagrams, movies (eye
candy) graphs, data

Hearing (Auditory) (25 percent)

Eyes: Level left and right, down to the left (may
appear shifty)
Gestures: Rhythmic, touching one’s face, (i.e., rubbing the chin), ears,
mouth
Breathing and speech: Midchest, rhythmic
Words: Auditory terms: hear, listen, ask, tell, click
Presentations: Prefer lists, summaries, quotes, readings

Feeling (Kinesthetic) (15 percent)

Eyes: Down and to the right; look down a lot
Gestures: Rhythmic, touching the chest, in close
Breathing and Speech: Deep, slow, with pauses
Words: Feeling words: feel, touch, grasp, catch on,
contact
Presentations: Toward (goals); achieve, attain, gain
Away from (problems); avoid, relieve, out

Unspecified
When you use unspecified terms, the person will fill in is the blank using
her own representational system. If I say “think,” and you are visual, you
will fill in with visual terms.
Again, we all use all three, but there is usually one that is predominant. It
may change by context. Someone may be visual at work and kinesthetic at
home. (A kinesthetic, by the way, will drive a visual crazy.)
Representational systems are the most powerful tool you can use to
influence people. Observe how a person moves their eyes, listen to their
language, step into their world.

Rapport = Really All People Prefer Others Resembling Themselves.

People like people who are like themselves. If you hear someone
representing visually, feed back visually.
Training hint: If you ask, “Are there any questions?” with your hands
pointing down, it will subconsciously discourage any questions. If you ask
the same question with hands pointing up, you will encourage questions.

Identifying Predicates—Coworker
All of us use predicates that indicate our preferred representational systems,
and your coworkers are no exception. For today, listen to the predicates
used by a coworker with whom you spend a lot of time, and write down
each predicate you hear. When you’ve finished, add the number of words
from each system to determine the preferred representational system.

Get the Drift—Represent

I remember being in a situation that showed how this can be lifesaving

learning. As consultant to the management of a steel mill, I was trying to
see how best to help the employees comply with what the employers
expected of them. While I was at it, an employee with twenty years on the
job was being counseled about his drinking. He was told that he needed to
stop drinking and start attending AA meetings regularly. Failing that, he
faced the risk of being fired.
The counselor, who was not mirroring him—in fact, was “in his face,”
directly across from him—was asking him (in a very authoritative manner)
how he felt about his drinking habit, and what feelings stopped him from
attending AA meeting. The client responded that he did not see that he
really had a problem with drinking, and, as such, he just could not see
himself going to AA.
The counselor responded even before the man was finished, “How will you
feel when you’re fired from your job, and out on the street, after being
twenty years on the job? Won’t this make you feel bad?”
The client responded, “I just do not see anything like this happening at all. I
can’t see myself out of work.”
This went on for a while before they asked for my input. I started by
mirroring the client; I then asked what it would take him to “see” himself
going to AA. I also had him imagine SEEING himself cleaning out his
locker, as he SAW the guards waiting to escort him out the gate for the last
time. I asked him, “Can you SEE how your drinking has made the company
SHOW you the door?”
The client slumped in his chair, his eyes teared up, and he asked, “Does it
really look that bad? Is the future really that dark?”
I replied, “Darker than you now SEE! It is your choice to LOOK NOW at
your drinking as something fine, when we all SEE a problem, a problem
that will SEE you put out on the street.”
“What can I do?” he asked. Now he was ready to be influenced and
controlled, but he had to SEE the options and penalties.
All I did was use this technology to help this man. What the counselor did
was OK; in fact it would have been brilliant if the worker had been a feeling
person. The client was not resistant; the counselor was.
Here are some exercises to help you master decoding your target’s
communication style and representational systems.

Exercise 1: Celebrity Interviews

Good interviewers are able to probe people with insightful questions. Watch
shows that feature well-known public figures as they respond to questions. I
suggest you tape a few shows, like Larry King and Oprah Winfrey, and
watch them.

• With the sound turned down, watch for eye movements. Do you
notice any patterns?
• Now turn up the sound and listen to the words. Do they match the
eye movements?
• Look for any down-right eye movements to tough questions.

Exercise 2: Game Shows

These shows have ordinary, real people in different situations, especially

shows that make the people think and retrieve information. “Jeopardy,” and
“Who Wants to Be a Millionaire?” are good, to name two. Tape them, and
again:

• Watch for eye-movement cues

• Listen for predicate words.

Exercise 3: Controversial Subjects

Some shows delight in the pitfalls of human conditions—Jerry Springer and

the like. Watch these shows and repeat the above exercises. I also suggest
you watch shows like “Meet the Press” and “Crossfire.” The results are,
well, eye-openers!
Life Application

Here’s a story submitted by a student illustrating the power of this

technology and ways to practice it in real life:

After having recently completed some of the rapport skills that Dr.
Horton teaches through his beginner tape series, this is what I came up with.
What makes my story all the more interesting, I believe, is the fact that:

1) I have been practicing combat martial arts for thirty years and
could’ve used those skills instead of the rapport skills under the
circumstances, and
2) I was with my four-year old boy on the day I used my rapport skills
INSTEAD of my martial arts fighting skills. When I look back on it now, I
realize that it was a blessing, given the fact I would never want my son to
experience witnessing his father engaged in the violent act of seriously
harming anyone, much less a dangerous ex-felon who might pull out a knife
or a gun and try and really hurt his father or anyone else.

Twenty minutes after getting on a city bus headed for downtown

Los Angeles with my four-year-old son, two men got on board and sat
down across from us and started sharing in hushed tones experiences about
their prison lives and some of the violent crimes they had committed.
I glanced over a few times, just enough to notice the telltale signs of
men who’ve done serious time behind bars: multiple prison tattoos done
with pen ink, large upper-body mass and smaller leg development, prison
tans, vacant eyes with cruel expressions, and hard faces. All the signs I’ve
learned about from the time I’ve spent around Orange County Sheriffs and
prison guards (including a brother-in-law) who I’ve spoken to, personally
trained, or visited at their workplaces.
Having just started learning neuro-psychogenics, it hadn’t yet
occurred to me that I could use what I was learning in “real life” and it was
not just a clinical or therapeutic situation. I was still relying on all my other
“life” skills that had taken care of me up to now. In fact, I was learning
NPG to promote my Pain Management/Pain Control Practice that I was
struggling to get off the ground, and had spoken to Dr. Horton about ways
that NFNLP could help me launch my business. The idea of using rapport
skills to “connect” with someone that I would only normally “connect” with
on a combat level was beyond the grasp of my mind.
I quickly went through some options: Switching seats is out because
the bus was overcrowded and people were in fact standing as well as sitting.
There were still ten or fifteen stops to go before we got to my wife’s
workplace, which put us too far away to walk (he’s a sixty-pound four-year-
old, which is a little heavy to carry very far). Even if we did get off the bus
now, it was a bad part of town to walk through, much less wait around to
catch another bus.
The fact that both of these guys were wearing army fatigue jackets
and it was over ninety degrees outside didn’t escape my attention, either.
Then it came to me—something in the tapes that Dr. Horton referred
to as “Targeting.” I could start mirroring and matching their physiology. It
didn’t matter which one, and it didn’t make sense to do both men because
“targeting” doesn’t work like that.
“I’ve got to pick just one,” I told myself, so I selected the man
closest to me and noticed how he was sitting. I crossed my ankles like I was
a mirror reflection of him, and did the same with my arms. Whenever he
moved, I waited a few seconds and then I readjusted my posture to match
his. Then the bus stopped and he actually got off, leaving me with his
“friend,” who I immediately began pacing. I mirrored his movement at first,
and then I matched it. Why mirror then match? It provided me with an
opportunity to get into his particular rhythm gracefully.
After just a few minutes, I began noticing the rise-and-fall rhythm of
his shoulders and thought I would make an effort to mirror his breathing
patterns. He also had a habit of folding his arms across his chest, which
made it easier to calibrate his breathing. Before I knew it, I was pacing his
physiology INCLUDING his breathing. He even looked at his watch a few
times, after which I looked at mine.
Ten, maybe fifteen minutes went by, and the bus slowly emptied out
as my son and I approached our destination. People got away from this
“mean-looking” guy as quickly as possible. I sat there, using my rapport
skills, confident, very confident, that I was actually connecting with this ex-
con on an unconscious level. And before I thought of testing to see if we
were in rapport by leading him, guess what!
 Three stops before I was to get off the bus with my son—are you
ready?— he leans forward and actually manages what I’ll consider a smile
—showing four upper teeth and all! And, like we’re cell mates, he asks me,
“Hey, man, does this bus go all the way into Venice?”
“I’m pretty sure it does” was my response, but I made sure to
answer after a brief hesitation, because I wanted him to think I was really
reading a newspaper I had been pretending to read to mirror the magazine
he was reading.
“Thanks, man.” He then glanced at my son, winked at him, and then
went back to his magazine. The wink unnerved me a little, I have to admit,
but better a wink than an icy stare, right?
For those readers who don’t understand hard-core violent prison
types—when you’re in their presence (especially if there are two or more of
them!)—the response I got from this man speaks volumes about the rapport
I achieved with him in the short period of time I paced him. You would
have had to be there to get the full effect, and reading my words, short of a
VAKOG novella, doesn’t do the experience justice. All I can say is, I was
initially ready to go into combat mode based on my instincts, and I ended
up using rapport techniques! You be the judge.
Did I use combat rapport skills? Absolutely! Just like the combat
martial arts I practice. Only it’s taken me thirty years to achieve the skill
level I’m at today with my mind and body as it pertains to martial arts.
Whereas it literally took me as long as it takes to watch the “rapport” part of
the tapes to learn the rapport skills that I used on the bus that day. I had to
write this to let everyone know that I am just a beginner, and all I did was
“paint by numbers” with what Dr. Horton taught.
Chapter 5
The Third Key: Effective Listening and
Putting It Together
Now that you understand the basics of both rapport and communication
styles, it’s time to put them together. When you mirror and match someone
physically, you also want to match their language and eye movements. This
helps further deepen your level of rapport. When you do this consciously,
you make your target feel comfortable, almost as though the two of you
have known each other for years.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Although being liked can be a by-product of rapport,
it is important to remember that rapport is much more than simply being
liked. To become a master of mental science, one who easily and fully
establishes rapport with others, you must become an exquisite partner in the
communication dance. To seek rapport with others is to invite them to
dance, and then influence them in a manner that is persuasive, decisive,
and, at the same time, smooth and elegant throughout the interaction, even
as you reach a mutually desirable outcome.
You might find it useful to think of rapport as how responsive the other
person is to you and your positive intentions. You create rapport by being
responsive to the other person through pacing and mirroring that person’s
verbal and nonverbal behavior.
The most basic rule of human nature is that people are primarily interested
in talking about themselves and what they want. They are not really
interested in what you think or want.
To master rapport, you must accept the fact that you have to meet and
accept people for who they are, not what you think they are or should be. A
person’s thoughts are usually governed by self-interest. Rapport skills give
you the upper hand in skillfully getting your way, though in a very subtle
manner. When you let people talk about themselves or something they are
passionate about, they will be deeply interested and will ultimately think
you’re a genius and great conversationalist! To do this, you must learn to
give up words like I, me, and mine. These must become the smallest part of
your vocabulary. Consciously pick your words, because your target is the
important thing on which to focus.
If you give up the satisfaction you get from talking about yourself, and the
pleasure you get from using I, me, mine, your personal power will increase
exponentially. This will take some practice. It’s normal to talk about
yourself but, as you learn this technique, you’ll easily master this skill.
Also, you must understand one universal trait of all human beings, a trait so
strong, it makes us do a lot of the things that we do, both good and bad.
This is the DESIRE TO FEEL IMPORTANT and BE RECOGNIZED. The
more important you make people feel, the more they will respond to you.
Pretend everyone you meet has a huge, bright sign around their neck that
says: “MAKE ME FEEL IMPORTANT!”
The power of mirroring and matching allows you this special opportunity.
Rapport skills will enhance your life and make you a great communicator.
People will want to do what you want them to do. When people tell me they
have problems with rapport techniques, their biggest problem is that they
start with the techniques but then veer into talking about themselves. This
kills rapport.

Exercises to Make People Glad They Talked to You!

Imagine that someone of great importance, like the president, a famous

movie star, or perhaps your personal idol, just came through the door. What
would your initial reaction be?
Most people do a quick intake of air, a slight gasp. This quick intake of air
is how we show HONOR and RESPECT at the subconscious level. When
you first meet someone, and every time after that, take a moment to
acknowledge that person in this way, then act pleased to meet them. This
will make them feel noticed, respected and important (Bill Clinton was a
master at this skill, and so was Ronald Reagan. People wanted to be around
them).
Here are some exercises to ingrain these skills in your subconscious:

1. Exercise 1: Go to a coffee shop or restaurant and start a conversation

with someone who is unlike you—the last person you would normally talk
to. Use your rapport skills and focus on them; get them to talk to you
(remember to talk little or none about you).
2. Exercise 2: At work, target someone from a distance, make contact
after a few minutes, and again mirror and match at all levels and see where
this takes you.

3. Exercise 3: Go to a department store, look for an obscure item, and

ask an attendant for help. As you are being assisted, turn on your rapport
skills. Ask them how they came to work there, where they are going next,
etc.

4. Exercise 4: Get one of the goals you had in mind when buying this
book. Now go and use your skills in this area.

Here are some tips to help you listen as you work at building rapport skills.
The first step in developing good listening skills is to become aware of why
listening is important in your professional life and personal relationships.
The second step is to practice using active listening skills.
People have a tendency to think of listening as a passive activity, when the
opposite is true. I had the opportunity to be the only non-law-enforcement
person to attend the Federal Bureau of Investigation’s Crisis (Hostage)
Negotiation course at the FBI Academy. The heart of this course is the
concept of active listening.
What’s interesting to those of us studying this field is that these negotiators
deal daily with getting others to do what they want. They’ve found that the
key lies in truly listening to the target and getting them to reveal the
information the negotiator needs.
The natural drawback is that most people have the desire to talk too much.
We’re trained in most fields to gather information, then make a decision and
move on. We don’t spend enough time letting the other person tell their
story.
Hostage negotiators have found it more effective to “talk the person out.”
This calls for tremendous patience in listening in order to formulate a plan
for the safe release of the hostages.
Let’s take a cue from these experts and make this a part of our skills!

Guidelines for Good Listening

• Remember the rule to make them “feel important”!
• Never interrupt when the other person is speaking. Allow the
speaker to complete his thought.
• Eliminate distractions.
• Maintain eye contact with the speaker, without giving the
impression of “staring.”
• Show interest by pulling your chair closer and leaning forward.
• Keep your posture aligned with that of your target—mirror and
match.
• Give verbal and nonverbal responses to what the speaker is saying.

Listening is a skill that improves with practice, but common obstacles to

good listening can impede your progress. It seems obvious that having the
television set on during a conversation would be a distraction and an
obstacle to good listening. Our own attitudes and personality traits can also
become obstacles to listening. We must take an honest look at ourselves and
how we deal with the world in order to remove these obstacles.
People who tend to be mistrustful, or who take a combative stance toward
others, may find it difficult to engage in healthy and open listening. The
same is true for people who get gratification from pleasing others or other
forms of dependency…it becomes difficult to truly hear what people are
trying to say when a person hears only what she needs to hear.

Common Obstacles to Listening

• Being Judgmental: You listen only to gain support for the negative
images you already have.
• Rehearsing: You actively create your argument against the speaker’s
point of view as it is being presented.
• Mind Reading: You may disregard what the speaker is saying and
try to surmise what she really means.
• Advising: Giving advice, instead of just listening, to make yourself
feel needed. (Or it may be a way of distancing yourself from the speaker’s
true feelings.)
• Pleasing: You’re so concerned about being nice and placating that
you won’t hesitate to interrupt to agree just to maintain peace. However, it
prevents you from hearing what the speaker needs to say.
• Filtering: You hear some things the speaker says, but not
everything.
• Deflecting: You redirect by changing the subject or telling a joke
when the topic is uncomfortable for you.

Again, we’re talking about active listening. True listening is more than
passively being quiet while the speaker talks. It is half of an active
collaborative method of communication. The first level of listening is
attentive listening. For this type of listening, we convey that we are
genuinely interested in the speaker’s point of view and what he has to say.
The second level of listening is active listening. This type of listening
assumes that communication is a two-way process, which involves giving
feedback or reflecting the speaker.
Active listening requires the listener to paraphrase, clarify, and give
feedback.
Paraphrasing is a vital component of active listening. By restating in your
own words what the speaker said, you’re able to correct misconceptions as
they occur and overcome the obstacles to listening. The speaker feels she
has been heard and is understood.
Clarifying provides more depth to the listening process than exclusively
using paraphrasing. The purpose of clarifying is to ask questions, in an
empathic and helpful way, about what the speaker is saying. Clarifying tells
the speaker you’re really interested and want to know more about specific
areas.
Giving feedback involves providing your own thoughts on what the speaker
has said, while avoiding the obstacles to good listening. This gives the
speaker another opportunity to see you understand him. When we listen
well to the speaker, we not only show that person care and respect, but we
also show we’re open to the world around us.

Listening to Children

Childhood is when people develop a level of self-esteem that may be with

them throughout their lifetime. Indeed, a child who has been listened to is
much more likely to develop a positive self-image than one who has not
been heard. Listening to children makes them feel they matter! Children
need to be heard, too.
Use the following listening techniques to address the special needs of
children:

1. Pay special attention as the child talks to you. Maintain good eye
contact and eliminate distractions…all distractions. Children can tell by
your reply whether or not they have your full attention.
2. Listen with due patience. Listen as if you have plenty of time. A
child’s vocabulary is often limited. Frequently repetitive in their use of
words, it may take them longer to express their ideas.
3. Children sometimes need encouragement to talk. Children are
generally inexperienced in the art of conversation, so the adult will have to
ask some questions. A child is more willing to open up when he feels an
adult is really attentive.
4. Listen to the child’s nonverbal messages. Children communicate not
only through words, but also through their body language, facial
expressions, tone of voice, energy levels and changes in behavior. Pay
attention to the cues and respond in the way that is best for the child.
5. Pay attention to the child’s mood, and be sure the time and setting is
right for the child to talk. Sometimes a child just wants to play or be left
alone. Being playful with a child who wishes to play may also encourage
them to open up.

One of the most important principles of good communication is that success

is measured according to whether what you do works!
Another thing that will help you sharpen your listening and communication
skills at this level is to eliminate negatives from your vocabulary.

What Does “Don’t” Mean?

There is a stupid question if there ever was one! Everyone knows “don’t”
means “do not.” So, is this a trick question or what? Let’s find out.
Don’t think of Santa Claus! I have the feeling you now have an internal
picture of the little man with a long white beard wearing the famous red
suit. Or you heard Santa’s voice, internally, saying, “Merry Christmas! Ho!
Ho! Ho!” You may have had a feeling of the fat man himself, or a smell or
taste of Christmas.
Now, don’t think of how old you are.
You thought of your age or your birth date, right?
The mind only works in positives. For the mind to understand and process
what you don’t want to happen, the brain must first think about the action. It
has to consider doing the action before it can consider not doing it. For
instance, say I tell my client, “Don’t think of my competitor’s product for
this job.” For his brain to make sense of that statement, my client must first
have a representation of my competitor’s product (and maybe how it would
fit this job!). If you tell a child, “Don’t play in the street,” she must first
have an internal representation of playing in the street. Remember this
when you tell your assistant, “Don’t be late for this next meeting.”
The classic statement we hear all the time is, “Don’t worry.” In order to
refrain from worrying and make sense of the directive (“Don’t worry”), the
listener must first have an idea of worrying. Have you ever heard someone
say to a salesperson, “Don’t worry about your sales slump”? It would be
much better to say, “Be assured, you’ll be fine,” or “Relax, and focus on the
positives. We all go through this.”
The focus must always be on the desired outcome, or purpose, of the
communication, and the extent to which outcome is achieved. To transfer
understanding from yourself to another person, you need to make sure what
you’re saying nonverbally supports what you’re saying verbally. Your state
of mind and how you feel will affect the information you’re trying to
convey.
To illustrate, here’s an interesting exercise.

Negative/Positive Outcomes Exercise

To ascertain the power of negative and positive outcomes, do the following

exercise.
Find a quiet place where you can concentrate without any distractions. This
includes turning off any television or radio that may be playing in the
background.

Words Associated with Negative Outcome

Think about an event you do not want to happen or a situation you would
find unpleasant or distasteful. This could be anything: your career, a
personal relationship, a project you are working on, whatever. Concentrate
on the event for a few minutes. Put yourself totally in the situation. Hear the
sounds, picture the event, experience the feelings, etc. Notice the words that
come to mind when you think of the negative outcome of that experience.

Words Associated with Positive Outcome

Now think of the same situation, but this time, in a positive sense. Mentally,
experience fully all of the positive aspects. Put yourself totally in the
situation, hear the sounds, picture the event, experience the feelings, etc.
Think about how great you will feel when you achieve what you want.
Notice the words that come to mind when you think of the positive outcome
of that experience.

Which of the two above scenarios did you prefer? Probably the one with the
positive outcome! The difference between the two events is not just in your
mind. If someone had been watching you, they would have noticed a
difference in your facial expression, your breathing and your body posture.
Physiologically, you become what you think about.
The difference between success and failure is how you envision your
outcome. Concentrating on what you don’t want to happen, sometimes
known as worrying, can have a negative impact on more than just your
physical body. It has to do with how your brain processes outcomes and
desires. Your brain ignores negatives. You may say to yourself, “I don’t
want to be late for the meeting,” but what your brain registers is LATE. The
way to “trick” your brain, if you will, is to tell yourself, “I want to get to the
meeting ten minutes early.” Your brain hears “early,” and that is what it
records as your desired outcome.
It may be difficult at first to eliminate negatives from your thoughts and
speech, but with a little practice it can be done. You will be amazed by the
results. For practice, complete the next exercise. Then we will return to the
best way to create the outcomes that will give you the results you want.

Eliminating Negative Suggestions Exercise

Most of us use the “don’t” word on a regular basis. We say things like,
“Don’t forget to pick up bread and milk on the way home.” What the brain
hears is, “Forget to pick up bread and milk.” I can assure you, that is exactly
what happened. You forgot the bread and milk.
For this exercise, keep track of how many times you hear the word “don’t”
used around you. If possible, write the sentences down. Advertisements can
be a good source of negative suggestions. Beneath each sentence, write a
more positive way to express the desired outcome. (Note: You may want to
carry around a pocket notebook so you can jot the sentences down as you
hear them.)

Negative Suggestion: Don’t forget to call the client about tomorrow’s

meeting.
Positive Suggestion: Let the client know we’ll be meeting tomorrow.

Negative Suggestion: Don’t put that file away; I’m not done looking it over.
Positive Suggestion: Keep that file out until I’m done looking it over.

REMEMBER TO TELL PEOPLE WHAT YOU WANT THEM TO DO!

You can also decide to tell them the opposite. In a personal setting, you
might say, “Don’t think about how much fun it would be to go out with me
tonight.” In a business arena, “Yes, that other model is a nice car. Don’t
worry about how it was recalled last year for safety reasons. I’m sure it’s
fine now.”
If you practice these skills, you’ll be amazed how you will be able to get
people to follow you in ways you never thought possible. Use these skills
with respect and honor.

Thought Awareness, Rational Thinking and Positive Thinking

These three related tools are useful in combating negative thinking.

Negative thoughts occur when you put yourself down, criticize yourself for
errors, doubt your abilities, expect failure, etc. Negative thinking is the
negative side of suggestion—just as making positive statements to yourself
helps you to build confidence, improve performance and improve your
mental skills, negative thinking damages these things.

Thought Awareness
Thought awareness is the process by which you observe your thoughts for a
time, perhaps during a performance or a training session, and are aware of
the thoughts going through your head. It’s best not to suppress any
thoughts. Just let them run their course while you observe them.
Watch for negative thoughts while you observe your “stream of
consciousness.” Normally, these will appear and disappear being barely
noticed. You may not even notice them at all. Examples of common
negative thoughts are:

• worries about performance

• a preoccupation with the symptoms of stress
• dwelling on consequences of poor performance
• self-criticism
• feelings of inadequacy

Make a note, whether mental or physical, of the thought, and then let the
stream of consciousness run on. Thought awareness is the first step in the
process of eliminating negative thoughts—you can’t counter thoughts you
don’t know you think!

Rational Thinking
Once you’re aware of your negative thoughts, write them down and review
them rationally. See whether the thoughts have any basis in reality. Often
you will find that negative thoughts disappear when you challenge them and
see that they are obviously wrong. They often persist only because they
escape notice.

Positive Thinking and Affirmation

You may find it useful to counter negative thoughts with positive
affirmations. You can use affirmations to build confidence and change
negative behavior patterns into positive ones. You can base affirmations on
clear, rational assessments of fact, and use them to undo the damage that
negative thinking may have done to your self-confidence.

Examples of affirmations are:

• I can achieve my goals.

• I am completely myself and people will like me for myself.
• I am completely in control of my life.
• I learn from my mistakes. They increase the basis of experience on
which I can draw.
• I am a good, valued person in my own right.

Traditionally, people have advocated positive thinking almost recklessly, as

a solution to everything. It should, however, be used with common sense:
no amount of positive thinking will make everyone who applies it an
Olympic champion marathon runner (although an Olympic marathon runner
is unlikely to have reached that level without being pretty good at positive
thinking). First decide—rationally—what goals you can realistically attain
with hard work, and then use positive thinking to reinforce these.

Stress

To help you understand more about positive thinking and stress, here’s a
short quiz from the work of Dr. Totko and Dr. Olgilive*, whom many
consider the leaders in sports psychology.
All of the questions are to be answered either True or False.

1. Under high levels of stress, athletes typically have a broad attention

span. T or F
2. The clammy feeling we often get when stressed is caused by our
body’s natural defense against bleeding to death. T or F
3. Elite level performers have fewer nervous reactions to stress than do
non-elite level performers. T or F
4. High levels of stress make it more difficult to think clearly. T or F
5. Getting sick to your stomach and throwing up when nervous is your
body’s way of telling you that you are overstressed. T or F
6. Caffeine exaggerates the physical and mental effects of stress. T or
F
7. The body’s stress response, which is commonly referred to as the
fight-or-flight response, allows us to do superhuman feats. T or F
8. The only time stress is good is when there is no stress. T or F
9. Sighing as you exhale is more relaxing than not sighing. T or F
10. Under stress, athletes often revert back to their most well-learned
behaviors. T or F
Answer Key
1. False. Under high levels of stress, athletes tend to have a narrow
attention span, often referred to as tunnel vision. Attention may also focus
on the athlete’s internal thought process which can lead to “choking” under
pressure.
2. True. One of the physical responses of the body to stress is to divert
blood away from the small vessels near the skin. This provides a defense
against bleeding to death from wounds, but gives the skin a cold, clammy
feeling.
3. False. Elite-level performers have just as many nervous reactions to
stress as any other type of performer. However, elite athletes often interpret
these reactions as being more positive and beneficial than do other athletes.
4. True. Clear thinking is more difficult in pressure situations. This is
why coaches and athletes must constantly practice what they are going to
do and how they are going to respond in pressure-packed situations.
5. False. So that more blood is available to the large muscles of the
body in preparation for strenuous physical activity such as fighting or
running away, the digestive system shuts down. During this shutdown, the
acid in your stomach makes you feel nauseated which sometimes results in
throwing up. This is a normal reaction to stress.
6. True. Caffeine tends to exaggerate the physical and mental effects of
stress. Knowing this, coaches and athletes should avoid caffeine products
before entering potentially stressful situations.
7. True. Under stress, the body produces adrenalin, which provides a
powerful, quick burst of energy sometimes resulting in superhuman feats.
8. False. There are a number of stresses which are good. For example,
being elevated to the starting team brings additional stress which most
athletes would enjoy. Another example of positive stress is physical and
mental training. All athletes are under stress when, during training, they
push themselves to the edge so that their body will adapt to the demand and
get stronger.
9. True. For some reason, letting out an audible sigh as you exhale is
very relaxing. There are a number of additional relaxation techniques which
involve breathing exercises.
10. True. In stressful situations, athletes often revert back to behaviors
they are familiar and comfortable with. This is one of the reasons why
athletes should try to learn and perfect new skills and techniques in the off-
season.

In conclusion, your reaction to stress will affect every cell in your body.
Regardless if the reasons are real or imaginary, your reactions are similar.
We each have a biological alarm clock that goes off automatically, whether
we want it to or not. This reaction is valuable if you are about to be hit by a
car but it has disadvantages if you are trying to settle down and concentrate
on your game. By knowing what the reactions are, athletes can learn to
interpret these responses as being normal and perhaps even beneficial to
their performance.

Other References:

Olgilvie, B. Pro-mind.com
Chapter 6
Strategies
Have you ever seen people at a restaurant trying to decide what they’ll
order? They may look up, pause, look down, lick their lips, touch their
stomachs, and then order something. They may repeat the options to
themselves, either in their heads or out loud (“A quarter-pound
cheeseburger, hmm”). They may even ask someone else, “What’s good?”
(Hope their tastes are similar!) Whatever they do, they’re running some
type of strategy and most, if not all, of it is preconscious.
We’re not aware of how we make decisions. We just do. Psychology tells us
that it’s a learned behavior, which it is. Once learned, though, it’s put out of
our conscious awareness. Even a Pavlovian response can be considered a
learned strategy. Think about the classical Pavlov training. A dog is
repeatedly presented with food, and a bell is rung. Eventually, the bell alone
will elicit a saliva response in the dog. Somewhere in that dog’s brain, it’s
learning: Bell = food = eat, or, Food = bell = eat. So it is with humans. We
learn a strategy and then we use it over and over, until we either replace or
change it.
Problems begin to occur when our strategies no longer work, or when we
use an inappropriate strategy. You see this when someone uses a strategy
that works in business (profit and loss) in their personal relationships. They
bail at the first hint of effort.
To make this easy to learn, let’s go back to the example at the beginning of
the chapter. Think about what you ate the last time you went to a restaurant.
How did you decide what to have? Did you look at the menu (visual), then
mentally taste the food (gustatory or kinesthetic)? Possibly you said
something to yourself (auditory) when you found something you wished to
order. Then you exited your decision-making program. (An aside: one
reason it’s difficult for some people to order food when they’re really
hungry is that they get stuck in the program; they keep playing options…
“That sounds good,” “That looks good,” “I always liked that . . . ,” etc).
This is a simple example, but you have a strategy for EVERYTHING you
do, and a lot of those strategies overlap. You may use the same style of
strategy in different contexts. This may or may not be problematic. I
worked with a man who used his business strategy (which made him rich)
to find a wife. He found his prospect (business venture), did his research
(dating), found he wanted to acquire the property, and was willing to pay
the asking rate (marriage). So they got married. He then took a hands-off
approach, provided financial investment (bought the house and cars) and
basically ignored his wife unless there was a problem (the way he would
run a business). What he actually needed was a romantic strategy.
The good part is, you can change, install, or remove a strategy. This is one
of the things we do with hypnotic suggestions.
People have their own strategies for everything they do. They use these
strategies when they communicate. These strategies are formed by the
primary (lead), secondary and tertiary representational systems of the
person. For example, a person can use a VISUAL, AUDITORY or
KINESTHETIC strategy for buying a car. SEE a car you really like; HEAR
good things about the car; drive the car and it FEELS good. A person might
use these strategies to choose a car, then buy the car and rationalize the
costs.
There are a lot of nuances to strategies. There are internal and external cues,
as well as what are known as Meta Programs. Meta Programs are strategies
you use in every situation, and you use them to develop other strategies.
We’ll go into those later. Right now, I want to show you how you can use
this information today in your work.
First, when a prospective client calls or comes into your business, ask them
what they need to help them make a decision about your services. Then
listen to what and how they say it. Do they need to hear from others that
your product or service worked for them? Do they want to see something in
print about you? Do they want to feel comfortable with you? Repeat back
what they say, and then give them what they want, or tell them you will
supply them with what they need when they come in.
Second, ask people questions about their decision making. For instance, if
you run a hypnosis clinic or weight-loss service, ask clients how they know
when it’s time to eat. Do they see others eating? At dinnertime, do they feel
they must eat? Do they have a craving when they hear the sound of a bag of
chips opening? When they see food, is their first response to eat? Or do they
feel they must eat when they feel good…or feel the need to eat when they
feel bad? (Note: You’ll find a lot of overweight people don’t use HUNGER
as a cue to eat. A naturally-thin person will almost always use HUNGER as
the key cue of when to eat. They will not eat if they are not hungry, so
they’re seldom overweight.)
Third, try installing the following eating strategy for a few of your clients.
You can do this by having them mentally rehearse the program while in a
trance.

The next time you’re presented with a stimulus for food (by seeing others
eating, or when it’s dinnertime), check your stomach to see if you are
hungry. If not, exit, saying to yourself, “You are not hungry. There is no
reason to eat.” If you are hungry, ask yourself, “What would taste good and
help me to achieve my other goals (weight loss, getting in shape, etc.)?”
Imagine tasting the food and thinking, “How will this feel, later?” If the
reply is negative, repeat the selection process until you find a healthy
choice.

Reinforce this with direct hypnosis, and you will be amazed how
this will add to (or subtract from) your clients’ results.
The following example is how I used strategies in a clinical setting. I had a
client on whom I’d been using hypnosis as a form of therapy. This client
had tried hypnosis in the past for weight loss with limited success. Now she
was stuck. She would do very well at work and through the main part of the
day. She would have a small piece of fruit in the morning and a light lunch
if she was hungry, or she would walk, or not stop after work for a snack.
She was making notable progress. She would, however, start eating at night
and would overeat. Since she had used hypnosis with some success, I
thought we would see what her strategy was for night eating.

She relaxed and I asked her what happened when she got home. At first she
just said, “It seems like I walk in and start eating.”

“So you have a refrigerator by your door?” I asked. “Tell me what happens
as you walk inside your door.”

“Well, I open the door and I see an empty apartment.” She was divorced,
and her youngest was in college.

“Then what?” I prompted.

“I hear a voice that says a woman is not supposed to be alone.”

“Whose voice?” I asked.

“My mother’s.”

“Then what happens?” I asked.

“I feel bad, like a little girl, a bad little girl,” she replied softly.

“Then what?” I probed.

“I hear another voice and it says, ‘EAT SOMETHING. YOU’LL FEEL

BETTER.’” (Her mother again.)

“Then what do you do?” I prompted.

“I eat something, and I feel a little better. Then I feel guilty because I’m
supposed to be trying to lose weight.”

“Anything else?” I ask.

“I hear that voice again: ‘EAT SOMETHING! YOU’LL FEEL BETTER!’”

And off she’d go on a binge again!

She had developed a strategy of night binging over the years, and she now
used it automatically to deal with her feelings of guilt and loneliness. The
technique I decided to use was to bypass the whole mess. When she opened
the door, she’d tell herself it was so nice to choose to live alone. She would
also make plans to do things she had put off for years: dance class, going to
movies, etc. We also did some re-parenting about the intent of what her
mother meant. This client did quite well.
I urge you to track your internal processes when you’re making decisions so
you can learn about strategies firsthand. This is an advanced NLP process,
but once you’re comfortable with the idea, it will get easier, and it can be a
very useful tool to learn more about how people think. Remember, the why
is not very useful. In the above example, we could have spent a lot of time
on why. Why had her mother behaved so? If we change the behavior first,
though, we remove the emotional charge. Then we can change the program.

Meta Programs

We’ve already talked about how people use strategies to make decisions or
create beliefs. These strategies aren’t conscious; far from it. They are
strategies you use at the unconscious level. Even people who use the same
strategies, though, may arrive at very different conclusions. For instance,
one person may mentally picture several options and choose one that feels
right, while another may mentally picture the same options but feel
overwhelmed by the sheer number of choices, and be unable to choose at
all. What causes this?
Differences like these are caused by Meta Programs. The word “meta”
simply means “outside of,” so Meta Programs are mental programs outside
of your decision-making strategies. You can think of Meta Programs as
habits of thought. They’re the processes we use every day to filter what we
pay attention to from what we ignore. While your conscious mind can only
pay attention to about seven (give or take a couple) things at once, your
senses are bombarded by millions of perceptions every second. You need
some way to filter through all that input and decide what needs your
attention. That’s where your Meta Programs come in.
Sometimes the Meta Program we use isn’t necessarily the best one for the
situation. That was really bad a couple of decades ago, when scientists still
thought you were stuck with the Meta Programs you had. Fortunately,
research by Robert Dilts showed that people can change or replace their
Meta Programs through the use of NLP.
Please don’t think I mean that some Meta Programs are good and some are
bad. All of them can be either good or bad; it’s depends on where and when
you use them. In fact, you may use one Meta Program in one situation and
another under different circumstances. Most of us lean toward certain
programs, though. It’s helpful to know which programs you’re using, and
how they affect you. It’s also good to be able to recognize what Meta
Programs other people are using. Once you know what forms the basis for
other people’s strategies, you can use that information to build rapport and
persuade them to your point of view. Of course, once you know what lies
underneath your own thought processes, you have the freedom to change
the way you operate, too.
With that in mind, let’s look at a few of the Meta Programs.

Toward vs. Away-From

In this program, you’re either focused on getting what you want, or not
getting what you don’t want.
It’s common for people with problems to use the away-from program and
express themselves in terms of what they don’t want. Unfortunately, they
sometimes focus so much on what they don’t want that they don’t know
what they do want. Not only do they not know what they want, but they
don’t even perceive anything they want. It’s like it’s not even there.
When you constantly focus on what you don’t want, you may end up
believing that something you might want doesn’t even exists. Another
downside is that away-from thinking constantly draws your attention to
negatives, and if you can’t see anything but the negatives, you can’t get
away from them! Because energy follows attention, you’ll likely end up
seeing, remembering and even attracting more negative experiences.
It also creates problems in goal-setting. If you’re moving away from
something (i.e., I don’t want to be in debt), you may never know when you
reach your goal…or you may relapse into having the same goal once again.
Not that away-from Meta Programs are all bad. In certain contexts, they are
more useful than toward programs. For instance, soldiers during combat
missions might have a priority of “Don’t shoot our own guys.” This is
away-from thinking, but it avoids many “friendly fire” tragedies.
As a default program, though, toward thinking is much better at creating a
healthy, happy life. That’s probably why Western society usually rewards
people who have toward thinking. It’s certainly the better choice for setting
goals. Imagine the differences in these two goals:

I don’t want to be in debt. (Away-From thinking.)

I want to pay off all my credit cards and student loans and then have enough
money to save $1000 every month. (Toward thinking.)
As I said before, though, all Meta Programs can have downsides. For
instance, toward thinking can lead you to make unwise or risky decisions
without thinking about the potential dangers to be avoided.
At the same time, you can see how knowing whether your target uses away-
from or toward thinking can help you influence the decision they reach,
simply be putting their options in terms they understand. Do you need to
motivate your prospective client toward your services or away from your
competitor’s? Once you know, you can easily influence a person’s decision
in your favor.

Best-Case vs. Worst-Case Scenario

When you use this Meta Program, you’re either focused on the possibilities
of a situation or on the problems. Generally, seeing the best-case scenario is
a more optimistic way of seeing the world, while worst-case thinking puts
you in a negative frame of mind.
Putting it that way might make best-case-scenario thinking seem the better
of the two, but that’s not necessarily true. When you realistically examine
the worst possible case and plan for it, anything else that happens seems
easy by comparison. If you use best-case thinking all the time, without
exception, you could be naïve to risk, possibly trusting people who
shouldn’t be trusted.
That said, though, many people have problems with consistent worst-case
thinking in their lives. If you constantly use worst-case thinking, you may
be unable to envision any kind of positive outcome for yourself. You may
get stuck in a self-reinforcing loop that leads to panic or depression. Even if
you realize that your thinking doesn’t make much sense, without the means
to change it, you’re stuck in your worst possible situation. Here are a couple
of examples of extreme best-case and worst-case thinking:

I paid attention in class, so I don’t need to study. This test will be a breeze!
(Best-Case Scenario thinking.)

I can’t possibly pass this test, no matter how hard I study. I might as well
stay home. (Worst-Case Scenario thinking.)

Many successful and happy people find that the best use of this Meta
Program lies in the middle. Think of it like, “Expect the best, plan for the
worst.” Again, you can see how you can easily influence a person by
discovering their Meta Program and then persuading them of the best-case
scenario if they agree with you (or buy your service) or the worst-case
scenario they might experience if they don’t.

Big Chunk vs. Little Chunk

When you use big-chunk thinking, you see the “big picture.” It’s helpful for
envisioning, getting perspective and setting direction. Little chunk thinking
sees the details. It’s useful for putting a plan into action and making
progress in manageable steps.
Like all Meta Programs, both sides have their place. How can you set goals
if you can’t envision the bigger outcome? On the other hand, how can you
reach your goal without seeing the steps you need to take to get there?

I’m going to own a new sports car! (Big Chunk thinking.)

I’m going figure out how much I can afford, then I’ll research cars to see
which ones fit my budget. (Little Chunk thinking.)

Each of those goals is good in its own way, but you really need both—the
vision and the plan—to successfully own the car of your dreams. Big chunk
thinking leads you astray when you dream ineffectively, but little chunk
thinking can lead you to obsess and not be able to “see the forest for the
trees.” Each is helpful, but only in the right context.
There are many more Meta Programs under which you operate every day.
(Experts count between 50 and 60.) Others include Self Reference vs. Other
Reference, Association vs. Disassociation, Match vs. Mismatch, and
Proactive vs. Reactive. I’ve put a more detailed chart below.
Knowing the programs is only part of the puzzle, though. Once you know
which Meta Programs a person uses, and how they help or hinder, you need
to know how to use them to your advantage. If you look at your own Meta
Programs and realize they’re holding you back, you need to know how to
change them. Imagine the freedom of being able to recognize how your
brain is operating against you and being able to train it, like a computer, to
run a whole new “program.” Imagine seeing the programs under which
another person operates, and being able to use that knowledge to gently
persuade them to your way of acting or thinking.
Motivational Meta Programs:

How people process information that influences their behavior.

Meta Program Type

Choice Points
1. Decision Making Self Others Data/Information

2. Decision Rules Values Beliefs

3. Matching Direct Match Direct Mismatch

Mismatch with Exceptions

4. Information Requirements General Specific/Systematic

5. Information Order Sequential Random

6. Time References
(Can be combined with Matching and Approach/Avoidance)
Past
Present
Future

7. Time Relationships Patient Impatient

8. Approach/Avoidance
Move Toward/Move Away From
Pleasure/Goal
Pain/Problem/Conflict

9. Financial Cost Convenience

10. Quality Price

Value

11. Frame of Reference

(Locus of Control)
 Internal External

12. Interactive Interpersonal (Others) Intrapersonal (Self)

13. Priority High Low

14. Work Independent Cooperative (Group)

15. Security/Stability Necessity Possibility/Risk

16. Focus Global/Broad/General Narrow/Specific

17. Rationality Logic/Thought/Objectivity Emotions/Feelings/Impulse

18. Buying Criteria

What
When
Who
How
Why

19. Attitude Positive Negative

20. Source of Motivation Intrinsic (Self Rewards) Extrinsic (External

Rewards)

Submodalities: How to Focus Your Brain for Optimum

Results

Have you ever noticed that people react to the same situation much
differently? One person can welcome a challenge with open arms and feel
empowered while another will crumble with the pressure. These “states” of
mind are built around your internal representation and physiology, defined
by experiences. Experiences help us form our internal representations and
determine how we perceive what’s going on around us. The way we
embrace new challenges can be changed by how we focus on things and
what we focus on.

Focusing Attention in a Situation

There are millions of stimuli thrown at the brain at any one second. The
brain acts as a filter and sorts through these stimuli, determining what’s
most urgent or needs attention. The brain works through an information
process known as “chunking,” which is basically the ability to group certain
memories together for ready recall. For example, you may associate the
memory of a high-school play with the musty-smelling cologne of a history
teacher and the way he twirled his mustache. There were several other
behaviors, actions and environments happening at the time, but these are the
pieces that the brain (memory) has chunked together.
Now think about it from a point of failure in your life. Most people recall
this information and replay the “failing” moments over and over again.
Instead of turning this information into feedback and learning, they begin to
feed negative thoughts into their heads. How successful do you think this
makes the person? Not very! In fact, it sets them up for failure. The
question then becomes, “How do I change this state and look at experiences
in a positive light?” The answer is: change the way you focus on things.
Instead of always picking up the negative or noticing how you screwed
something up, turn it and replay the situation with a more positive note.
Imagine that the “screw up” was resolved. See yourself succeeding. What
you’re doing is changing how you focus on things.
After programming a negative focus and internal script for years, our brains
go on autopilot and automatically begin feeding that negativity into the
situation at hand. This takes a while to change; the internal scripting has to
become positive just as it became negative. After years of listening to that
negative internal script, you’ll have to remain constant in redirecting your
focus to the positive, but stay with it. After a while, the mind will change to
a positive autopilot mode. It takes work, but it can be done.

Directing Our Focus

Our internal scripting is based on not only what we think, but also on how
we feel. It’s possible to create a mental image to motivate ourselves and
draw focus to a particular scenario. As we’ve already found in life, the
intensity of a state of mind is based on the intensity of the situation or
picture in our mind.
All that sounds confusing, but here’s an example. Most people feel
motivated to go shopping, but the motivation is more intense at some times
than at others, right? This is because of our mental images about the
situation. Shopping may not be as much fun when there are concerns such
as money, time and finding the right piece of clothing. Imagine, though,
shopping for anything you want with a $50,000 gift certificate you just
won. Does that change the scenario? Of course it does! It is a bigger, clearer
and brighter picture in your mind.
What do we mean by more intense pictures? Think about what you see in
the movies. The colors, sounds, light and angles all add to the intensity and
desire of the movie. If the picture is small, the colors are dim and the angle
is off, would it be as interesting? NO!
Visualization can change your state of mind by the mere intensity of the
pictures in the mind. This is because the mind is drawn to a bigger, more
distinct set of pictures of circumstances. Many consider this excitement.
The pictures in our mind oftentimes are automatically populated, leaving us
with little control. You can change this, though. The way to rectify this is to
focus on positive pictures and images (of success) and making a mental
movie of those positive images. Eventually, the mind will begin
automatically populating circumstances with more positive images.

The Keys to the Brain

The brain is often referred to as one large operating computer. The
submodalities or “keys” to the mind allow you to control actions, thoughts
and perceptions. These submodalities are classified into the same three
categories we’ve seen for thought and communication: visual, auditory and
kinesthetic. In order to understand a person’s state, we must understand the
coding system of the brain. The chart below contains more detail on these
coding systems, but let’s takes a brief look at the three submodalities and
their input.
The visual submodalities are how your brain codes pictures or sights. Think
about looking at a picture. The same things that you notice in a picture are
the things your brain is coding about what you’re physically observing. Is
the picture focused or out of focus? What is the location of the item in the
picture? Is it framed or panoramic; is it disassociated or associated?
The auditory submodalities are the way the brain codes sounds. It’s the
same as when you hear a sound and separate it into different categories. Is it
loud or soft, slow or fast, in tune or out of tune?
Kinesthetic submodalities are the brain’s coding of internal feelings. This is
one of the more difficult coding systems to understand, because it’s not
always as clear-cut. Separations of things such as the location of the feeling,
whether it’s still or moving, light or heavy, and the direction of movement
are all taken into consideration in the coding process.
Coding and internal scripting are different for everyone. Finding the way
that your brain codes and creates a particular situation is a discovery
process…and a very important step towards success.

Submodality Distinctions

Modality Submodality Questions

Visual Color/Black-and-White
• Is it in color or black-and-white?
• Is it full-color spectrum?
• Are the colors vivid or washed out?

Brightness In that context, is it brighter or darker than normal?

Contrast Is it high contrast (vivid) or washed out?

Focus Is the image sharp in focus, or is it fuzzy?

Texture Is the image smooth or rough textured?

Size How big is the picture? (ask for specific size)

Distance How far away is the image? (specific distance)

 Shape What shape is the picture: square, rectangular, round?

Border
• Is there a border around it, or do the edges fuzz out?
• Does the border have a color?
• How thick is the border?
Location
• Where is the image located in space?
• Show me with both hands where you see the images(s).

Movement
• Is it a movie or a still picture?
• How rapid is the movement: faster or slower than normal?
• Is the image stable?
• What direction does it move in?
• How fast is it moving?
Orientation Is the picture tilted?

Association /Dissociation
Do you see yourself, or do you see the event as if you were there?

Perspective
• From what perspective do you see it?
• (If dissociated) Do you see yourself from the right or left, back or
front?

Proportion Are there people and things in the image in

proportion to one another and to you, or are some of them larger or smaller
than life?

Dimension
• Is it fl at, or is it three-dimensional?
• Does the picture wrap around you?

Singular / Plural
• Is there one image or more than one?
• Do you see them one after the other or at the same time?

Auditory Location
• Do you hear it from the inside or from the outside?
• Where does the sound (voice) originate?

Pitch
• Is it high-pitched or low-pitched?
• Is the pitch higher or lower than normal?

Tonality What is the tonality: nasal, full and rich, think,

grating?

Melody Is it a monotone, or is there a melodic range?

Inflection Which parts are accentuated?

Volume How loud is it?

Tempo Is it fast or slow?

Rhythm Does it have a beat or a cadence?

Duration Is it continuous or intermittent?

Do you hear it on one side, both sides, or is the sound all

around you?

Kinesthetic
Intensity How strong is the sensation?

Quality How would you describe the body sensations: tingling,

warm, cold, relaxed, tense, knotted, diffused?

Location Where do you feel it in your body?

Movement
• Is there movement in the sensation?
• Is the movement continuous, or does it come in waves?

Direction
• Where does the sensation start?

Speed Is it a slow, steady progression, or does it move in a rush?

Duration Is it continuous or intermittent?

Disassociation & Association

One of the most telling types of image coding of the brain is disassociation
versus association. Here’s the easiest way to understand: when you
visualize a past event or situation in your life, do you see yourself at a
distance or through your own eyes? If you’re seeing the situation from a
distance, this is disassociation. When you visualize the event through your
own eyes, this is association. We tend to visualize negative events from a
distance, or as a disassociation, and positive events with association. The
association or disassociation can have a great impact on your state of mind.
Here’s why.
Close your eyes and remember back to a positive event in your life. This
event can be any positive experience that you want it to be. Remember the
location, smells, sounds and who is there with you. Visualize through your
own eyes and walk through the experience once again. This inspires a good
and positive feeling. Now, take that same situation and visualize from a
distance (disassociation). You’re basically stepping out of your body and
removing yourself from the events. Do you see how the mood and state
changes? It has a great impact, because the more involved a person is with a
positive feeling, the better “state” the person will be in. When you want
someone to buy something from you, for instance, you want them to
disassociate from your competitor’s product and associate with yours.

Ability to Intensify any State

Wouldn’t it be great to be able to intensify or replicate a feeling or state
immediately on cue? Unfortunately, no one has developed a magic wand, so
we have to come up with another way to intensify a positive state.
Intensifying involves shifting the submodalities. Here’s how:

Imagine and visualize a goal that you want to achieve, but have not found
the motivation to achieve.

Close your eyes and visualize yourself achieving that goal. Take notes about
all the submodalities involved in the experience. Make mental notes of
whether the situation is disassociated or associated, and notice the sounds,
feelings and the shape of the feelings (light, heavy or movement, etc.).

Rate the submodalities on a scale of 1-10, with ten being the highest
amount of motivation and intensity you felt as you stood in achievement of
your goal.

Mapping Across Love to Disgust

A person can feel differently about a situation. It’s a matter of shifting the
submodalities. There are steps to changing motivation to un-motivation, or
love to disgust. Of course, it’s great to be able to change an unmotivated
goal to a motivated goal, but the reverse is sometimes necessary as well.
Think about when you’re motivated for that 500-calorie bowl of ice cream.
In order to achieve your dream weight, you must unmotivate yourself
quickly! With that in mind, here are the five steps to control motivation.

Step One: Elicit the submodalities of a food you love.

Imagine a food that is not the healthiest choice, but is one you really want.
A hot, juicy steak, for instance. Now make mental notes about the
submodalities. Most of them will involve kinesthetics, because the food is a
substance. Imagine the smell, feel and, most of all, the taste. Rate all the
things that you like about this type of food from 1-10. Since you do like this
food, all of your ratings should be up toward 10.

Step Two: Elicit the submodalities of a food you hate.

Now think of a food that you don’t like at all. We’ll use deviled eggs as an
example, but you can insert your own most-hated food. Imagine eating it.
Smell and taste it. How does it make you feel? Are you feeling sick?
Probably so! Now take note of all the submodalities involved in disliking
this food. Imagine what you would feel like chewing and swallowing the
food.

Step Three: The difference between the liked and disliked food.
There are some definite differences here, as there should be. One food you
like and the other you despise. The steak is hot and smells good. Deviled
eggs are cold and smell nasty. Steak is dark and pleasing to the eye, while
the deviled eggs are light colored and pasty. The differences in the two are
called drivers.

Step Four: Replace the likes with dislikes.

Now imagine that hot and juicy steak, but replace it with those deviled
eggs. Imagine yourself eating those deviled eggs. Imagine how they taste
and what they feel like going down. Imagine that steak tastes like those
eggs that you absolutely hate. Separate yourself from that steak by stepping
out and making the visual smaller. How badly do you want that steak now?

Step Five: Test it.

This replacement method is a great way to neutralize cravings. This method
can help individuals turn off those cravings and callings for things that they
do not need or are bad for them. Granted, you wouldn’t necessarily want to
replace steak and never eat it again, but this exercise can be used as a tool to
control the intensity and state of mind.

Now that we’ve covered Meta Programs and submodalities, I’d like to tell
you a little something about a guy named Ron. I think it will help you
understand a bit more about how to use people’s decision-making strategies
for your own benefit.

When Ron was getting ready to start his martial arts school, he knew it was
a competitive business. Most karate schools fail in the first year, and very
few schools make enough for the owner to not have to take up another full-
time job. Ron decided that the first thing he needed to do was find schools
where the owner was making a good living at teaching martial arts. (One
effective strategy for change is to find someone who has done what you
want to do, and do what they did. This is called modeling.) So he took some
time and visited a few successful schools.
The first thing he noticed was that the schools signing up a lot of students
seemed to fit their selling style to the client’s needs and wants, rather than
to the head teacher’s agenda.
An example: a young man comes in interested in classes. The first thing the
successful people did was to find out WHY the person was looking into
learning martial arts. If he was looking for self-esteem, they would discuss
how the martial arts would build that. If it was physical fitness, they would
talk up the workout part and the flexibility you acquire. The student wanted
self-defense? The teacher would highlight how the prospective student
would be able to defend himself. Self-discipline? That’s what martial arts
are all about!
Ron also noticed that if a parent brought in a child, then the teacher would
do the same thing to both the parent and the child. He would talk up both
the points the parent wanted and the points the child wanted.
Ron took special note of how the teacher asked each prospective client how
they would know when they found the school that best fit their needs. The
teacher would listen and take note of what they said, such as the prospect
who said, “Well, I will see that the students have respect, that they have
done well in competition, and probably I would want a free class or two.”
After some more general talk about the martial arts, the teacher showed the
prospective student some of the trophies they had won at recent events. He
then asked a current student what this school’s attitude was, and the student
named several; and when he said RESPECT, the teacher stopped him and
said to the prospective client, “Respect is important here—very important
indeed!” He then invited the student for a trial workout.
Ron was amazed. He knew this NLP technology. He had just watched this
teacher get into rapport, match the client, get his strategy, find out which of
the core desires was most important (accomplishment, belonging, and
value) and then feed it back to the client. The client signed up before he left
that evening.
Ron then watched as the teacher did the same to a mother and son. The
mother wanted self-discipline and physical fitness; the son wanted to learn
how to defend himself. The teacher repeated back the benefits each wanted
and pointed out how his martial arts school was the answer. The teacher
then asked the mother how she would ascertain whether she had found the
right place for her son. She stated that the place had to be clean, well run
and friendly. Of course, the teacher pointed out how clean this operation
was and emphasized that the classes started and finished on time. He also
stressed how it was like a big family—yes, students’ family members are
welcome to watch classes. The mother signed her son up then and there!
Ron saw what he needed. Just to be sure, though, he went to a couple of
other schools and got a tour. Here the teacher proceeded to tell him why his
school was the best. He never once asked any questions. The same thing
happened at a couple of other smaller schools. Ron saw why the first school
he contacted was growing by leaps and bounds, while, in the case of these
others, the teachers had to hold second jobs just to make a living.

The above was an example of strategies, how people combine how they
think (visual, auditory, kinesthetic) with the sixteen basic desires in order to
come up with an unconscious process for deciding how to decide.

Martial Arts Story

A guy went to Japan to study with the martial-arts experts. There were two
masters. He asked all kinds of questions until one of the instructors
suggested they have tea. He started pouring tea into a teacup and kept
pouring until the cup overflowed. The student finally stopped the instructor
and asked why he was letting the tea pour out of the cup.
The analogy is that the student’s mind was so full that the instructors could
not put any more information in. Until the student emptied his mind, he
could not learn.
Like martial arts, NLP techniques are a powerful, potentially manipulative
technology that could be used for good or bad.

Milton Erickson

Called the father of clinical hypnotherapy, Milton Erickson was a good

storyteller who used metaphors and analogies. He also liked to use tasks as
learning experiences. One example was when he asked students to climb a
mountain to get them out of the office. They came back with wonderful
metaphors about the struggles of life, etc.
Give everyone a string. The string is a metaphor. Put it on your wrist.
Develop your own metaphor. No one can pull your string anymore. Take the
string off at the end of the class upon graduation. Leave the string on for the
full time you are in the class. Then tell the class what your metaphor for the
string means.
You can now begin focusing on how your brain makes sense of the world.
Chapter 7
Anchoring
Anchor Your Way to Success
“It doesn’t count if you don’t get caught,” an NFL coach once said
regarding some bad calls that went his way during a game.
Everyone has enjoyed a positive state of mind and also understands what it
feels like to be in a negative state. Now ,given the chance, most people are
going to choose the positive state of mind, but feel that it is simply based on
environmental factors in which they have no control. Consider this, what if
you could automatically switch your mind to a positive state? What if you
could switch another person’s mind to a positive state? Would you believe
that the human brain is capable of that? It is, through a process called
“anchoring,” and it can make unbelievable changes in your life.
In the 1996 presidential election, we got to watch Bill Clinton pull off some
of the best examples of anchoring the world has ever seen, and very few
people even noticed.
At one point in the debates, President Clinton walked center stage and listed
several facts about the state of the union at that time.

• The economy was booming.

• More jobs had been created in the last four years than in the
previous twelve.
• Unemployment was at an all-time low.
• We were at peace.

After he listed all these wonderful things, he made the comment, “I can’t
take all the credit for all the good things that have happened these last few
years.”
Great comment, but as he said, “all the good things that have happened,” he
touched his tie. Each time he said a great positive thing about the country,
he touched his tie or face. He was anchoring all those positives to himself.
But that was not enough; he went on to say, “We still have problems in this
country, people are being left behind.” As he said this, he made a gesture
with his hand toward Bob Dole.
If you were watching the debates, you were using your conscious mind to
track the information while your subconscious was wide open for this type
of salesmanship. This could explain the great public ambivalence toward
Bill Clinton. While our conscious minds might not approve of his actions,
in our subconscious minds he is anchored to good things. (Not just to pick
on Clinton; Ronald Regan was also brilliant at anchoring positive things to
himself.)
Often in the process of communicating, the achieved level of rapport can
diminish in the middle of the transaction! The secret technique many
successful people use to quickly reestablish the initial rapport is called
anchoring. The next step is learning what anchors are.
There are different types of anchors that we will go into in more detail
momentarily. First, a good definition of an anchor is a stimulus (behavior)
that is associated with a particular state of mind or mood. For example, if
every time you scratched off a lottery ticket you won a substantial amount
of money, you would begin to associate scratching the lottery ticket with a
positive state.
This “anchoring” or associating is based on the famous research completed
by Ivan Pavlov with his hungry dogs. Basically, in a laboratory setting,
Pavlov uncovered that dogs could associate a bell with hunger pains and
involuntary salivation. After a training period Pavlov found that the dogs
would begin salivating and having hunger pains at the sound of a bell,
regardless of the time that the bell sounded. How does that affect us today?
What Pavlov found is known as classical conditioning. This means that
associations can trigger feelings and behaviors without someone making a
conscious effort. This is very important in success and how individuals live
their lives. That means that you can improve or change your state of mind
based on positive associations. It also means you can anchor certain states
of mind in other people. Now let’s look at the types of anchors.

What Is an Anchor?

Visual Anchors
Visual anchors are among the most common, because humans are very
visual creatures. We’ve been making associations ever since childhood. We
make associations every day based on color, appearance, texture and faces.
There are positive and negative visual anchors. As you travel through a
residential area ten miles over the speed limit and you catch a glimpse of
that white car, what is your immediate response? That’s right…you hit the
breaks, grit your teeth and know you’re about to be $100 poorer. (I know;
this just happened to me.) Think about that grouchy neighbor next door;
what do you feel when you see his shining face? Now, simply think about
him. It puts you in a not-so-positive state of mind, just by the mere
association, right? Now you understand “anchoring”!
On the positive side, think about when you were a child, or think about your
own child now. Children can’t read, but they know the McDonald’s arches
when they see them! For a child, the golden arches anchor the positive
thought of a Happy Meal and the fun play area. If we see the envelope that
our paycheck arrives in, our state of mind turns to a positive. The sight of a
distant relative will bring a positive smile.

Auditory Anchors
An auditory anchor is a sound or sounds that are neurologically linked to a
state of mind. Again it can be a positive or negative state, but it’s linked
with a sound.
What do you feel when you hear the alarm clock, “Jaws” theme or fire
alarm? Most people either feel negative, panicked or just plain lousy. That’s
because there’s a negative state associated with that particular sound. The
alarm clock means having your feet hit the floor even though you’re
exhausted. A siren sends panic through the spine. “Is someone hurt?” you
wonder. “Is it my family? Is my house on fire?” Those thoughts are
automatic; an individual associates them to a siren without conscious effort.
Years after the movie came out, the “Jaws” theme probably still makes you
want to get out of the water! Hear your full name (maiden if you’re a
married female) in a loud voice in your mind; does it bring up a feeling?
When I hear “William Danny Horton!” alarm bells go off. When I was
growing up, I only heard my full name when something negative happened.
Auditory anchors can also be positive, of course. Think about a romantic
movie and the sound track that goes along with it. When you hear that
particular music, you may feel refreshed, romantic or close to a loved one.
That’s because that particular song or music is associated with a positive
action or behavior that was carried out in that movie. This is also the key to
“upbeat” music to work out to…the positive association can help get you
motivated to work out. Let a former US Marine (there are no ex-Marines!)
hear the Marine Corp anthem; you’ll get a big response!

Kinesthetic Anchors
A kinesthetic anchor is one based on a movement, touch or physical action
that associates a particular state of mind. This can best be explained with
the touches, holding or hugging of a loved one. When that person touches
you, it makes you feel special and loved, right? This is because you have
associated that touch with the love and affection of that person, which
sparks a positive emotional state.
Another common example of a kinesthetic anchor is the small gestures or
behaviors of sportsmen. Think about a baseball player that thumps the bat
on the ground or the football player that slaps another on the back end.
They do those things because their minds have linked those behaviors to a
positive state…winning the game. It’s not only the touch of a loved one or a
gesture of the sportsman that can make kinesthetic anchors work for you.
You can develop kinesthetic anchors on your own. This will make your feel
more confident, invigorated, persuasive and ready to succeed.

Using Anchors in Your Life

Anchors are a part of everyday life whether people realize it or not. When
people fall in love, they are anchored to the pleasant feeling that they get
when they’re around their loved one. The small tokens such as a love song,
beautiful scenery or some memento of the relationship can trigger this
elated feeling that is based on the love we feel for someone else. Anchors
are not set in stone, and there are no guidelines; they’re different for
everyone.
When I first moved to Florida I experienced an anchor that recalled long-
forgotten memories. I’d go to lunch and would feel somewhat upset
afterwards, sort of “down in the dumps.” I did what most of us would do; I
checked what I was eating and how much coffee I drank to see if it was
some kind of nutritional low. All were the same as usual.
One day when I went for lunch, the smell of “old lady perfume” was strong.
I instantly thought of my mother, who had died of lung cancer 11 years
earlier. (She wore way to much perfume, as her sense of smell had been
damaged by 40 years of two packs of Pall Malls a day.) The olfactory
anchor—the “old lady perfume”—set off old memories and feelings. This is
an example of anchoring in action! Fortunately, I used some of the
techniques below to reprogram the anchor.
Think about products and advertisements on television, radio and the
internet. The leading manufacturers like Nike, Reebok and Polo spend
millions on positive role models and creating positive associations in
consumer’s minds.
Even though the manufacturers may not know about anchoring as such,
they do know this is well worth the money. Consumers make positive
associations and simply must have the product. They feel that, because such
a positive person has the product, it must be good. This is the reason there
are billions of dollars spent in advertisements every year. Below are the
basics of anchoring:

Key 1: Intensity
1. The intensity of the experience can control how fast the anchor
makes the associations. If the experience is extremely intense, it may be
that the association is strong after only one occurrence. On the other hand,
if the experience is less intense, it may take several times to associated the
state with the experience.
2. It doesn’t take a long period of time to establish an anchor. Repeated
motivations and conditioning will reinforce an anchor.
3. Reinforcement and direct rewards are not required for an anchor’s
association.

Key 2: Timing
1. Timing is crucial while establishing an anchor. Anchors or “set” and
“fired.” It is necessary that the correct trigger sets off the desired response.
2. The most effective time for the association of the anchor is at the
peak of the experience. As the intensity of the experience lessens, so does
the association. If you can maintain this intensity for a longer period of time
it is more likely the anchor will be established. Internal responses and
experiences are significant.
3. Although internal reactions are not measurable, they are definitive
responses. The more profound the experience when the catalyst is set, the
stronger the retaliatory response.
4. The strength of the response will guide the person’s mind in the
necessary and desired path.

Key 3: Uniqueness
1. It is best to find an anchor that is unique to the experience. The more
original the motivation, the easier it is to reestablish the desired rapport.
2. Anchors can be established in the visual, auditory and kinesthetic
representational systems. Individuals have the ability to use any three of the
types of anchors independently or all together. The key here is to ensure
that they anchors are used together and at the same time.
3. Make sure that it is something that happens associated with that
experience and is not common to other experiences. The repercussions of
mixed responses due to general stimuli could often be detrimental to the
person as well as the relationship as a whole. By establishing unique
stimuli, it allows for little margin of error and ease of reassessing the
desired state.

Key 4: Replication
1. Practice makes perfect! Just like anything else, replicating the
experience will achieve the anchor permanently. If you are attempting to
build an anchor you may have to replicate it a time or two exactly.
2. If it is a vision or touch, it needs to be exact to build in your mind.

As you saw from my own example with the perfume, anchors can be set
and fired both consciously and unconsciously. People regularly create
anchors in everyday experiences. They may watch a news show about an
incident or situation they feel strongly about (negative or positive). From
that point on, any time a word comes up that brings forth the memory of
that news show, it will elicit a certain response. In effect, an anchor has
been “set” and “fired off.”
One way to think of it is the old bell curve. As you enter into any “state”
(emotional experience), it will usually start slow and build to a peak, then
diminish. If a unique stimulus is applied as you’re hitting the peak of the
feeling, that stimulus will cause you to enter into that same “state” or
emotion whenever you experience it again.
Think of the power of this in your daily transactions. If you could anchor
the people you deal with into positive emotional states, would that not help
you in the relationship?
Here an example of anchoring from a former student of mine.

A former student shared a story of how he was in a dispute with his wife
over one of his daughter’s boyfriends. The wife wanted him to tell the
boyfriend to get lost. My student decided to defuse the situation, so while
his wife was getting ready to go up the stairs, he put on some music they
played at their wedding.
He goes on to say the strangest thing happened. As the songs were playing,
she stopped, turned around, and said, “I guess it’s OK for her to date this
guy.” He asked her what brought this on. She replied, “When that music
came on, my mind flashed back to our wedding (many years ago) where
Mother walked up to me and said, ‘I still don’t like him.’ And you turned
out all right.”
That music fired an anchor installed many years before. But that is not the
end of the story.
A few months later he took his wife for a getaway weekend on their
anniversary. He broke out all the right anchors…flowers, champagne, the
works! As soon as they settled in, he put on the same music as above. His
wife stopped, grabbed him by the shoulders, stared into his eyes, and said,
“Promise me something, we will not talk about our daughter or her
boyfriends, or anything like that.” He was blown away! Then he
remembered that the last time he played this music, they were involved in
an emotional experience. Because this new emotional experience was
overlaid on the old anchor, it brought up the last “anchored” experience.
This is especially powerful when combined with rapport skills, calibration
and representational systems.

Here’s another story from a student that puts the power of this into
perspective. It’s from retired master sergeant Robert Labrie, and tells about
the first time he put all these skills together when he was on assignment. He
was part of the inspection team troubleshooting the Advertising and
Promotion section.

When I first arrived, the supervisor said, “Sergeant Labrie, I am so glad to

SEE you! I am so anxious to SHOW you how we run our Advertising and
Promotion Program.”
He then spent time SHOWING me various slides, programs, and manuals
he had written. He used visual terms. I knew that to please him, things had
to look good.
Then the officer in charge of the section approached me and said, “Sergeant
Labrie, I am so anxious to HEAR what you have to SAY.” She wanted
clear, detailed explanations of everything I was covering during the
inspections. I remember thinking that it can’t be this easy (but it is!).
I then met the third person. At first I couldn’t make out his system, but then
I noticed that every time I found something wrong, he would get very
emotional and put his hand to his chest like I had stabbed him, and say, “I
can’t believe that there is so much wrong here, I FEEL like it will take me
forever to get this all fixed.” There were definite signs of him experiencing
the world through primarily kinesthetic eyes.
I would then match each of their language patterns, and I got along with
each of them, but I could SEE how they had trouble in their
communications with each other.
I had an eighteen-page checklist to get through, and if the kinesthetic
continued with the emotional outbursts, I would never complete it, so I
decided to try “anchoring” for the first time. I asked him if he had ever been
super successful in his life; he immediately said “yes.” I asked him to
describe it in detail. The more he talked, the more I could SEE him get into
a positive “state.” His face was flushed; he began to talk faster and became
more excited. When I thought it was the right moment (just before peak,
bell curve) I grabbed his shoulder (kind of slapped it lightly) and said, “See,
I told you, you could easily be successful, didn’t I?”
He said “yes” and we proceeded to the next question, which also happened
to be in an area that he needed work in. When I mentioned this fact, he went
off again, just like before, except this time I slapped his shoulder, and
before I could say a word, he said, “I know, I know, I was successful before,
I can be successful again.”
I think my jaw hit the ground, it couldn’t be that powerful, could it!
We went on to the next questions until we found another area that needed
work and he began to fl y off the handle again. Once again, all I needed to
do was touch his shoulder, and he went into a positive state and said, “I
know, I know,” and we were off to the next question. After a while, all I had
to do was approach him and look like I was going to touch his shoulder and
he responded the same way. I think it was then I became a true believer in
the effectiveness of this technology, at that moment.

These are great examples of the many ways an anchor can be used—an
association, a touch, a sound—to trigger a consistent response in your
target. You can use anchors to tap into your customer’s memory and
imagination and transfer their positive feelings and associations to the
present situation.
Think about some of the anchors you have. Do you have a certain song that
causes you to feel a certain way? What happens when you see the national
flag? What happens when your boss touches you on your shoulder and says,
“I need to see you in my office”? Once you become comfortable with the
idea of anchoring, why not use it to your advantage?
When you master rapport, you have a jump-start on friendly anchors. You
must remember to be aware to anchor any of your clients’ positive states to
you. You want to bring up those positive thoughts and feelings in your
client’s mind. Once you become anchored to a response, it will last until
changed or replaced by another anchor. This is true for people, products, or
ideas. Here are some examples:

Coors beer invented light beer years before Miller brought out Miller Lite,
but Miller anchored light beer to them. Remember “Tastes Great, Less
Filling”?

There were at least five gold rock-n-roll records before Elvis, but who is the
King of Rock-n-Roll?

Do you ever hear someone say, “I need to make a Xerox of this?” Then they
make a copy on a different brand copy machine.

What correct positive anchoring does is give you that unique mental spot in
your customer’s mind. You want them to think, “I need office products. I
better give George a call. I like doing business with George.”
Whenever I teach a class, the first thing I do is anchor the group. I like to
anchor humor, or laughter, to myself. Every time the group laughs, I will
touch my tie or face, in a certain way. I will then anchor spots on the stage.
(Elite presenters talk about training their audience.)
I had a teacher in middle school, Mr. Stevens, who used to tutor a few of the
students after class. One of his students, John, had a hard time coming up
with the right answer to a question when called upon to do so in class. Mr.
Stevens began to tutor him, and then, during class, he would ask a question
and, before calling upon a student to answer, he would remark casually, “I
know John has the answer to this question, but let’s hear what Karen (or
Tim, Mary, etc.) has to say.” The result was that John started to believe in
himself, believe that he had the answer. Mr. Stevens anchored a feeling of
confidence in John that was reflected in the ease with which he began
volunteering to answer questions in class.
Here are some exercises to master these skills. The first one is for you to
practice on yourself. We want you to first get a feel for these techniques,
and then we will show you how to implement them into your daily work
and personal life.

Exercise: Anchoring a Resourceful State

Identify a resourceful state or behavior. Think of something you already do

well, some behavior or state you would like to be able to access whenever
you choose.
Choose an anchor that is easy for you to remember, that you can use
whenever you want to access this feeling. Be sure to pick an anchor that is
precise, such as placing your thumb and forefinger together as if making the
“OK” sign.
Now call up a memory of the behavior or state you would like to have,
remembering a time when it was strong. What was it like to be doing that
behavior? It’s important you see this experience through your own eyes,
and not as if you are an observer watching yourself.
Take note of what you see and hear and feel as you call up the memory.
What colors are around you? Are the colors bright and vivid, or are they
soft pastels? Are they clear, or are they slightly hazy and out of focus? What
sounds do you hear? Are they soft or loud? Is there singing or talking, or
are there birds chirping?
As you imagine this scene, allow yourself to experience being there until
the feeling is strong and encompassing you. As you do, touch your thumb
and forefinger together as if making the sign for “OK.” Hold the position
for as long as the feelings remain strong, and when they begin to fade,
return your fingers to a relaxed position. Shake your head or move in some
way so you can bring yourself back to the present (also called “breaking
state”).
The OK sign has just become the anchor for those feelings. But we don’t
want to stop there. In order to ensure these feelings are associated with that
gesture, it is necessary to repeat the exercise a few more times. Each time
you do, try to add more details to the memory. This makes it even more
powerful. Use all of your senses (seeing, hearing, feeling, smelling, tasting)
with the experience, so the connection between the memory and the anchor
becomes powerful. It’s important to remember that anchors should be set
(installed) at the peak of the experience.
The purpose of setting the anchor is to be able to call up the desired state
when needed.
Test the anchor. Think of a different experience and make the OK sign as
you do, the same way you did a few minutes ago. This is known as firing
the anchor. What happened? Did you recall the memory in all its detail,
complete with the feeling or state you were trying to recapture? If you
didn’t, keep trying. Sometimes a little practice is all that is needed.
Remember, the sensations in an experience will often rise and fall, so you
want to set the anchor as the experience is reaching its peak and remove it
when the feeling begins to fade.
Now that you are starting to understand the power of these techniques, here
are some exercises to build your skills with others.
Some of the states you will want to learn how to anchor in others are:

• Humor
• Curiosity
• Being Positive
• Self-Confidence
• Loyalty
• How You Feel When You Make a GOOD Decision
• How You Feel When You Make a BAD Decision
• Excitement
• Doubt
• Patience

Eliciting States
Once you are in rapport with someone, you’ll find talking to them is easy.
To get someone into the state you desire, you need to be able to elicit that
emotional state in them. That may sound scary, but it’s as natural as getting
someone to talk about something that will put him or her in the state you
want to elicit.
Here is an example you’ve probably come across: Two men start talking
about their favorite sports team. As they talk, you can watch them enter into
several emotional states. As they describe the last win, they get excited;
they get passionate about the plays. Watch them as they describe a “bad
call;” they get angry. If their team lost, you will see negative feelings.
In fact, watch any sporting event and you will see the athletes firing off
anchors all the time. Maybe you played sports in school and you can still
remember how you felt when you came off the field after a bad play and
your coach gave you that look, or the excitement after a good play and your
teammates patting you on the back.
Another example before we move on to exercises. Watch professional
comics as they do their routines. If they’ve been on the road for a while,
you will watch them set anchors in their audience if a joke goes well. Think
of the late Rodney Dangerfield. As he said his “I get no respect, no respect
at all,” he always touched his tie. Jay Leno shrugs his shoulders on bad
jokes, and that will get laughs. He touches his tie on good jokes. Tim Allen
used to make his grunting noises as he talked about power tools, and he
built that into a multimillion-dollar TV career. You will even see him use
similar gestures in some of his movies that have nothing to do with the TV
show.
The secret to elicit a state in someone is that first you have to enter into it
yourself! So, if you want someone to be excited about something, you have
to get excited yourself.
How do you do that? Think about something that makes you feel the way
you want to feel. This will cause you to enter into the desired state. Then
describe it in detail (even if just to yourself). Then ask the person with
whom you are talking to describe how that state feels to them. If they
hesitate, or have problems, just describe how you feel when you are in that
state. People will compare, subconsciously, with how they feel when they
are in that state.
Remember, when you are in rapport, people talk about a lot of things…this
is natural; use it!

Anchoring States Exercises

Every day pick a state you will practice anchoring. We suggest coworkers
and social situations before you tackle customers. Always start by getting
into rapport with the people you are communicating with.
Humor. This doesn’t mean you have to be a comic. Just get your target to
talk about something they find funny, or anything that made them laugh.
Start by telling a story you find amusing (I suggest you stay away from
jokes, unless you’re really good at them). If you are in rapport, they will
start to smile with you. Then get them to talk about something they found
amusing. As they describe it, and they smile or laugh, anchor that state to
yourself by something. Touch your ear and smile or laugh with them.
Repeat several times. When you touch your ear they will smile and be in a
better mood.
Curiosity. This one is easy! Think about how you feel when you are
curious. As you enter that state, do you touch your chin? (This seems to be
a natural curiosity anchor.) Get your target to talk about things that make
them curious. As they describe it, touch your chin.
Being Positive. This is a powerful state for you to use on yourself, your
coworkers and your clients. Think about how you feel when you’re in a
positive state of mind, body and spirit. Anchor that. Get your targets to
enter into a positive state. When they are in that state, anchor it to yourself
and to them. Anchor it to yourself by touching your chest area, and maybe a
thumbs-up sign. Anchor it to them with a pat on the shoulder.
Self-Confidence. Another winner for you and those around you. These are
best when you find people in this state naturally, like after a good day, a
good review at work, etc. I would anchor it with the same anchor as above.

Learning to anchor the next states will put you light years ahead of your
competition.

Loyalty. This is one that will keep your clients around. Have them tell you
something that they are loyal to, and how good they feel about being loyal.
As they describe it, agree with them and anchor it to you with a natural
movement such as running your hand through your hair. The key is how
they feel when they are loyal—that’s what you want. This is their way to
ensure long-term relationships, as long as you live up to your part of the
deal.
How They Feel When They Have Made a GOOD Decision. Yes, you get
your target to talk about a good decision, and anchor that to you or your
product. As they describe how they felt, you agree and anchor that to
yourself or your product for them.
How They Feel When They Have Made a BAD Decision. As they talk
about this, anchor this to your competition, or at least point away from you
as they talk about it. This is powerful!
Excitement. Get your target to talk about anything that gets them excited:
sports, their kids…anything that puts them into excitement mode. You want
to anchor this to your voice if possible. This will get them to take your calls
and talk to you.
Doubt. Another winner for the salesperson. When you anchor in doubt, you
can use this to steer them away from objections and toward making a good
decision!
Patience. This could be a deal saver if you need to get some extra time for
the products or project. Anchor the feeling of patience your target has
wanted from their own clients, and how good they felt when their clients
had patience with them. The key here is how they felt when someone had
patience with them.

Here is a story that shows many of these in action.

I was at a conference when someone approached me about buying some of

my home-study courses. I promptly put my rapport skills into practice. I
mirrored and matched him. After he asked me about the home study
courses,
I told him how excited I was to be at the conference, and mentioned how
excitement is contagious. I asked him if he was excited. As he talked about
how excited he was, I touched my tie.
I then talked about how much fun it was just being here and laughing with
my peers. I asked him if he was having a good time. As he described a
funny event, I touched his shoulder and again touched my tie.
I asked him what he was curious about in the courses. As he told of his
curiosity and fascination with NLP, I touched my chin and readily agreed
(which I do!).
We then talked about some of the good courses he had taken, and which
courses he was especially glad he did (good decision). As he was speaking
of his favorite, I touched the home-study courses.
I asked if he had been to any bad or unfulfilling sessions at the conference.
As he described a couple, I made a gesture with my hand and talked about
wasting time and money.
Now I had what I needed. I used his magic words, and I talked about how
the home-study courses were both fun and exciting; I touched my tie.
He smiled.
I then talked about how this course answered all those questions about
NLP that many people in our field have; I touched my chin and his
shoulder.
We then talked about how it was important to take good-quality courses,
and how you want your money’s worth and to feel fulfilled. I touched the
videotapes and held them.
I then talked about how there were other products and courses out there,
and I did the gesture with my hand. He bought all of my courses. (Of
course, I have to say here that I totally believe in these courses. They
deliver the goods, so I was very passionate about that, and I wanted him to
make a good decision.)
As I was writing up the sale, I asked him about any special hobbies he had.
He told me he loved to scuba dive. Great! Now we had a shared passion.
He then mentioned he learned in the NAVY. I asked him if he liked his
Navy experience. He said he loved it.
As he was talking about his love for the NAVY and his loyalty to it, I gave
him the information on our organization, and how it feels to “be on board.”
As he was leaving, I stressed, “Welcome aboard the NFNLP ship.”
He brought two other people over that weekend, one of whom bought a
course. Is this stuff cool or what? By the way, he is a great NLP practitioner.
One last story. I was called in to consult with someone who did hypnosis
seminars and wanted to sell more products in the back of the room, mainly
tapes and books. I watched his presentation and recommended a few minor
adjustments, the most powerful being as follows:
First, I had him place the products up front so they could be seen. Then as
he talked about the great things the subconscious mind can do, I had him
place his hand next to the products.
The focus was on anchoring when he pointed out the things the
subconscious mind can do, things that you want, that you need. He casually
would gesture to the products. For example, he talked about how, once you
learn how to ride a bike, your mind will remember. You may not ride a bike
for years, but when you get on one again, your mind takes over and does it
for you. This is a good thing; you want this, you need this (point to product)
to free your attention to do other things. Another example is if you used to
drive a stick shift. Again, you may not drive one for years. Then, if you do,
you’re driving just fine within a few minutes. This you want, this you need
(casually point to products). It’s a good thing.
Then when he did his closing and talked about the products, he would say,
“Some people need this, others want this, but what these do is free your
mind. It’s a good thing,” as he held up the products. His sales increased by
over 10 percent at the next seminar.

Anchoring—A Universal Event: You Can’t NOT Be

Anchored!

You’re anchoring all the time in ways you’re not even aware of. Anchoring
is considered to be subliminal seduction and is, indeed, a very powerful
tool.

Anchoring Exercise
Ask someone to help you with the following exercise:

1. Identify resourceful behavior or state: Think of something you

already do well, some behavior or state that is already resourceful, but
which you would like to do even better.

2. Access and anchor number 1: What is it like to be doing that

behavior? As they access that state, reach over and anchor it with a touch of
the arm.
3. Identify additional resource number 2: Think of some other resource
state/behavior that you could add so that you’d be even more delighted with
that resourceful behavior. As they access this resource, anchor it with a
touch of the other arm.

4. Integration: Take this resource (fire anchor number 2) and relive that
resourceful behavior (fire anchor number 1) with this additional resource
available to you. Watch and listen to everything that happens as these two
experiences combine to make you even more effective. Take the time you
need and come on back.

5. Test: Fire anchor number 1 and look for a new response. Note:
Anchors should be set at just before the peak of the experience. Have the
client use all senses (seeing, hearing, feeling, smelling, and tasting) that
were associated with the experience. Ask the client to nod when they have
reached the peak of the experience. Then set the anchor. The purpose of
setting the anchor is to be able to call up that particular desired state when
needed.

6. The next time you do this, how will it be different? Fire the first
anchor. You want them to go in and sort all differences. So what’s it like? It
may only be one subtle shift.

Remember, you’re anchoring people all the time. Think about all the times
you might touch someone on the shoulder and say, “It’s OK! How bad is
it?” And you set an anchor every time. They get anchored into “this is feel
bad time.”
In the old Gestalt therapy, the therapist would start in one chair, and as the
patient got better, he’d go to another chair and could not go back to the old
chair because that was the bad chair. “You are better now, you can’t sit there
anymore.” They were anchoring even though they didn’t know what it was!
Some trainers covertly install humor throughout their presentation to make
the class more interesting. It especially helps when you make a mistake.
You can tap while you are creating the anchor. You can use your voice.
Using a middle name, such as “William Danny Horton,” immediately
reminds you of a time when you were getting chewed out by your mom.
You can anchor in the air with a gesture. You feed back their strategy and
add an anchor. A trainer can anchor her spaces on the stage so that
whenever she steps into a certain area or does a certain thing, the audience
will react in a certain way. Stand in a certain spot when you tell a story.
Anchoring makes all your techniques more powerful.

Exercise: Altering an Action/Behavior Transfer

Presenter (P): Does anyone have a problem or a time in their life when they
get stuck or have a response they don’t like and can’t get out?
a. It doesn’t hurt to use the book. It means there will be less you have
to remember.
b. Presumably, if a doctor has a question, he will go to a manual to get
the answer.
c. Grab the book if you need to.

P: You start to make a decision and you get stuck. Where do you get stuck?
What happens for you to get stuck? . . . Do you think about it a long time? .
. . Do you think too much?

Experiencer (E): I think too much. I analyze it.

P: Would you like to stop doing that to a certain degree?

P: Please close your eyes and we will be doing anchoring with touch—if
you don’t mind?

P: Can you see yourself from my point of view? Like on a movie screen?
See yourself so you are totally dissociated? There is no feeling, no thought.
Now shake that off.

P: Can you think of the last time you got stuck? When was that? What was
it? What were you thinking about?

E: The change I was going to make.

P: OK! Think about that now! And you know how it feels to be stuck.
Right? You know how it feels mentally and physically.
P: Now what I want you to do, have your brain do this . . . From now on
whenever you get stuck, you are automatically going to pull back and see
yourself from my point of view. Got it?

P: So when you think about being stuck, you are going to pull back and see
yourself from my point of view.

P: Shake that off and open your eyes. So how is it different now when you
think about being stuck?

P: Pull back. What resource, that is what we are looking for, and we just
tested it. That in itself can be an intervention if you are dealing with people.
So what can happen is they get stuck and they don’t get out of it. And
sometimes just by pulling back it can be an intervention.

Have you ever worked with someone who gets into an “instant rage?” They
just flip from being normal to being insane, and sometimes all they need is
someone to pull them back. If they can pull back and see themselves in
rage, they usually will regain control.

So what resource would be handy for you to have when you are stuck?
What do you think would be good? You get stuck in that think . . . think . . .
think . . . think . . . think and you pull back . . . what would be good? Go
ahead and trust your instinct—yes, go ahead and do it.

E: Just shut the faucet off and go.

P: OK, we can do that.

Steps to Behavior Transfer

1. Can you think of a time when you could do that, just shut the faucet
off and go? Yes!

2. Enter that now and think about it. So you know what that is like?

3. OK? So from now on, here is what is going to happen!

4. Whenever you start getting stuck, you are automatically going to
pull back and see yourself sitting there stuck . . . and when you settle back
in it, you will maybe just shut the faucet off and go.

5. But it is going to happen—stuck, pull back, and all of a sudden you

are just ready to go.

6. Stuck, pull back, ready to go. Before you know it, it will happen
faster than I could touch you.

7. So the next time you start getting stuck . . . snap your fingers . . . it’s
done!

8. Now just to make this even more fun, I want you to take your left
hand and either make a fist or an OK sign or do something with your left
hand . . . an OK sign.

9. That’s going to be your anchor. So if something happens and you get

stuck and it doesn’t happen automatically, just by doing the OK sign, this
will automatically happen.

10. So you might even make the OK sign, your self-anchor, when you
know you’ve got to make a decision. So you start making that OK sign and
your brain automatically goes, “OK, let’s just go!”

11. Always know you can trust yourself to make the best decision at the
time. So this becomes your self-anchor for that.

Solicit the help of another person and review the previous exercise
Have them think of a time that they get stuck or they go into an
unresourceful state. Find something that they get some type of stimulus
from, but which has response they don’t like.

Examples: Rage

“My wife just says something to me and I go off . . .” (Stimulus/response.)

“Every time my husband comes home, he leaves his clothes on the floor,
takes a shower . . . it drives me crazy.” (Stimulus/response.)

1. Have them elicit dissociation. Give them a safety valve if something

goes wrong, you want them to be able to dissociate. Ask them if they can
see themselves from my point. Picture yourself on a movie screen. See
yourself from the top of the room, whatever you want so they can imagine
themselves being dissociated. (Set anchor number 1 wherever it is handy
for you—knee, elbow, etc). Precise, exact spot is not necessary. Close is
good enough.

2. Test it, then elicit the stuck state . . . Have them think about the last
time it happened when they got stuck (anchor number 2).

3. Chain to dissociation: From now on, whenever you feel yourself

getting stuck, angry, upset, losing control, whatever the problem the client
has . . . you automatically find yourself pulling back (or dissociated) or
“drift back and see yourself getting angry,” or something like that. Note:
Always do everything twice.

4. Test: Have the client think about being stuck and usually they will
go . . . their eyes will go all over the place. You have scattered the
neurology of the brain.

5. Then ask them to select a resource—What would be good . . . ? He

said, “Turning the faucet off and going.” (Anchor it.)

6. Then tie all three anchors together—From now on, not only when
you feel stuck will you automatically pull back and see yourself, you are
also going to settle into turning the faucet off and go. They could say humor
versus the faucet, for example. Don’t give advice. Find out what resource
they need, and no matter how weird it sounds, use it. It has to be their idea.
For them it might be humor and a pile of clothes. One person would just
pick the clothes up, throw them in the closet and go on, or just leave them
there. Let them come up with whatever works in their brain. Now if they
obviously don’t know, then prod them, but it is important to let them put it
in their words. That is easy to overlook. That is why psychology has a
dismal track record. We take what works with one person and think it will
work with everyone. You overlap the patterns in the brain. Anchors can
override other anchors depending on the strength of the stimulus—like
taping over a tape.

Eliminating Fears and Phobias

This technique neutralizes the powerful negative feelings of phobias and
traumatic events.
Remember, most people learned to be phobic in a single situation that was
actually dangerous or seemed dangerous. The fact that individuals can do
what psychologists call “one-trial learning” is proof that a person’s brain
can learn quite rapidly. That ability to learn rapidly makes it easy for you to
learn a new way to respond to any phobia or trauma.
The part of the person that has been protecting the person all these years by
making him phobic is an important and valuable part. We want to preserve
its ability to protect him in dangerous situations. The purpose of this
technique is to refine and improve his brain’s ability to protect him by
updating the information.
Have the subject get comfortable. Following are questions and a suggested
patter for this technique.

• What is your phobia?

• Do you want to be over it?
• How bad is your phobia? What happens?
• And you would like to be over this?
• First thank your brain for a couple of things. (1) It proves how
quickly your brain works. (2) Once it learns something, it can be tenacious.
• Intellectually you know that most snakes are not poisonous, but that
doesn’t matter . . . does it?
• Thank your brain for holding onto this for all these years. And it’s
doing it for some reason to take care of you.
• All we are going to do is update the information collected by your
brain.
• OK?
• What I want you to do is put your feet flat and just close your eyes,
and I want you to imagine you are sitting in a movie theatre in your favorite
chair, and on the screen is a great big black-and-white snapshot of you,
where everything is fine. You got it?
• Now what I want you to do is float out of your body so you can see
yourself sitting in the chair. And you are going to drift back up like where
the projection booth would be, and you are going to see yourself sitting here
safe and secure, watching yourself watch the movie.
• So you are up in the projection booth, and there is plastic up there,
and you are safe and totally removed, and you are up here watching
yourself sitting here watching the movie.
• Got it? Good! Now I want you to watch and listen . . . protected in
this booth as you see this black-and-white snapshot kind of segue into a
movie of a younger you going through one of those situations where you
experienced a phobia reaction with [phobia].
• It might be the earliest memory you can remember, or it could be
the worst, either one. But you are up here in the projection booth watching
yourself, safe and secure, sitting there watching this movie . . . as it goes
from a black-and-white snapshot into a black-and-white movie of you either
the very first time you freaked out with [name phobia] or the worst time
you freaked out with [name phobia].
• And the movie is going to run all the way through the end and it
stops. And there’s a black-and-white picture of you again at the end, and
everything is fine.
• Now what you are going to do for me is you are going to drift out of
the projection booth and you are going to settle back down into your body,
safe and secure, and when you are ready, you are going to take a deep, deep
breath . . . hold it . . . take another deep breath and hold it.
• You are going to step into that last picture, and the whole movie is
going to run backward and in color. Swoooosh! Just like that—real fast all
the way back to the beginning, that’s right!
• Now come out of the movie, come back and sit down, safe and
secure. Drift up out of your body again and see yourself sitting here and
again the movie is going to start over.
• Again, the very first time or the very worst time you had an
experience with a snake all the way through to the end, it freezes. You drift
out of the movie theatre into yourself, and whenever you are ready on your
own you are going to take a deep breath, step into the movie, and as you
exhale, the movie is going to run backward and in color, with you in it.
• See, hear, and feel everything as it goes backward . . . swoosh, like
that. Got it?
• This time you don’t even go back to the projection booth; you just
come sit down here and watch the movie. This time it is in color, of the
worst experience you ever had with a snake, but you are watching it . . .
swoosh all the way to the end. When you step into it, the movie runs
backward and in color . . . swoosh . . . real quick! OK?
• And then it ends and you come back out and you see a huge picture,
one of those forty-foot pictures, like the old drive-in movie screen. There
you are, being the person you really want to be!
• What I want you to realize is since you had this phobia you have
[avoided your phobia and you haven’t learned as much as you could have
about the subject of your phobia], you’ll know how to urge caution in your
intelligence and your training . . . to be cautious and careful . . . and you
may be surprised and delighted right now as you begin to search in vain for
that phobic response.
• [Think of phobia in a smaller way—e.g., smaller snake, smaller
spider, etc.] Whenever you are ready, open your eyes. How are you feeling?
• How do you think you would feel if [you experienced phobia now]?
• Thank your brain for understanding all this stuff and you are going
to exercise caution, and so when you see [name phobia], don’t run up and
look at it, but you might go hmmmm . . . interesting!

Once you learn to use anchors on those with whom you associate, you’ll be
able to control their states of mind at will! This is a powerful tool that
should be used responsibly and with the best intentions. Used correctly, it
can set the stage for success, more persuasiveness in your interactions, and
a multitude of other positives in your life.
Anchors aweigh!
Chapter 8
Information Gathering
Once you achieve rapport with a person or persons, you will find gathering
information easier. They’ll want to talk to you, because they will feel a
sense of connectedness.
At the very outset, we advise you to bear in mind that, to gather the correct
information, you’ll need to do more than just listen to their words. You will
also need to decode their meaning. This is because we don’t operate directly
in the real world but have to create models, or maps, of the world, which we
then use to direct our behavior. These maps or models allow us to make
sense of the world and of all our experiences.
Now, the maps or models in question can’t be evaluated in terms of good or
bad, but only in terms of their ability to help us cope with the world. Most
of us create these models from three human language modeling processes,
namely deletion, distortion and generalization. These are what allow us to
grow, understand and experience the world.
The most common of these is generalization. This is where a person takes
pieces or parts of an experience and uses it to represent the whole category
from which that experience is but an example. A child learns his father is a
male, and he generalizes this and believes all males become daddies. This is
also how you can learn quickly. For instance, when you learn how to drive a
car, you can generalize what you learn about driving a car so you can drive
almost any automobile.
However, generalization has its limitations. For example, when salespeople
fail in a few calls, or perform in a way they label inadequate, they could
generalize this into believing that they are no good at sales calls.
The next process is distortion. This happens when we make shifts in how
we experience our sensory data. We misrepresent reality, sometimes making
it more or less important than it really is. People who do this because they
are optimists are said to be looking at the world through rose-colored
glasses.
The other side of the coin, however, can become a problem, such as
when someone takes a small amount of criticism from his sales manager
and turns it into “He hates me and is out to get me.”
It can also be a problem when someone takes a process and turns it into a
thing. Love becomes something to be handled—and controlled—as if it was
a thing.
Lastly we have deletion. This is where someone leaves out certain aspects
of an experience and focuses on other aspects, somewhat like selective
attention. On the plus side, this allows you not to become overwhelmed by
all the external stimuli you are confronted with daily; you can talk on the
cell phone while walking through the airport, oblivious to all the hustle
around you.
Victim mentality can be an example of this, however. Such a person
believes the world is against him, but he deletes his actions, which may
have put him into such a position or caused his problems in the first place.
Here is a complete breakdown of the language process we call the Meta
Model. Read through this, and then we’ll show you a way to cut to the
chase, so to speak.

Meta Model Distinctions

People have their own system for connecting words to their daily
experiences, and their own set of words to help connect to that experience.
People usually aren’t conscious of the process or the words they select to
represent their experience.
Errors in information gathering can be divided into two types:

1. Deletions—information that was lost as you represented the words given

to you by the customer.

2. Additions—information that you added to that representation, based on

your own presuppositions, personal history, etc.

What do we mean when we speak of deletions and additions? Well, deletion

occurs when we selectively focus on certain parts of our experience and
exclude other parts. It’s something we all do almost all the time to avoid
being overwhelmed by the external stimuli that surround us. For instance,
someone in a room full of people can play a video game, while another
person is watching television and three other people are playing a board
game. Each person in that room is deleting a portion of the total experience
in order to engage in their selected activity.
How does deletion occur when we’re with a customer? Imagine that you
have just asked your customer a question about their computer software
preference. The customer replies, describing his use of certain software and
his inability to get technical help when he needs it. As a computer
salesperson with a background in programming, you’ve never experienced
his level of frustration. You focus on the software he mentioned and talk
about how versatile these applications can be. You have unconsciously
deleted his technical-help problems, without even realizing that you did so.
Addition occurs when we add something to a representation based on our
own experience. Take the above example. This time the salesperson recalls
a time when he called for technical help with a software application and
spoke with a troubleshooter who gave him some insightful tips about the
application. He misses the frustration being expressed by his customer
because he is concentrating on his own memory and recalling how
knowledgeable the technician was and how he was able to use the tips to
greatly increase his expertise with the software application. The original
representation of the customer—that his use of certain software programs
led to seeking technical help that was less than helpful—is distorted by the
salesperson’s own experience.
The Meta Model is a set of questions that allows you to gather information
that clarifies someone’s experience, in order to get a full and detailed
representation of that experience. The goal of the Meta Model is to create
the most understanding and learning from any specific communication.
The Meta Model is used to gather information that leads a person from a
surface structure, SS (the language selected to represent an experience), to a
deep structure, DS (the actual, complete experience).
There are six question words in the English language: who, what, when,
where, how, and why. Of these, why is the only one that doesn’t ask for
specific detail. The answer to “Why?” is usually “Because,” followed by a
historical or theoretical explanation. This doesn’t supply the process
information you want. You may get specific detail in response to “Why?”
but that will only be a lucky accident. This is why the question “Why?”
does not appear in the Meta Model.
Meta Model responses help recover deleted material and assist the speaker
in reconnecting with their deep structure (the actual, complete experience).
This can be the most important part of a sales call, namely, gathering the
correct information.

Gathering Information

Lack of Referential Index

When the person or thing being referred to is not identified, this is known as
lack of referential index. This type of generalization limits your model of
the world by leaving out the specific details of the experience or
representation. These references are often pronouns, such as she, he, it, they
or them, and classes of objects, such as dogs, hotels, cars, countries, etc.
When you’re gathering information from a customer, you want to be sure
that you have a clear understanding of what they are saying. The details that
they leave out can make or break the sale.

1. Deleted Referential Index occurs when the speaker of the sentence

simply leaves out the reference.

a. “The window was broken.”

Who broke it?
b. “I’m being pushed into this project.”
Who’s pushing you?

2. Unspecified Referential Index occurs when the noun or noun phrase

does not name a specific person or thing . . . look for words like “this,”
“that” and “it.”
a. “That just won’t work.”
What, specifically, won’t work?
b. “This is stupid.”
What is stupid?

3. Generalized Referential Index is one way the speaker can “plug the
hole” left by deleting a reference. A generalized referential index is a noun
or pronoun which refers to a nonspecific group or category.

a. “Relationships are a drain.”

Which relationships do you find draining?
b. “People are so uncaring.”
Who, specifically, is so uncaring?

4. Reversed Referential Index occurs when the speaker is stated as

receiving the action of the verb in a sentence rather than doing the action of
the verb.

a. “He hates me.”

Try saying “I hate him,” and then express what you’re feeling.
b. “She never seems to understand me.”
Try saying, “I never seem to understand her,” and then express what exactly
you’re feeling.

The creator of the Gestalt theory, Fritz Perls, called this linguistic pattern
projection. As people reverse the statement and begin to take responsibility
for themselves in this manner, they have the possibility of having an “Aha!”
experience. This is referred to as owning projection.

Nominalizations
This Referential Index Meta-Model violation has its own category.
Nominalizations are words transformed from process (verbs) into closed
events (nouns).
To gather information here, change the noun or constant state back into an
active form of the verb from which it was derived. Specifically ask “who”
or “what.”

Open up the action.

Who’s communicating what to whom?
How would you like to communicate?

Linguistically, nominalizing is the changing of a DS process into an SS

event. Ask yourself the question: “Can you put the nominalization in a
wheelbarrow?” or does the word fit into the blank of the syntactic frame:
“Ongoing . . . ?”
Words like friendship, sensation, decision, obligation, etc. are
nominalizations.
You need to denominalize the words.

Questions to ask:
“How specifically are you . . . ?”
“What prevents you . . . ?”
“Can you imagine . . . ?”

1. “He is a failure.”
How is he failing?

2. “This relationship is not working out.”

How is the way you are relating not working out for you?

3. “I can’t do anything without being reminded of my obligations.”

To whom are you obligated to do what?

4. “My wife’s laughter provokes my anger.”

How does your wife’s laughing cause you to feel angry?

5. “I resent your question.”

How (what) do you resent in what (that) I am asking you?

Unspecified Verbs
In an Unspecified Verb, a full description of the action or event is not
present. To say that someone touched me is much more generalized than to
say someone caressed me.

Question to ask:
How, specifically?

1. “Michelle rejects me.”

How, specifically, does Michelle reject you?

2. “They ignore me.”

How, specifically, do they ignore you?

3. “He hurts me.”

How, specifically, does he hurt you?

4. “John keeps bothering me.”

How, specifically, does John keep bothering you?

Note that the above statements also include a Reversed Referential Index.

Expanding Limits
Modal Operators of Possibility/Necessity (Modes of Operation) are words
that identify the limitations a person puts on him/herself.
Possibility/Impossibility: can/can’t; will/won’t; possible/impossible.
Necessity (Required): should/shouldn’t; must/must not;
necessary/unnecessary.
These operators define the boundaries of the person’s model of the world.
To extend beyond those boundaries is to invite some catastrophic
expectation over which the speaker believes he or she has no control.

Questions to ask:
What stops you?
What would happen if you did?

1. “I can’t do that.”
What would stop you?
What would you do if you did?

2. “I won’t be able to go to the concert alone.”

What stops you from going to the concert alone?
What do you think would happen if you went alone?

3. “I really should be more flexible.”

What do you think would happen if you were more flexible?

4. “I ought to be more understanding when he’s like that.”

What do you think would happen if you weren’t?

5. “It’s not possible for me to love anymore.”

What stops you from loving?
What would happen if you did?

Look for the words must, have to, ought to, and their opposites, shouldn’t,
must not.

Universal Quantifiers
With Universal Quantifiers, everything is exaggerated. This category
includes words such as all, never, always, no one and everybody. They
often indicate that a generalization has been made from a specific
experience.
The question to ask should be in the form of an exaggeration. Ask for
contradictions to the event the speaker is talking about.

1. “I never get what I want.”

Can you think of a time when you did get what you wanted?

2. “No one will give me help.”

I wonder if you can remember at least one person who helped you?

3. “Everybody’s mean to me.”

Everybody’s always mean to you, everyone you know, even your best
friend, even the milkman?

4. “I’ve always used the wrong words.”

You’ve always used the wrong words at every time and in every situation?

Universal Quantifiers often have built-in double binds.

1. “Though I want to, I’ll never respect him . . . I always get what I
want from him.”
I have a homework assignment for you. During the coming week I would
like you to ask him to give you only what you want in order to respect him.

Mind Reading
Mind Reading is a person’s belief that one person can know what another is
thinking/feeling without direct communication (knowing someone’s
internal state).
Projected Mind Reading: a person believes that others should know what
she is thinking.

Questions to ask:
How, specifically, do you know that?

1. “I know what makes her happy.”

How, specifically, do you know what makes her happy?

2. “You love me.”

How, specifically, do you know that I love you?

3. “He should know better.”

How should he know not to do that?

4. “They think he knows all the answers.”

How specifically do you know that they think that?

5. “If she cared about me, she wouldn’t have to ask what I need.”
If she doesn’t ask, then how will she know for sure what you need?

Changing Meanings

Cause and Effect

Cause and Effect is a belief that some action on the part of one person can
cause another to experience emotion or an inner state, where cause is
wrongly put outside of self.

Questions to ask:
How does X cause Y? How, specifically?

1. “Michael’s nervousness causes me to be edgy.”

How, specifically, does Michael’s nervousness cause you to be edgy?

2. “Reading this makes me angry.”

How, specifically?
3. “You make me sad.”
How, specifically?

4. “I feel bad for making her cry.”

What did you do that you believe made her cry?

5. “Their laughter makes me angry.”

How does their laughing cause you to be angry? (Notice the nominalization
in sentence number 5 . . . laughter.)

Lost Performative
A Lost Performative is a generalization that a person makes and transfers to
the world as if it is a truth. The personally-held belief gets lost in the
generalizations (value judgments where the person doing the judging is left
out).

Questions to ask:
Who says? For whom?

1. “It’s crude to act like that.”

Who says?

2. “This is the right way to do this project.”

According to whom?

3. “That’s a stupid thing to do.”

Stupid according to whom?

4. “It’s not important anyway.”

It’s not important to whom?

By using Lost Performatives, people remove themselves from any position

that might leave them open to criticism or challenge. “Statistically speaking
. . .” By getting the speaker to use such phrases as “I think” or “my belief
is,” the speaker is able to identify himself as the specific performer of the
judgment, thought, belief or action.
The Short Method

Now that you have an idea of how we use language to make sense out of
the world, and how we can lose the true meaning in these processes, let us
show you a shortcut.
The thing to bear in mind is to get your customer (or anyone with whom
you are communicating) to be as specific as possible. You want to elicit
information that is as sensory-specific as possible…things you can SEE,
HEAR or TOUCH. When you do this, you will be communicating in a way
that makes understanding much easier. The word(s) you now want to start
using a lot:

Specific/Specifically
Now, when you first start this process, some people may be upset when you
nail them down by requiring specificity, but you will also become known as
a clear communicator. As a culture, we have lost clear communication and
replaced it with the vague reference.
Here is a list of the key questions you need to learn to ask in almost any
situation in which you want to gather clear information.

The Key Questions:

1. What do you want?
Stated in positive terms
Specific
Sensory Based
Hear
Feel
a. What will that do for you? (specifically)
2. How will you know when you have it?
3. Where, when, and with whom do you want it?
4. How will this affect other aspects (or people) in your life?
5. What stops you from having this already?
6. What resources do you already have that will help you obtain your
outcome?
7. What additional resources do you need to obtain it?
8. How are you going to get there?
a. First step: Must be specific and achievable.
Is there more than one way to get there?

The Key to Successful Interaction

The Meta Model

Let’s talk about the Meta Model of information gathering. “Meta” means
overview, huge, above. It is a way of gathering information specifically.
After this exercise, you’ll fall in love with the word “specifically” (and
chances are that everyone around you will want to slap you for it!).
We all talk about getting upset, and often it’s a person who makes us upset.
Well what, specifically, are you upset about? How, specifically, does that
person upset you? People do not want specifics in their life. They want
generalizations (fluff words).
The two ways to gather information:

1. You can go up to a more generalized term (fluffy language).

2. You can go down to something specific.

You should focus on what you can see, hear, and feel. For example, instead
of saying, “I want to be happy,” think what, specifically, will make you
happy. How, specifically, do you know if you are happy?
Let us deal with some specific questions . . .

1. What do you want? Why are you reading this?

Stated in positive terms, we are looking for a positive goal; not what you
don’t want.

This is great if you work with people who want a relationship. Most people
can tell you exactly what they don’t want in a person, which is usually those
qualities present in the person they just left.

I am not interested in what you don’t want, but what you do want.

Are you reading this for therapy or business?

a. Has to be in your realm of experience.
b. Specific—Sensory Based—See—Hear—Feel.
c. Small chunk size.

Example: I want to kill my wife. I want to be a vegetarian. I want to stop

smoking. It’s a specific goal, initiated and controlled by the client.

Ask yourself specifically, “How are you going to do that.”

2. What will that do for you? (Specifically).

a. I will feel better.
b. Is there any other way you can feel better other than killing your
wife?

3. How will you know when you have it?

a. How will you see, hear and feel?

4. Where, when and with whom do you want it?

Do you want this everywhere in your life, or is this a specific situation?

For example, if someone wanted to be more assertive in their life. Where,

when and with whom do you want to be more assertive, specifically?
Home, kids, work? Is it sensory-based and ecological? Make sure it is good
for the whole system.

5. How will this affect other aspects (or people) in your life?
Assertiveness, for example.

Let us consider the example of the lady who wanted to become a

vegetarian.

This decision isn’t something that will affect the lady alone. The entire
family may have to eat less meat.
Similarly, if a member of the family wants to quit smoking, it will mean
that the whole family may have to smoke outside.

6. What stops you from having this already?

7. What resources do you have that will help you obtain the outcome
you desire?

a. Success in one area can be transferred to success in another.

8. What additional resources do you need to obtain it?

9. How are you going to get there?

a. First step: Be specific and achievable. How will you start?

b. Is there more than one way to get there?

The following story will help exemplify this point.

The Guru

There was this town that had a town Guru. He was a person who knew all
the answers. Now, there was a family that was having a problem with their
son. The son would eat chocolate and candy, get hyper, eat more candy, and
go on until he was out of control.
After exhausting all their resources, they went to the Guru and told him of
their problem. He told them to come back in two weeks, by which time, he
said, he would have an answer for them.
Rumors spread about this Guru who was supposed to have all the answers
immediately. Was he losing it?
Finally, the two weeks over, they went back to the Guru. He told them what
to do, and it worked. All the elders of the town got together to find out why
it took the Guru so long (two weeks) to get an answer.
They approached the Guru for a clarification. He said he had a problem
with sweets; he got hyper and would then pass out. He admitted that he
hadn’t realized it was a problem until they had presented it to him. How
could he help them with a problem that he himself had, until he had solved
it for himself? So he went to his Guru to find out how to solve the problem.

Guru = Gee, you are you.

Now let us move on to a simple exercise on how to lose weight.

Exercise: How to lose weight:

(P) What is it, specifically, that you want?

(E) To lose weight.
(P) How much weight do you specifically want to lose?
(E) I want to get down to 110 lbs.
(P) What would that do for you?
(E) It would make me look better and feel better and fit in my clothes better.
(P) So you want to look better and feel better, and losing weight would do
that for you?
(P) Are there any specific foods that are primarily giving you a problem?
(E) I am a sweetaholic.
(P) What types of sweets, particularly?
(E) Candy, cookies, cake and pie.
(P) When do you usually eat the sweets?
(E) I do well during the day, but when I get home—ah! That’s when I lose
it!
(P) So you want to eat better, salads, etc.? Did you ever eat that good?
(E) No!
(P) So this will be a new behavior for you?
(P) How will this affect other people in your life?
(E) They would like it.
(P) What stops you from already achieving your goal?
(E) I never learned to eat fruits and vegetables.
(P) What resources do you already have that will help you get there?
(E) Books, etc.; I have motivation, desire, programming.
(P) What additional resources do you need to obtain it?
(P) So you have taken these steps but something hasn’t clicked?
(P) What is the next step you are going to take to get there?
When you communicate, it is normal to Distort—Generalize—Delete
information, and it is usually the most important information that is left out.
Let’s take a peek at what these are.

Distortions
Mind-Reading Pattern
This is apparently knowing what someone else is thinking or feeling.

Response: How do you know? You really don’t know. They did it in the
past.

“Past behavior is the best predictor for future behavior.” This sounds good
but doesn’t mean anything. Always ask. Always probe. Always question.
Never take anything for granted.

Prediction: Recover source of information

Another example: “I know you are upset with me.” How do you really
know?

Lost-Performative Pattern
This is general semantics from Alfred Korzipski. It’s about how language is
processed. As we already learned, sentences have two structures: the deep
structure and the surface structure.

They are deleting what is being judged. It’s bad to be inconsistent.

Response: (Gather evidence) Who says it is bad? According to whom? How

do you know? You have lost the performance factor. You need to focus on
who or what is the performance thing you are doing.

Prediction: Recover Source of Belief.

Recover Performative

Recover Belief Strategy

Cause-Effect Pattern
“You make me sad.”

Response: How does what I am doing cause you to be sad? How do you
know you are sad, specifically?

Prediction: Recover choice.

Complex-Equivalents Pattern
Two experiences being interpreted as being synonymous.

“She’s always yelling at me; she doesn’t like me!”

Response: Have you ever yelled at someone you liked? How does her
yelling mean . . . ?

You could be yelling because you just got a letter from the IRS. You have to
break the equivalence.

Prediction: Recover CEQ. Counterexample.

5. Presuppositions Pattern
Example: If my husband knew how much I suffered, he wouldn’t do that.

Three Suppositions:

(1) I suffer.
(2) My husband acts in some way.
(3) My husband doesn’t know I suffer.

Response:

(1) How do you choose to suffer?

(2) How is he reacting?
(3) How do you know he doesn’t know?

You are presupposing he cares.

By challenging it, you are breaking the other’s model of the world.

(1) Specify choice and verb.

(2) Specify what he does.
(3) Recover internal representation and CEQ.

Generalizations

Universal-Quantifiers Pattern
(All, every, never, everyone, no one, etc.)
Examples: She never listens to me!
Everyone does everything.
(Kids use this a lot.)
Everyone is going to the dance.
You have to do this/that.

Challenge! What would happen if you did?

Response: (find counterexamples) Never! What would happen if she did?

Prediction: Recover counterexample effects, outcome.

Modal-Operators Pattern

Modal Operators of Necessity (required)

(Should, shouldn’t, must, must not, have to, need to, it is necessary)
Example: I have to take care of her.

Response: What would happen if you did? What would happen if you
didn’t?
Prediction: Recover effects, outcome.

Modal Operators of Possibility (or impossibility)

(Can/can’t, will/won’t, may/may not, possible/impossible)
Example: I can’t tell him the truth.

Response: What prevents you? What would happen if you did?

Prediction: Recover causes.
Deletions

Nominalizations Pattern
(Process words, verbs that have been turned into nouns)

Turning a non-concrete process into a concrete event.

If you can’t put it in a wheelbarrow . . . If you can’t see it, feel it, or touch
it, it is a nominalization.

Example: “I’m in love.” What does love look like? This is fun in
communication because you find out if you are speaking the same language
or not.

Response: Who’s communicating what to whom? How would you like to

communicate?

Prediction: Turn back into a process, recover deletion, and referential index.
Process and specify verb.

Unspecified-Verbs Pattern

Example: “He rejected me.”

People don’t specify what’s going on with them.

Response: How, specifically, did he reject you?

Prediction: Specify the verb.

Simple-Deletions Pattern
a. Simple Deletions. Example: “I am uncomfortable.”

b. Lack of Referential Index. Example: “They don’t listen to me.”

(fails to indicate a specific person or thing)

c. Comparative Deletions. Example: “She’s a better person.”

(good, better, best, more, less, most, least, worse, worst)
Response:
a. About what, whom?
b. Who, specifically, doesn’t listen to you?
c. Better than whom? Better than what? Compared to whom, what?

Prediction:
a. Recover Deletion
b. Recover Referential Index
c. Recover Comparative Deletion
Chapter 9
Beliefs
It’s no secret that some people are more successful than others. Why is this?
Most people think truly amazing or successful individuals were handed all
the right cards in life, such as a powerful family, wealth or a great home
life. Is this true? Are successful people smarter, are they better
businessmen, or do they have something that others lack? If you look at
history, you’ll see that it’s not necessarily any of the above. Rather, it’s
something in the internal operating system of their brains.
Look at Mahatma Gandhi, Ho Chi Min or the Wright Brothers. None of
these folks were extremely powerful or came from great wealth. They were
all common individuals, lawyers or bicycle repairmen. Yet they
accomplished great things, because they expected nothing less of
themselves.
That internal operating system within the brain is the place where
individuals determine what they expect from themselves. People always
live up to their own expectations. If you expect to fail, guess what? You’ll
certainly fail. If you expect to be the CEO of a company, you will! It’s all in
the power of belief.
The human belief system is a very powerful thing. What many don’t realize
is that they set themselves up for failure without ever saying a word. Your
internal feelings and beliefs about yourself can either make you or break
you…they truly are that powerful.
This is not to say there won’t be bumps along the way, even with a powerful
and positive belief system. It would be fantasy to assume success will
simply fall in your lap. There will be trials along the way, but these can be
turned into positives by learning from mistakes. This means taking less
successful ideas and turning them into feedback instead of failure. The
formula for success lies in correcting and tweaking the system.

Beliefs: Personal Potential

Learning mind control isn’t an overnight venture. Though the keys we’re
showing you here are really very simple, it can take weeks or months to
achieve. Tapping into the creative resources within you is sometimes a trial-
by-error system. As you grow in your success, you learn about yourself, as
well as your limitations and strengths. This takes patience and time…which
is what unsuccessful people often lack.
As simple as it may sound, there’s a great lesson here. You could assume
that, though a system of success sounds great, it will likely not work. Or,
you could absorb it into your internal operating system, knowing that it will
provide guidance in fulfilling your dreams. It’s all in how you look at the
opportunity and code it inside that brain of yours.
Believing in yourself is the absolute most important step in any venture
you’ll ever undertake. When you take on new challenges and tell yourself
that you will succeed, you can and will prove yourself right.

The Pygmalion Effect

This theory is not a new one, but it is one that can make your dreams come
true. In 1957, a professor by the name of Robert Merton researched how
people's perceptions of those around them influenced their own. As a
research project, a young teacher was told she would be teaching a group of
gifted students. These students actually were not gifted at all. In fact, they
fell within the average, but also had behavior problems.
Very soon, the teacher discovered that the students were not engaged,
interested or willing to behave under her current teaching style. She worked
very hard to come up with a new approach. When she did, she sparked the
curiosity of those students. After a very fruitful year, the students were
engaged and learning; and they proved it with a 20-30 point IQ jump! How
did this work? Did the teacher turn those average students into gifted
students? Yes. She changed her style based on the belief that those students
were gifted and that she must improve her teaching style to match their
potential. Had she expected less of them, the results would have been very
different. Now, can you imagine what would happen in your life if you were
operating at the same level of expectation?
Merton’s theory developed into what is called the Social Theory, or Social
Structure. That’s a fitting name, because it’s very true. People form their
behaviors and expectations around those individuals with whom they’re
associated. If the expectation is low, then the performance will be also, and
vice versa. If you know other people expect you to fail, you may form a
belief in your own failure. If you have even one person “in your corner,”
though, you’re much more likely to believe in your success. Of course, we
also use the power of belief to our advantage when we influence others to
our way of thinking and acting.

Beliefs and Biochemistry

Your beliefs not only affect your thinking, they also affect your health and
wellbeing.
One great illustration of this is the “Placebo Effect.” In one study, patients
were randomly selected to receive either a "sugar pill" or an analgesic for a
headache, without the patient knowing which. Needless to say, the
researchers were quite surprised when the sugar pill recipients, believing
they received an analgesic, had close to the same results as those who
actually received the pain medication!
What does that tell us? It tells us that what people perceive and believe is
what happens. The individuals who received the sugar pill believed the
medication would work for the headache, so it did. The Placebo Effect is so
strong that even the FDA acknowledges the fact that individuals can benefit
from a "fake" pill simply because they believe in it. So, do you see how
important a person’s belief system is?
Another study did something similar, but they gave one group a stimulant
and the other a depressant. The group that was given the stimulant was told
that it was a depressant, and vice versa. The results were amazing! The
participants reported results consistent with the expected outcome, not the
actual medication. They actually controlled their biochemical makeup.
Those study members who received the stimulant reported feeling drowsy
and groggy. Those who were given the depressant felt full of energy. It was
just opposite of the actual effects of the medication, but they told
themselves that was how they were supposed to feel, therefore that’s how
they felt!
Real versus Imagined Experience
Medical science has proven that our brain does not differentiate between
what is vividly imagined and what is actually experienced. The same
neurological impulses are triggered throughout the nervous system for both
situations. This is important for you, because it signifies that, when you
close your eyes and imagine yourself succeeding, you are more likely to
achieve your goals. In fact, one could say you’re preparing yourself for
success.

Imagine this to test out this theory:

Think of a large yellow lemon…the mere name signifies sour. Now close
your eyes and imagine biting into that lemon. The sour juice drenches your
tongue, making your nose twitch and your mouth pucker. Feel the cold
surface of the lemon on your hands and close to your nose. Smell the citrus
scent, reminding you how sour it really tastes.

Are you salivating? I bet the answer is YES! That’s because your nervous
system has been activated just as if you had that lemon in your mouth.
This power of imagination can work to the benefit or the demise of many
people. Some begin to feel fear or stress at the mere sound of a certain
situation. This can actually cause them health problems. When the fear
response is activated, the immune system can be suppressed, making the
individual more prone to illness. How well can an individual function under
great stress, fear and illness? How tempting is it to attempt to shut down, let
someone else take over, or even self-medicate with alcohol, nicotine or
food? Fortunately, there’s a better way.

Mental Rehearsal – The Secret Weapon

For years, the Russians have dominated the Olympic Games in gymnastics.
Many people have wondered, yet never truly understood, why the Russians’
performance was so excellent. What’s their secret? They employ a sports
psychologist. This psychologist offers psychological techniques that
enhance the athletes’ physical techniques. Not only do the Russians prepare
their bodies, but also their minds.
Think about it…when you rehearse failure in your mind, what are you
likely to do? On the other hand, if you follow the example of the Russians
and their secret mental preparedness, you can succeed just as they do. When
you rehearse the pictures of success in your mind, you soon will be seeing
them in person.

Reaching the Mind with Visualization

Visualization is a very important aspect in human behavior. With the power
of visualization, you can see yourself in successful positions. You can
imagine breaking through the limitations and boundaries that are holding
you back. Here is an exercise to help you see the power of visualization:

Pointing your finger forward, and without moving your feet, turn your body
in a clockwise motion as far as you can. Make a mental note of this
position.

Close your eyes and visualize yourself in the above exercise.

Now, with your eyes closed, continue, but stretch yourself a little further (in
your mind). Imagine yourself turning three feet further than you turned the
first time.

Now open your eyes and repeat the first exercise. You went further than the
first time, right?

You can get past your mental limits and boundaries that you set for
yourself. That’s because, when you imagine that you can, you do! Success
is just a visualization away!

Breaking Beliefs

Most people strive to reach a record, but never seek to break that record.
They never seek a higher goal for themselves. You may be wondering, what
does that mean? It means that, if you only strive for something that has
already been accomplished, you may never fulfill your full potential.
Take running, for example. Prior to the early 1950’s no one had ever run a
mile in less than four minutes. After Roger Bannister, a college student, ran
the mile in less than four minutes, it wasn’t long before others followed his
lead. Why was that? It happened because people fail to reach for what they
think is unobtainable. Amazingly, after Bannister broke the record, 37 other
runners broke the same record that year. What does this tell us? Never take
the “top goal” and quit! Strive for more and reach for the unthinkable.

Beliefs Are Never Absolutes

Beliefs are sometimes true, but oftentimes they are only an opinion, a
personal perception of a situation. Did you ever stop to think that someone
who is feeling depressed would have a different belief about a situation than
he or she would when they were feeling better? For instance, if a driver cuts
you off on your way home from work, how do you react? If you’ve had a
bad day, you might honk your horn, scream at the other driver or exhibit
other forms of road rage. If you’re feeling good about your day, however,
you’ll probably shrug it off and continue. So, the same event can be
perceived quite differently.
People have beliefs about a variety of things they experience everyday, but
this doesn’t make their beliefs set in stone or rules to live by. Sometimes
perceptions are wrong. Perceptions may be off or misguided because of
faulty information. Think about the game you played in elementary school
—we called it “telephone”—where you whispered a secret in the ear of a
person standing next to you. By the end of the line, the details changed.
Stories were different, and perceptions were certainly different. See how
things can become distorted?
You need to understand that, no matter what the belief, it can change. You
need to evaluate each belief and determine whether that belief is true for
everyone, or whether it’s tainted by some other motive that may inhibit your
ability.
The best way to understand whether the belief is positive or negative is to
ask yourself whether the belief will hold you back or empower you. Most
successful individuals share the belief that all things happen for a reason,
and that their lives aren’t ruled simply by “fate.” The belief that fate or
blessing provides a successful outcome can cause distress and frustration.
Success does not fall in anyone’s lap; you have to make it happen!
The Famous and Intelligent Proven Wrong
Large companies and those seeking advertisements look to those who are
famous or intelligent to promote their product. This happens because the
public has a positive regard for the individual, allowing them to believe
what they say. But what if they’re wrong?
Bill Gates once promoted the fact that no computer needed more than 250
kilobytes of RAM. Dr. Lee De Forest claimed that man would never reach
the moon, no matter how many scientific advances came along. In 1905, the
head of the U.S. Patent office is believed to have said, “Everything that can
be invented has been invented”! So, those who are intelligent, educated, or
famous don’t always know best.
Never take limitations as whole truths. Always strive for one step better.
The four minute mile, cell phones, and even the Internet were once
considered impossible! Now imagine living without them. What if no one
had ever promoted those new ideas? Our computers wouldn’t have the
memory or capabilities they now have. No one would have walked on the
moon. The four-minute mile wouldn’t be run in high schools as it is today.
Certainly, our lives would be different without our “needed” cell phones
and Internet. (I couldn’t even have written this book without the Internet!)
Dreams are what make success come true. Dream, and dream big!

Beliefs Become True

Saying that beliefs are not always true is simply stating a fact. However,
with certain beliefs, the individual often finds that the belief comes true. It
has been taught over and over that what individuals believe and think is
their fate. We are a product of our internal belief system. No matter how
faulty the belief, the person who has the belief will inevitably live it.
People become what they believe because that’s how they perceive the
opportunity and environment around them. People don’t perceive reality,
but they do perceive their perception of reality.
Read that sentence again. It’s a mind-boggling idea, but one that is
unbelievably true. A good example of this theory can be seen when two
people have a verbal argument. Both parties are angry. When they think of
the argument, they will recall different things. Their minds will take in parts
of the altercation, changing, deleting and even distorting the information.
People also have the tendency of remembering a negative expression or
action much longer than a positive one. Perhaps a child has done a host of
good things, but the one time she messes up, she has trouble living it down.
Then, if the child does something wrong again, the parents will
automatically return to the negative experience.
People have self-fulfilling prophecies, but not by accident. They set
themselves up for such situations. A nagging, suspicious wife can drive
even a faithful husband away with her constant negativity. Strong and
passionate beliefs can oftentimes become true, because we persist in them
until they become reality. If you belief you’re a pushover that can never
persuade someone else to your way of thinking, or believe you’re just not
cut out to be a salesman, that will become true. So, be careful with your
negative beliefs, because you may just create self-fulfilling prophecies that
you don’t want.

Perceptual Blind Spot

In the last chapter, we looked at the idea of distortions and deletions.
Sometimes the brain will delete something because of a belief system. Have
you ever searched high and low for something, all the time telling yourself
that you hate looking for things, and that you won’t be able to find it
because you’re so terrible at finding things? Usually, someone else comes
along and immediately grabs whatever you were looking for. Often, it was
in a place where you’d already looked two or three times. What’s going on?
Are you having trouble with your eyesight?
No, this phenomenon is known as a perceptual blind spot. Because you’re
so busy telling yourself that you won’t find what you’re looking for, your
eyes scan right across the item without seeing it. This is also called a
negative visual hallucination.
This idea can be expanded into “blind spots” about success, health, wealth
and all other facets of our experience. Beliefs can cause your success or
failure in the same way they can cause you to not see a pair of sunglasses or
a set of keys. If you believe that there are no opportunities and that you will
never be successful, you’ll miss the opportunity right under your nose.

Creating Beliefs
Beliefs come from our experiences and from the individuals around us.
Beliefs are drawn from friends, family members, educators and local
heroes. These perceptions and beliefs are important, because they make us
who we are, but we must remember that our beliefs are only as good as our
perceptions. Beliefs are never absolute truths, and shouldn’t be treated as
such. Evaluating your beliefs to ensure that they’re not holding you back is
of the utmost importance. That’s because, as you’ve seen here, beliefs
become embedded into our brains and become our behaviors…which are
our lives!
Chapter 10
Changing with Logical Levels
Perspective Is Everything!

Our brain is a vast informational system that has a series of “maps.” These
maps grow as new information and experiences are input into our system.
There’s a lot of territory around these maps in our brains, and sometimes
our perspective limits the incoming information, therefore constraining our
map. Our perspective, simply put, is how we feel and think about situations.
Sometimes our perspective on new experiences, tasks or information can
guide us in the wrong direction. It’s important to make sure we learn to
control our thinking. That way, we can handle change in smaller steps,
making it more manageable. Smaller and more manageable steps make the
change seem easier, therefore allowing for more confidence handling new
situations.

Logical Levels

There are different levels at which change can occur. As with anything, it’s
easier to change things at a much lower level than one that is more
complex. For example, when you think of updating your home, you think of
colors, decorations and minor repairs. These are all things that are easy and
that won’t cost an arm and leg or take much effort. The higher-level
remodeling jobs such as electrical, plumbing and replacing the carpet are
much more difficult.
Look at the diagram below and determine the levels, then compare them to
the level of change that you’re looking for. When the levels of the diagram
are all satisfied, you’ll be happier and more content. This can be called
congruence, which is the state of individuals when they’re comfortable with
their beliefs, values and skills. Misalignment or levels that are out of order
can cause an individual’s thought patterns to be incorrect, therefore leading
to failure.
The Right Questions

When you’re looking to change, it’s important to have a good foundation

and understand of why you are changing. Sometimes answering why is the
hardest part; that amazes many people.
Here are the questions that you need to ask yourself in order to determine
the best plan of action…and if the change is a good one. Remember the
who, what, where, when, why and how of answering questions? Well, life’s
big questions are no different.
The environment surrounding your change is very important. This is
sometimes the constraining factor of change in your life. Some people are
confined to the environment in which they live; sometimes it can change
and other times you have to find a way around it. The environment can
answer your where, when and who questions.
Behavior involves the actions and behaviors surrounding the changes. This
is the what question. Behavior is directly linked to the environment level.
Capabilities are about your knowledge base and show you how you can
accomplish your change with your skills. Your capabilities are your guiding
force, and answer your how questions.
Beliefs and values are your motivational base and are what allows you to
begin the change itself. This is your why question; it addresses the
importance associated with the change.
Identity is your sense of self and, in many cases, guides your relation to
others. This is the who question.
Purpose, though not one of the five levels, looks at the entire picture, which
is sometimes difficult. This is the reason and driving force behind the
change, the reason why the change is necessary. This is the what for
question.

Logical Levels Step-by-Step

One of the areas where most people go wrong is not establishing a guideline
or “method to their madness.” Using the levels and breaking them down
into smaller steps will ensure success. Think about it this way; when a
person goes to climb a mountain, they don’t take one huge step in hopes of
reaching the top all at once. They take a series of smaller steps that
eventually take them to the summit. The same is true in achieving goals;
develop a plan and take smaller steps!

Out of Whack
The old saying that you can‘t fix what you don’t acknowledge is very true.
It‘s important to admit that a change is necessary. What ever it’s worth or
cost to you personally, if you don’t put a price tag on it, you likely won’t
adhere as closely to the steps!

The Right Level

After admitting there is a need for change, you must discover at what level
the change is needed. Really taking inventory will help you discover the
level of change you need. For example, do you need to mend a relationship
or improve your sales numbers? Is there another area that is suffering or
could improve?

Putting It into Action

As with anything, change in your life must come from motivation, and from
the understanding that a change could help you succeed or better your life.
It’s also necessary to obtain or find the right tools to help you succeed.
Those tools may be other people, education, business or something else that
provides the needed foundation for your change.

Uses for logical levels

Using logical levels can assist you in springing into action after you’ve
answered the questions and surrounded yourself with useful tools. Here is
how to use the levels in a practical and efficient manner.

Information Gathering
You can use the logical levels when gathering information, as we talked
about in the last chapter. Obviously, getting the facts and making good use
of them is important! You wouldn’t do a research paper without first
gathering the information. After finding the information, organize it into a
system that you can understand.

Building Relationships
Building relationships within the family is important in a change, because it
typically changes the dynamics of the entire family. This is especially true
in changes such as marriage or divorce, where the entire family is affected.
Understanding how the family can work together, and implementing family
bonds, will help continue and make the change more successful.

Improve Performance
Whether it’s a business or personal change that’s in question, it is important
to ensure that you’re doing your best. In business, is it a financial decision,
employee morale, or an ethical situation that needs to be improved? In your
personal life, do you need to be a more involved parent or an attentive
child…or do you need to step back and give loved ones their space?

Leadership and Confidence

What’s this book about? Of course! The levels of change are instrumental in
establishing better confidence levels and developing personal techniques to
improve your leadership methods and achieve your goals.

Finding the Tools for Change

There are certain requirements that are needed for change. Among these are
the desire to change, knowing how to change and the opportunity for
change. Deciding that you can make it happen and accepting the fact that
you have choices will assist you in the change process.
Environment
The environment, your surroundings, is one of the most important aspects
of change. Sometimes the environment is simply not conducive to change,
so it makes it impossible. Instead of giving up hope, how about realigning;
this will make change easier and will help you achieve your goal. Changing
your environment to more conducive surroundings with helpful people,
businesses or friends can help make the change an easier one. For example,
if you want to learn a new language, it’s much easier when you surround
yourself with others who speak that new language.
Here are a few environmental questions to help decide the right
environment choices for you:

• When do you work and feel the best?

• Where are the environments where you excel?
• What time of day are you most successful?

The answers to these questions will help place you in the right environment.
Behavior
For the sake of NLP, behavior is not only your observable actions, but also
the way you feel about those actions. How you feel about your behavior is
generally the driving force behind the action, inspiring it again and again. It
may well be the purpose that drives your behavior. Until you understand
that, you may have a difficult time changing your behavior.
Determining whether or not your behavior is in line with goals is sometimes
difficult, but here are a few questions that can help.

• Are your actions consistent with your goals?

• Are your behaviors positive, and do they keep you happy?
• Is there a pattern in your behavior? If so, is it consistent with your
goals?
• What do you notice about others; are there patterns?
• Does your body language change in different situations? Note the
differences.

Maximizing positive behavior is important when on the achieving path,

whether the behavior is eating a salad at dinner, or practicing mirroring and
matching. For a while, it’s a conscious effort to maximize the right
behaviors. After a while, it becomes old hat. On the flip side of that, you’ll
want to decrease bad behavior by eliminating it.
Capabilities
The human mind is a learning machine. There’s no doubt that some people
have skills or talents that are inborn, but that’s not true for every skill. Some
people seem more “capable” than others, and oftentimes others mistakenly
think that capability is based on intelligence. Most researchers and business
owners now realize that the best employees are those who are team-oriented
and have a positive attitude.
Those who look at new challenges or change with a positive spirit can
acquire new skills and capabilities. Just like you learn to ride a bike or ski,
you can learn new talents throughout your life if you have the desire and
right attitude. NLP looks to the learning and acquiring of new skills, but the
core theory is based on the fact that all skills are learnable. The core theory
of NLP is the belief that individuals can learn by watching others and
modeling their behavior on the positive influence of others.
Asking yourself the following questions can help you get an idea of your
capabilities and help you better understand where you can make
improvements.

• Think back and ask yourself about a skill that you learned at a
previous time. Thinking about the events, happenings and situation that lead
to the positive learning of this skill can help you recognize the pattern to
make it happen again.
• What are you good at? What do others comment and compliment
you on? Recognizing the patterns and behaviors around these questions can
help you focus attention, leading you to succeed again.

Beliefs & Values

Beliefs and values drive people to either achieve their goals or be lost in
trying. The way we feel about something, especially one of our goals,
motivates us to continue on. Seeking out a goal is not always easy and,
since success does not come overnight, this motivation is imperative.
Our beliefs not only keep us moving toward the end result, but also help us
rank our goals and wants. If there are two important things on the agenda,
we have to rank them and make a decision as to which to do first. Most
people will move toward the goal or “thing” that has the highest price tag.
For example, we may get great recognition for playing a round of golf, but
if we fail to go to work, the money is shut off.
Beliefs also keep us in the place or environment where we need to be. If our
goal is to get into shape, then our goal is best achievable in the gym or
fitness area. Our belief is that fitness is associated with the gym, but that the
place to get fit and in shape is not at the ice cream parlor.
In the logical levels, our beliefs and values drive the lower levels, allowing
for all of the levels to come into alignment. If you’re concerned that there
may be a conflict between the levels, here are questions to help make a
determination.

• What is important to you and why?

• What is important to others?
• What do you believe to be right from wrong?

Identity
Many think that a person’s identity is based on skills, intelligence or their
behavior. NLP looks at the identity of the person as separate from their
behavior. Instead of lumping people into a category based on their actions,
NLP sees behavior as a consequence of an underlying motive. This belief is
an optimistic view of mankind and avoids attaching labels to people based
on their behavior.
Now this does not sound like a major theory, but it is, because we say a
great deal about our expectations of others in the way we speak to them. If
we speak to someone about bad behavior and attach it to their identity,
we’re sending them the message that their character is flawed. We need to
speak about the behavior and avoid negative affect to the identity level of
the individual.
Here are questions to answer if there is conflict surrounding identity.

• How do you express yourself?

• How do you feel about yourself?
• How do others feel about you?
• Do you label others?
• Do others have an accurate picture of who you really are?

Purpose
The purpose or reason behind change is the reason for which people
journey onward to their goal. For some people, their purpose is larger than
their identity, so they achieve great things. Sometimes a person will journey
through life questioning his purpose in life, even though it’s right in front of
him. Those people are looking too hard!
Through hard times and great suffering, there have been individuals that
have persevered because their passion was the greatest force in their life.
Look at the Dalai Lama, and the suffering he endured and resistance he met.
His passion was definitely a driving force…some might say the only force.
A passion for something will generally keep an individual on track for
much longer than normal. People will endure great things when they feel
strongly about something. Finding a passion or purpose will guide people
toward their goals regardless of the conflict or troubles they cross during
their journey.
Answering the following questions will help with your purpose.

• What are you here on Earth for?

• How do you want people to remember you when you die?
• What strengths can you use to contribute to a higher good?

Recognizing Other Peoples Logical Levels

Of course, this section wouldn’t be complete without discussing how you

can use logical levels when you interact with others.
By recognizing other people’s comments you can determine their logical
levels and/or conflict. Being able to determine the level of the individual
will enable you to help them make the necessary changes (or influence
them to make the changes you desire). To recognize another’s logical
levels, you need to understand that it’s not always what they say, but where
the emphasis is placed in the sentence. Here are some statements and
evaluations:

I can’t do it here. Statement about identity.

I can’t do it here. Statement about beliefs.
I can’t do it here. Statement about capability.
I can’t do it here. Statement about behavior.
I can’t do it here. Statement about environment.
Chapter 11
Calibration

Subconscious Communication, Level 1

To understand and communicate with another person’s subconscious mind,

it’s necessary to review basic rapport and look a little more deeply at how
the human mind, in theory, works. Once you’ve understood this, you can
begin to see how successful people are able to bypass the critical factors of
the mind.
The first thing you need to do to sharpen your skills is to learn how to focus
on your target’s communication style. You need to learn how to calibrate
your target, or anyone with whom you are communicating. We’ve discussed
communication styles, but now let’s put it to practical application.
Here’s a story that will illustrate calibration and rapport skills:

I was on my way from Chicago to Newark on Memorial Day one year to

speak at a conference, when an opportunity to sharpen my communication
skills came my way. I got to the airport to find that I had missed my plane.
Now, I do recollect that it was totally my fault. When I got the tickets, I had
not checked the timings closely. I thought the plane was scheduled to leave
at 1:11; when I got to the gate, I discovered—to my horror—that the plane
had already left…at 11:11! Surprised, I checked the ticket. To my dismay,
the ETD indicated on my ticket, though in light print, was indeed the
correct time, namely, 11:11. I had misread it.
I went to the ticket counter and found a long line, due to some weather
problems; I fell in line and started thinking of how to get to the conference.
My first reaction was to go on the offensive and point out the light printing.
In fact, I was taking my self-anger and was externally focusing it on the
situation. As the line got closer to the front, I could see the anger that the
airline agents were being subjected to. Naturally, they were very defensive.
I realized that I needed another strategy to get my goal of getting to the
conference without paying a huge amount. Right before I got to the front, I
overheard that all the flights on that airline were full.
When it was my turn to approach the counter, I took a deep breath and
walked up. I looked the agent in the eye. I saw she was tired and worn out. I
slumped my shoulders and appeared tired, too.
“Looks like you’re having a rough day,” I said very tiredly.
“You would not believe it,” she said ruefully.
I looked at the line as she did, saying, “Yeah, but do you work this
weekend?”
“No, a couple of hours and I am out of here for the holiday.”
“Well, keep that picture in your mind, and it may help you get
through the rest of the day. Got any special plans?” I asked after a split-
second pause, trying to get her to pull out of the situation and get into a
better mood. I added energy to my speech and pulled my shoulders back.
“Yeah, I can’t wait!” she smiled for the first time.
“Well I hate to admit this, but I really screwed up.” I took out my
ticket. “I hate to show you how silly I was (I paused)—did you ever make a
stupid mistake?” I asked, hoping she would want to help.
“Oh, all the time! Let me see—I bet I have fouled up worse,” she
said as she took my ticket.
“Keep thinking of this weekend,” I said as I handed her the ticket,
anchoring a positive.
“So you misread the ticket?” she asked.
“Yeah, it was silly,” I replied.
“Well it was hard to read—and all our flights are full,” she replied.
“I was going to a conference this weekend, where I was to speak to
a group of therapists and hypnotists. I guess I will miss it. Well, you keep
thinking of this weekend with your family,” I said, exhaling and looking
down, going back to being tired.
“Sounds interesting. Let’s see what we can do,” she replied in an
upbeat mood.
She spent a couple of minutes at her computer; then looking up she
said brightly, “Get to the next terminal; I got you on a business flight on
another airline! Hurry, and have a good time!” She smiled as she handed me
the new ticket. “Enjoy your conference” was her last comment.
“You keep your eyes on the weekend!” I said as I left the counter.
By pacing and calibrating to the ticket agent’s state, I was able to
establish a rapport with her and lead her into a better state, a state in which I
was able get her to want to help me.
You experience the world by collecting information through your five
senses and processing it internally. The five primary senses are visual,
auditory, kinesthetic, gustatory (taste), and olfactory (smell). As your brain
processes input from your five senses, that input is translated into
corresponding internal representations, or maps, that create a likeness of the
real world.
So through your eyes, ears, and sense of touch, taste, and smell, you make
contact with the world, what is called reality. However, it isn’t so much
what is out there; it’s the things you see, hear, touch, taste and smell which
fill your everyday experience. It is the maps of reality inside your head—
your beliefs, values and biases; experiences of the past; dreams, hopes,
fears and expectations of the future; and immediate, short-term and long-
term wants and needs—which fill your thoughts and feelings and are the
major portion of the reality to which you respond. The same is true for each
person you encounter.
What is important to remember is that your perceptions and “realities” are
different from those of someone else because your central nervous system
selectively “filters” the information as it is received by your brain.
Consider for instance, a news item—have you ever watched the news and
heard several eyewitness accounts of a plane crash? If you had, you
probably noticed that the accounts differed in subtle ways. One person starts
off by describing the noise of the aircraft as it crashed. Another person talks
about the sight of the plane hitting the ground and bursting into flames. Still
another person describes the sick feeling that came over them when they
realized the plane was going to crash.
Every minute of the day, your representational systems are bombarded with
an incredible amount of information. Your central nervous system
selectively sifts through this information, allowing only a portion of it to
reach your conscious mind. These filtering processes are called deletion,
distortion and generalization. Without these filters, you would be engulfed
by the incessant stream of information.
Each person has his or her own unique perception of the world. Your
family, friends, coworkers, neighbors, and colleagues view the world
through a different set of filters than you do. What you say, what you think,
and what you do may mean something totally different to them than it does
to you.
Your representational systems influence your thinking and, over time, you
gradually develop preferences in the way you use them. As we talked about
in a previous chapter, the three primary representational systems are visual,
auditory, and kinesthetic. The olfactory (smell) and gustatory (taste)
systems are usually used as triggers to the other systems.
Most people will use one system more than the other two, with the result
that the preferred system is the one with which fine distinctions are made.
For instance, people who are influenced more by what they see are said to
be visual. Other people rely more on what they hear, and they are said to be
auditory. For yet others, their favorite method of focusing is through
feelings and sensations, and they are known as kinesthetic.
Those people with a preference for the visual representational system think
primarily in pictures. If you asked them, “Do you know John?” they would
very likely reply, “Is he the tall man with the thin moustache who drives
that dark blue Mustang?” instead of mentioning his accent or how they feel
about him. Their visual descriptions will be more detailed than those of an
auditory or kinesthetic person.
By contrast, auditory people will tend to make finer distinctions in sound
than in images or feelings. After a presentation, they will often remember
the exact words that a person used, but might not be able to recall as
quickly the color of the speaker’s dress or how they felt during the
presentation. They would be more likely to remember that John had a
Southern drawl. Auditory people can be easily distracted by background
noise and often prefer to work in places where they have a soothing
background.
People who prefer the kinesthetic system rely heavily on their feelings of
experience. They would rather “get a feel” for something than look at a
picture or hear about it. They would tell you that John is thick-skinned, but
also has his head on his shoulders. Kinesthetics generally make good
counselors and negotiators, because they can be extremely sensitive to other
people’s feelings.
Although most people have a preferred representational system, it does not
mean that our other senses or representational systems are dormant. Rather,
we use the other senses to complement what our preferred representational
system communicates to us. In this way, we get a more complete picture of
what is going on around us.
When you know what a person’s modality is, you will know one of the most
important aspects of their personality…how they perceive the world around
them. This is a major factor in communication; it is a basic way in which
some people are alike and others different.
A person’s preferred representational system is often expressed in their
choice of words. A visual person will “see the potential” of a new strategy
or idea, while an auditory person will “like the way that sounds” and a
kinesthetic person will tell you, “I’ve got a good feeling about that.” By
paying close attention to your customers’ words, you can determine how
they structure their thoughts. You won’t be able to tell what they are
thinking (this is not a mind-reading course!), but you can tell “how” they
are thinking.
Recognizing changes in another person’s state and noticing specific
conditions of body posture, breathing, vocal qualities and movement is
called calibration. A person’s state is constantly changing, although
sometimes the change can be as subtle as an increase in their breathing rate.
At other times, the change in state is obvious—a baby who was crying
suddenly has a smile on its face.
Calibration is a useful tool because it requires you to step outside yourself
and direct your attention to the people around you. When you do that, you
can identify consciously the physiological communication that is usually
taken in and processed on an unconscious level. For instance, can you
remember when you were a child and your mother would get angry with
you? Sometimes she didn’t even have to say anything. She would get that
look in her eye, and her lips would press tightly together as if she didn’t
trust herself to speak. When she put her hands on her hips and squared her
shoulders, then you knew you were in real trouble.
By effectively calibrating nonverbal behavior, you can begin to understand
human thinking and behavior. You can do this by directing your conscious
efforts to seeing, hearing and sensing the other person’s internal
representations through their external manifestation of it. What you’re
actually doing is noting the other person’s behavioral manifestations of
internal representations (“BMIRs”). This is one of the most obvious mental
access points, or MAPs. For instance, if I know that you are making
pictures internally (visual), then I can establish deep rapport with you by
entering your world using visual language. Or, if I know that you are
talking to yourself internally (auditory digital), my rapport-building
behavior will involve auditory language. Conversely, if I am aware that
your experience is centering on kinesthetic awareness, then my language
will be oriented toward touch and feelings.
The following information covers physiological clues you can look out for
to determine “how” your customer is thinking, rather than what the person
is thinking.

Body posture: People often assume systematic, habitual postures when deep
in thought and talking. These postures can indicate a great deal about the
sensory representational system the person is using. The following are some
typical examples:

• Visual: Leaning back with head and shoulders up or rounded. Chin

tends to be pointed up.

• Auditory: Body leaning forward, head cocked (as though listening),

shoulders back, arms folded.

• Kinesthetic: Head and shoulders down. Body leaning slightly to the

person’s right.

Exercise: Identifying Body Posture Cues

Political Interview
Watching a political interview on television is an excellent chance to
practice the skill of identifying body posture cues. These programs often
depict real people responding to questions subconsciously (as opposed to a
political debate, where the responses are often scripted). For this exercise,
you will practice identifying body posture cues by watching a political
interview show such as “Meet the Press” or “Politically Incorrect.”
First, I recommend that you tape the show, but don’t watch it while you are
taping it. Then, when you are ready to begin this exercise, rewind the tape
to the beginning.
Now you are ready to begin the exercise. Turn off the sound so that you will
be able to give your full attention to the nonverbal cues used by each
person. Observe the body posture of the host and guest at the beginning of
the show and describe it in the space provided below. As the show
progresses, note any changes you observe in body posture.
At the conclusion of the interview, look over your notes and write down
what you believe is the representational system of the guest and the host
based on your observations of their body posture. Then watch the interview
again, this time with the sound on. Did their words confirm the
representational system you selected? Why? Or why not?

Remember:

• Visual: Leaning back with head and shoulders up or rounded. Chin

tends to be pointed up.

• Auditory: Body leaning forward, head cocked (as though listening),

shoulders thrown back, arms folded.

• Kinesthetic: Head and shoulders down. Body leaning slightly to the

person’s right.

Beginning body posture, interviewer:

_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________

Beginning body posture, guest:

_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________

Changes in body posture, interviewer:

_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________

Changes in body posture, guest:

_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________

What is the interviewer’s preferred representational system, based on body

posture?
_____________________________________________________________

What is the guest’s preferred representational system, based on body

posture?
_____________________________________________________________

Accessing Cues: When people are thinking and speaking, they cue or
trigger certain types of sensory representations in a number of different
ways, including breathing rate, “grunts and groans,” facial expressions,
snapping their fingers, scratching their heads, and so on. Some of these are
unique to the individual and need to be noticed and “calibrated” to the
particular person performing the behaviors. Many of these cues, however,
are associated with particular sensory processes and can be generalized
across individuals.

The following are some typical examples:

• Visual: High (in the chest) shallow breathing, eyes squinting, voice
at higher pitch and faster tempo.

• Auditory: Diaphragmatic breathing, knitted brow, fluctuating voice

tone and tempo.

• Kinesthetic: Deep abdominal breathing, deep breathy voice in lower

tempo.

Exercise: Breathing, Tone and Tempo

Social Setting
The easiest way to master the skill of identifying breathing patterns is
practice, practice and more practice. For this exercise, you will observe the
breathing, vocal tone and tempo of people in a social setting. These may be
people you have just met or people you have known a long time. As you do
this, also note the situation. Can you identify their preferred
representational system based on their breathing, vocal tone and tempo?

Remember:

• Visual: High (in the chest), shallow breathing, eyes squinting, voice
at higher pitch and faster tempo.

• Auditory: Diaphragmatic breathing, knitted brow, fluctuating vocal

tone and tempo.

• Kinesthetic: Deep abdominal breathing, deep breathy voice in lower

tempo.

Name: _______________________________________________________

How long have you known this person? ____________________________

Describe the social setting:

_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________

What is their breathing, vocal tone and tempo?

_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________

What is their preferred representational system? ______________________

Gestures: People will often touch, point to, or use gestures indicating the
sensory organ which they are using. Some typical examples include:

• Visual: Touching or pointing to the eyes; gestures made at or above

eye level.

• Auditory: Pointing toward and gesturing near the ears; touching the
mouth or jaw. Stroking the chin thoughtfully.
• Kinesthetic: Touching the chest and stomach area; gestures made
below the neck.

Eye Movements: Automatic, unconscious eye movements usually

accompany a particular thought process, indicating that the person is
accessing one or more of the sensory representational systems. This theory
has not been proven, and there is some debate as to its foundation, but to
this author it appears to be useful in understanding the next level of
communications. While we covered this in more depth previously, it’s
worth a refresher to see how it fits into calibration.
When people are thinking and talking, they move their eyes in what are
known as eye-scanning or eye-accessing patterns. These movements appear
to be symptomatic of their attempts to gain access to internally stored or
internally generated information in their central nervous system. This
information is encoded in the speaker’s mind in one or more of the
representational systems. When a person “goes inside” to retrieve a memory
or to create a new thought, the person “makes pictures,” and/or “talks to
himself/herself,” and/or “has feelings and kinesthetic sensations.”
With a little bit of practice, eye-scanning patterns are easily observable
behavior. When you see people talking and thinking, you can notice their
eyes are constantly in motion, darting back and forth, up and down,
occasionally glancing at objects and people, but just as often “focused” on
inner experiences. As previously mentioned, these movements are
indicative of the way they are thinking. In the descriptions that we’ll be
discussing, “looking” refers to the movements of a person’s eyes in the
direction indicated. “Left” means toward the speaker’s left and “right”
means toward his or her right. It’s helpful to keep in mind that this
accessing behavior represents “looking” internally. That is, during the
moment of information retrieval, people are generally not conscious of
external visual stimuli. Rather, they are concentrating on internally stored or
generated images, sounds, words and feelings. Please notice, also, that the
words in parentheses in each category indicate the kind of information
being accessed.

Body Posture Exercises

Body Posture and Eye-Accessing Cues—Workplace
Combine the skills you have learned and observe the body posture and the
eye accessing cues of the people in your workplace. As you do this, note the
situation also. For instance, you might observe people in the course of a
company meeting, with a client, a chance meeting in the hall, etc. See if you
can determine their preferred representational system based on their body
posture. Then take note of their eye-movement cues. Do their eye-accessing
cues indicate the same preferred representational system? Which cues are
easier to identify? Why?

• Visual Body Posture Cues: Person leans back, with head and
shoulders up or rounded. There is also a tendency to hold the chin up.

• Visual Eye-Accessing Cues: Person looks up to their right or left or

may stare straight ahead, eyes unfocused.

• Auditory Body Posture Cues: Person leans forward, with the head
cocked (as though listening), shoulders back, and arms folded.

• Auditory Eye-Accessing Cues: Person looks sideways to the left or

right, or may look down to the left (internal dialogue).

• Kinesthetic Body Posture Cues: Person has their head and shoulders
down, with the body leaning slightly to the person’s right.

• Kinesthetic Eye-Accessing Cues: Person looks down and to the

right.

Name: ___________________________________________________

Job Description: _____________________________________________

Situation:
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
Body Posture Cues:
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________

Eye-Accessing Cues:
____________________________________________

Preferred Representational System: ________________________________

Did their body posture cues and their eye-accessing cues indicate the same
representational system? _______________________________________
_____________________________________________________________

Which cues were easier to identify? Why?

___________________________
_____________________________________________________________
__________________________________

Representational Systems

Seeing (Visual)
• Eyes: These people look up to their right or left, or their eyes may
appear unfocused.
• Gestures: Their gestures are quick and angular, and include
pointing.
• Breathing and speech: High, shallow and quick.
• Words: The words that capture their attention include: see, look,
imagine, perspective, reveal.
• Presentations: They prefer pictures, diagrams and movies.

Hearing (Auditory)
• Eyes: These people look down to the left and may appear “shifty-
eyed.”
• Gestures: Their gestures are rhythmic, touching one’s face (i.e.,
rubbing the chin).
• Breathing and speech: Midchest, rhythmic.
• Words: The words that capture their attention include: hear, listen,
ask, tell, clicks, in-tune.
• Presentations: They prefer lists, summaries, quotes, readings.

Feeling (Kinesthetic)
• Eyes: These people look down to the right.
• Gestures: Their gestures are rhythmic, touching chest.
• Breathing and speech: Deep, slow with pauses.
• Words: The words that capture their attention include: feel, touch,
grasp, catch on, contact.
• Presentations: They prefer hands-on, do-it demonstrations, test
drives.

Identifying Your Representational System

For each of the following questions, think about the person, place or object
described, and circle the first answer that comes to your mind. Check your
responses with the assessment key provided.

1. When you think of coffee, what comes to your mind first?

a. An image, e.g., a cup filled to the brim with rich, dark coffee
b. A sound, e.g., coffee dripping into the glass carafe
c. A touch, e.g., the warmth of the cup filled with coffee
d. A smell, e.g., the aroma of coffee as you lift the cup to your mouth
e. A taste, e.g., the rich taste as you take your first sip

2. When you think back to what you did on your last birthday, what is
the first thing you remember?
a. A taste, e.g., something you ate
b. A sound, e.g., a song you heard on the radio
c. A smell, e.g., of your environment
d. A touch, sensation or emotion
e. An image or picture, e.g., some place that you went

3. When you think about your favorite restaurant, what do you think of
first?
a. What you see, e.g., the décor, or the people you are with
b. An emotion or touch, e.g., how you felt when you were there
c. Something you hear, e.g., the conversation, the music
d. A taste, e.g., your favorite dish
e. A smell, e.g., the aroma from the kitchen

4. When you think of your childhood and the house that you grew up
in, which of these come to mind first?
a. A smell, e.g., mom baking cookies in the kitchen
b. A sound, e.g., conversation as the family gathered together
c. A taste, e.g., mom’s macaroni and cheese casserole
d. An emotion or touch, e.g., a feeling of security, or the smooth
wooden banister you held on to, as you came down the stairs
e. An image, e.g., the way to the house after the first snowfall

5. When you think about something humorous, what do you first think
about?
a. An emotion, e.g., someone tickling your feet
b. A sound, e.g., a joke you heard
c. An image, e.g., a favorite pet playing with a toy
d. A smell e. A taste

6. When you think about your workplace, what is the first thing that
you think about?
a. A touch or an emotion, e.g., how you feel about the work you do
b. A sound, e.g., of machinery or other people’s voices
c. A taste
d. A picture, e.g., what you do while at work
e. A smell, e.g., of the environment

7. When you think about something you do that is physically

challenging, what do you think about first?
a. A sound or a conversation you have with yourself
b. A touch or an emotion
c. An image or a picture
d. A taste
e. A smell
8. When you think about your closest family member (spouse, mother,
father, sister, brother), what do you think about first?
a. An image, e.g., what they looked like the last time you saw them
b. A smell, e.g., the favorite cologne or perfume they like to wear
c. A sound, e.g., their voice
d. An emotion, e.g., you feelings for them
e. A taste, e.g., a meal you shared together

9. When you think about your favorite thing to do on the weekend,

what comes to your mind first?
a. A taste, e.g., a favorite food, like barbecued ribs
b. A sound associated with doing this, e.g., the sharp crack of a
baseball bat connecting with a ball
c. An emotion or touch, e.g., how you feel when you think of spending
your time this way
d. A smell from the environment, e.g., the flowers at your favorite park
e. An image, e.g., who you would do this with or where you would be

10. When you think about a major disappointment in your life (e.g., a
promotion or job you didn’t get or a test you failed), what do you think of
first?
a. A taste
b. A touch, e.g., the feel of something, or emotion, e.g., what you felt
when you heard the news
c. An image or picture, e.g., where you were
d. A sound, e.g., what you heard or what you said to yourself
e. A smell

11. When you think about something physical that you don’t like to do,
e.g., taking out the garbage or weeding the garden, what comes to mind
first?
a. A touch, e.g., the feel of the weed as you pull it from the ground, or
an emotion, e.g., how you feel about doing this task
b. A taste
c. A smell, e.g., the smell of the garbage as you carry it to the trash can
d. An image, e.g., the weeds against the dark earth
e. A sound, e.g., the cricket’s chirping near the garden or the rustle of
the garbage bag?

12. When you think about taking a vacation in the Bahamas, what do
you think of first?
a. A sound, e.g., the laughter of children as they play in the surf
b. An image, e.g., palm trees swaying in the breeze against a brilliant
blue sky
c. A smell, e.g., the salty air from the ocean
d. A taste, e.g., a cool, refreshing drink
e. A touch, e.g., the feel of the warm sun as you relax on the hotel deck

Visual Auditory Kinesthetic Olfactory

(Smell) Gustatory
(Taste)
1 A B C D E
2 E B D C A
3 A C B E D
4 E B D A C
5 C B A D E
6 D B A E C
7 C A B E D
8 A C D B E
9 E B C D A
10 C D B E A
11 D E A C B
12 B A E C D
Total

Circle the letter that corresponds to your choice for each question. Add up
the total number of letters circled in each column. These totals are an
indication of your preferred representational system. The column with the
highest score is most likely your preferred representational system.
Note: You will need to focus on the representational systems that you are
the weakest in. Pick the one you used the least and for the next few days use
those words as much as possible. Then go to the second weakest. This will
build in added flexibility in you communication. It will also allow you to
cross-reference much easier.
Each representational system has sensory-based words called predicates
(verbs, adverbs and adjectives). This is useful because sometimes your
initial contact with someone will be over the phone. To determine their
preferred representational system, listen to the words they select and notice
which predicates are used most often. Once you become familiar with the
language of the different modalities, you can then choose words that will
literally “make more sense” to the people with whom you want to develop
rapport.

Exercise: Building Self-Confidence

This is a way to respond to criticism and stay resourceful, whether it is at

home, at work, or with friends. It enables you to use criticism as feedback
to improve your relationships.

1. See yourself in front of you. That self in front of you is going to

learn a new approach to criticism while you watch from the outside. Do
whatever you need to do to feel detached from that self. You can see that
self farther away, in black-and-white, or behind Plexiglas, etc.

2. Watch and listen as that self gets criticized and instantly dissociates.
There are several ways that self can dissociate. He/she can surround
him/herself with a Plexiglas shield when he/she is criticized. Or, that self
can see the words of criticism printed within a cartoon balloon (like the
comic strips), etc. That self uses one of these methods to keep feeling
neutral or resourceful.

3. Watch as that self makes a slide or movie of what the criticizer is

saying. What does the person mean? Does that self have enough
information to make a clear, detailed picture? If the answer is “no,” gather
information. If the answer is “yes,” proceed to the next step.

4. Have that self decide on a response. For example, that self can agree
with any part of the criticism you agree with. Or that self could apologize,
saying, “I’ll give it some serious thought,” or “I see things differently now,”
and so forth.

5. Does that self want the information you got from this criticism to act
differently next time? If so, have that self select a new behavior. That self
will then imagine using the new behavior in detail in the future. Next, that
self can step into this movie of using the new behavior to feel what it will
be like.

6. Having watched that self go through this entire strategy, do you

want this for yourself? If the answer is “no,” ask inside how you modify
this strategy so it fits you. If the answer is “yes,” continue.

7. Thank that self for being a special resource to you in learning this
strategy. Now pull that self into you, feeling him/her fill you, so that this
knowledge becomes fully integrated into you.

Story: The Eagle

I am reminded of a couple of stories about Native Americans.

In the first, a young man was talking to the Medicine Man, kind of the
spiritual warrior of the Hopi tribe, the oldest tribe in the U.S. He asked the
Medicine Man how he always made good decisions. The Medicine Man
replied:

Like most people I seem to have two dogs in me: a White dog that wants to
do good things and a Black dog that wants to do bad things. Which one
wins?
The one I feed the most.

Native Americans also have a reverence for eagles. That is true across all
the tribes.
At one time, there were eagles all over the United States, from the Florida
Keys up to Alaska. They are coming back. Of course, Native Americans
called many birds “eagles.”
The turkey was the Earth Eagle, because they could use almost every part
of the turkey. It was grounded but it gave them life. They called the owl the
Night Eagle, because he could see at night. (Wouldn’t it be nice to see
things that other people can’t see?)
They had several different types of eagles that represented power, grace,
freedom, discipline, and integrity, because it doesn’t kill maliciously and
just seemed “above it all.”
The eagle just watches and keeps an eye on things. That’s why it was a
matter of pride to find and wear an eagle feather.
Most tribes shared certain things in common. When they went through
changes in life, they would change their names.
You were given a birth name, but once you came of age, you picked your
own name—you were your own person; you changed.
They would also change their name again when they were going through
major changes in life. If their spouse died, they changed their name. If they
won or lost a battle, they would change their name.
Maybe we can’t change our names, but we can change the language we use
with ourselves.
Here’s another story:

I had a friend who was a farmer, and one day he was walking past his
chickens. He glanced at them and saw there was one that was ugly, a butt-
ugly chicken. Every time he looked at it, it got bigger and uglier.
One day he noticed that it was a lot bigger than the rest. A friend of his who
happened to walk by noticed the ugly chicken and said, “Hey, man! How
did you get an eagle in there? That’s not a chicken, that’s an eagle!” It acted
like a chicken, but was really an eagle.
He let this eagle, who thought he was a chicken, grow. The eagle felt rather
restricted, for he was now bigger; he was overpowering. Slowly, he began
to feel different from the others. He had different drives and urges. Finally,
he said to one of his friends, after a mouse walked by, “Don’t you ever just
want to get one of those, rip one apart, and eat it?” The chickens were upset
and said, “You cannibal!” He talked with one of the older chickens, and
they didn’t know what he should do.
The farmer took the eagle and put him up in the loft of the barn and left him
there for the day. The eagle began noticing that he could really see a lot of
things from up here—he saw a rabbit hopping around about a quarter mile
away, birds flying, etc. After a while he began to get hungry. Even the corn
started to look good because the hungrier you get, the better things looked.
He didn’t know what to do. He got pretty hungry and couldn’t stand it
anymore. Some of our mothers used to say, if you get hungry enough, it will
move you to action!
So he took a deep breath and said, “You know, I am going to jump down
there and eat; if the fall kills me, at least it is over. If I have to stay up here
and starve to death, I may as well do something.” So he closed his eyes,
took a deep breath, and I don’t know if eagles have knees, but he bent his
legs and he jumped!
The moment he did, nature took over and he spread his wings. As his wings
shot out–that six-foot wingspan–a breeze caught him, and he began to soar.
He opened his eyes for a moment, and it scared the hell out of him. All of a
sudden, he looked down and he was two hundred feet in the air, and he
didn’t even know how he did it.
Because he took that little act of faith of just closing his eyes and jumping,
there he was, flying around, and he didn’t know what to do! Then he found
he could do some stuff; he flapped his wings and it made him go higher. He
could tilt his wings like a jet and cut this way and cut that way. Innately, his
brain and instincts took over. He was having fun.
After a while, he saw a rabbit; he thought about it. He thought about the
corn in the barnyard, eyed the rabbit, thought about the corn, the rabbit, the
corn, dipped his wings, and ate the rabbit. The minute he finished, he
realized it was the best meal he had ever had; it was the way he was meant
to eat, like a king. He felt guilty. He was trained to do what chickens
normally did, not to do this.
He flew back to the barnyard; he circled around, and the other chickens ran
and hid. The other chickens realized who he was and started to ignore him
the way they always did. The eagle got upset and went to one of the old
roosters, a kind of mentor to the chickens.
The rooster, for the first time, gave him some good advice. He said, “Maybe
you are just different, not good or bad, just different.
“You look different, you act different. Sometimes it takes more courage to
leave what you have always known. You know you shouldn’t be here, so
whatever choice you make is going to be rough.”
He left and saw another large bird flying. He dipped his eagle wings and
realized he could really move. The other bird was a hawk. The hawk was
afraid at first because eagles eat hawks; eagles own the sky. The hawk
feared the eagle at first, but the eagle just wanted to talk.
The eagle said, “I am just a big chicken flying around here.”
The hawk said, “Chicken, you are an eagle. It’s your sky—you can do
whatever you want! It’s your call!”
The eagle said, “But I live on the ground.”
The hawk answered, “No, you don’t. You are supposed to live in the trees
and the air.”
Somebody had to point it out. So the eagle left, and he landed in the trees
and began to do things that came quite naturally to him. Within no time he
learned to hunt, dive and fish. One day he saw another eagle flying by, and
he felt some stirrings inside. It was a girl eagle. They paired off and began
to talk and she was fascinated by his background.
He took her to the barnyard. She said, “It’s interesting down here! But I
really don’t like the smell; I don’t like the people either! Other than that I
guess it’s all right.”
He turned out to be quite an asset to the other eagles because he brought a
different perspective they never had. He brought a chicken’s view of the
world to them. He showed them that maybe they had a gift, a gift that
maybe they didn’t even know they had up there, that he could see because
he had to climb up through the ranks, so to speak.

Joe versus the Volcano

In the movie Joe versus the Volcano, there is a scene in which they are out
in the middle of the ocean, after the boat has sunk, when they are on the
water by themselves. If any of you have been out on the ocean at night,
when the moon comes up, it is an interesting experience. It’s huge; it’s
gigantic. In the movie, Joe looks at the moon and remembers his life; he
thinks he’s going to die from exposure. He stands there and he looks up to
the moon and says, “God, whom I do not understand, thank you for my
life.”
Think for a moment of one of my idols, Jedi knight Anakin Skywalker. If
you have a passion, it will literally move the universe. You can shift people
beyond their wildest dreams. Whether this happens one person at a time, a
small group at a time, a nation at a time or to the whole universe at a time, it
will happen.
Back to Joe versus the Volcano. The power of the movie lies in the fact that
Joe only has the guts to live when he knows he’s going to die. That takes
some courage. Joe versus the Volcano is about hope, about reaching beyond
yourself. If we realize that we are all mortal, we better begin to think about
what is it we want to do. What is your passion, your purpose, your mission?
And what I ask is:
If you can have just a little bit of that kind of gratitude for some of the
talents, tools, and abilities you have been given—and you have all these
different talents, tools, and abilities—you can really move the world.
Sometimes, though, it’s hard to take that in and have the “gratitude in your
attitude,” so to speak. It’s difficult just to be thankful for your life.
Mind Control is perhaps one of the least explored sciences in the world.
Many people think that it’s just not possible. I’m here to prove that it is,
indeed, very possible. You don’t have to be a wizard or a sorcerer, or even a
psychologist; all you need to do is read this book till you have mastered all
the ideas and techniques described. After all, it’s not very difficult, is it? So,
here’s wishing you all success as you go around exercising your power over
others.
Have you ever felt that, like the eagle in the hay loft, it was time to close
your eyes and take that leap? It can be a very scary thing. I encourage you
to spread your wings now and take that leap of faith. What you’re about to
do just may be the hardest thing you ever have to do. It can be
overwhelming. Usually, nature takes over and takes care of itself. Like Joe,
like the chicken-turned-eagle, it’s time for you to start living!

Credit and References:

Robert Dilts, Steve Andreas, Richard Bandler, John Grinder, Todd Epstein,
Roger Ellerton.
Chapter 12
Reframing for Change!

Reframing can be one of the most powerful tools that you have to open up
new levels of communication, or it can make you seem like a pushy
manipulator who uses word games to swindle people. One of the bad raps
about NLP comes from misuse of reframing.
So what is reframing? It is a way to use language to reset in someone’s
mind an event, belief, or feeling. To see, hear, or feel differently about it.
Changing the frame of reference is called “reframing” in NLP. The purpose
of reframing is to help a person experience their actions—the impact of
their beliefs, behaviors, and feelings—from a different perspective (frame),
and to potentially be more resourceful or have more choice in how they
react.
An event, belief, feeling, has no meaning on its own. It just is. People give
it meaning according to their beliefs, values, preoccupations, like and
dislikes.
During the 1984 campaign, there was considerable concern about Ronald
Reagan’s age. Speaking during the presidential debate with Walter
Mondale, Reagan said “I will not make age an issue of this campaign. I am
not going to exploit, for political purposes, my opponent's youth and
inexperience.” Reagan’s age was not an issue for the remainder of the
campaign!
Reframing means changing the way you perceive an event and, so doing,
changing the meaning. When the meaning changes, the response and
behavior changes also.
There are 5 things you must know to have reframing be effective.
Unfortunately, these are often overlooked by NLP practitioners, because
they focus too much on the technique and being slick, and not enough on
the Big Five.

RAPPORT, you must be in Rapport or your reframe will come across as

interfering and pushy.
Understanding of how the techniques work, not just theory, but
understanding on a deeper level of what is happening in your target’s mind.

Correct information, because a reframe before you have all the information
leads to technique interrupt, which, well…it make you look impudent.

Permission to offer it.

Reframes are natural if done right.

Then and only then will reframe do what it is suppose to do. Now here’s the
big secret of reframing: it’s not a complete technique by itself! That’s right,
I said it. It will not, in and of itself, accomplish a complete change in
someone. (I do not believe stories where a one-line reframe totally shifted a
person).
Reframe techniques are only meant to “open the doorway” to a person’s
mind. It gives a glimpse of other possibilities. You can use this momentary
opening, with your rapport skills and correct information, to lead the person
in another direction.
In other words, the meaning of an experience is dependent on the context,
or on the content.
One of the great reframes of all times comes from Thomas Edison, and it is
still used to this day to reframe the idea of failure. When it was pointed out
that it took 1,000 (or 10,000 according to which story one hears) attempts to
successfully get the electric light bulb to work, a reporter asked him how he
felt about the 1,000 failures. Edison replied, “We did not fail, we found
1,000 ways that did not work”.
Of course, in NLP and hypnosis, we often quote Milton Erickson. When
asked about his failures with clients, he reframed it as, “There is no failure,
only feedback; always be willing to try something else.”
Then there is a story about the first president of IBM. A young worker had
made a mistake that lost IBM $1 million in business. She was called in to
the president’s office and as she walked in said, “Well, I guess you have
called me here to fire me.” “Fire you?” the president replied, “Why would I
fire you? I just spent $1 million on your education! That is an MBA in real
world experience.”
There are two types of reframing:
• content reframing
• context reframing

Context Reframing

Question:
Almost all behaviors are useful in some context. A context reframe can be
used to see that the behavior itself can be useful.
In what context would this behavior have value?

Example:
My partner is too stubborn.
Reframe: I bet your partner has the tenacity to stand by you in tough times.

My partner works all time.

Reframe: I bet you will be thanking your partner when you get your dream
home.

Content Reframing

The meaning or content of any situation is determined by what you choose

to focus on; this will give its meaning to you. By reframing that, it changes
its meaning.

Questions:
What else could this mean?
In what way, could this be positive or a resource?

Example:
Saying mean things means you’re a bad person.
Reframe: I may be the only one that cares enough to say those things you
need to hear.

Your being late means you don’t care about me.

Reframe: Most people judge caring on being sensitive to another’s feelings,
not their awareness of time.
What is the positive value in this behavior? The positive value could be
related to the target’s behavior (as above). A possible reframe might be:
‘Isn’t it great that you know your boundaries and are not prepared to allow
someone to violate them?’

Applications of Reframing

• Negative beliefs
• Negative events
• Negative behavior

Reframing is going on all around us. Politicians are masters at reframing.

The whole idea of a positive spin is reframing. Listen to a conservative talk
show, then switch to a liberal (if you can find one) and listen to the same
story. Talk about reframes!
Fairy tales and children’s stories use reframes to open up a child’s model of
the world or get them to see different perspectives. They can also teach
consequences, such as in Chicken Little (the sky is falling!) and The Boy
Who Cried Wolf.
Inside the world of reframing, there are levels one can look at. Several years
ago, I went to a training on Sleight of Mouth patterns, which uses reframing
at its core. I came away and developed the Dandy Dozen, which gives some
overview of this skill set. (Roberts Dilts wrote an excellent book on the
subject.)
Here are the Dandy Dozen with examples and levels of reframes:

Reality Strategy using Cause, Evidence:

Saying mean things means you’re a bad person.
How, specifically, do you know that it is bad or mean for me to say these
things? It is bad according to whom?

Your being late means you don’t care

How do you know that lateness and caring are equal?

Intent using Cause, Evidence:

Saying mean things means you’re a bad person.
My intention is not being mean but to teach you something about time.

Your being late means you don’t care

My intent was not to be late, but to finish my work so we would not be
interrupted once I got home.

Model of the World on Cause, Evidence:

Saying mean things means you’re a bad person.
It may be mean in your family, but in mine, that’s how we showed we
cared.

Your being late means you don’t care.

In your world, time is number one; in my world, I focus on finishing tasks,
so I can truly be with the person I am spending time with.

Apply to Self on Cause, Evidence:

Your being late means you don’t care
Now you tell me; I wish you cared enough to tell me this earlier!

Saying mean things means you’re a bad person.

That is a pretty mean to say to me.

Change Frame Context, Size:

Saying mean things means you’re a bad person.
It might look bad now, but when you see the whole picture, you’ll
understand. (This is what you see the government and politicians use, “If
you had access to the information, I had (or intelligence) then you would
understand.”)

Your being late means you don’t care

Better to arrive late, than never!

Counter Example:
Saying mean things means you’re a bad person.
Do you think one can be a bad person and not say mean things?
Your being late means you don’t care
Is it possible to be late and still care, have you been late, did you care?

Redefine Cause, Evidence :

Saying mean things means you’re a bad person.
I am not being mean; I am expressing my point of view, stating the facts as
I see them.

Your being late means you don’t care

I am not late, I was delayed.

Chunk Size on Cause, Effect:

Saying mean things means you’re a bad person.
So one bad day, one mean thing said, and one is doomed to being bad or
evil forever?

Your being late means you don’t care

Our whole relationship is based on me being on time?

Redefine Beliefs:
Saying mean things means you’re a bad person.
I am not bad, I am just not as sensitive as you. I am more flexible.

Your being late means you don’t care

I show my caring differently than you.

Chunk Down:
Saying mean things means you’re a bad person
Bad how, specifically? According to whom, specifically? Which things,
exactly?

Your being late means you don’t care

How, specifically, does lateness mean not caring? Not care how,
specifically?

Consequence:
Saying mean things means you’re a bad person
I am only saying mean things to try to make them better in the long run.

Your being late means you don’t care

If I had not been late, I may have lost my job, as I had to finish a project,
and I care too much for you not to provide.

Apply to Self on Beliefs, Effects, Values:

Saying mean things means you’re a bad person
Did you ever notice only bad people tend to find the bad in others?

Your being late means you don’t care

A truly caring person should be able to overlook a little tardiness once in a
while.

In closing, one should always remember the basics—rapport, techniques,

information (outcome)—then you can pick this up.

Watch comics for true rapid reframes. A joke or funny story usually has a
reframe in it. I recently heard a comic tell this story:

Have you ever noticed that people are nicer in church, then change when
they leave? I went to church a couple of weeks ago and everyone was so
nice, but the church was packed so the parking was crazy. When I was
leaving, I accidentally cut a guy off, and boy did he get angry, called me
every name in the book, names that would make a sailor blush. He even
gave me the finger, boy how people change. I felt bad, so I said, “I am
sorry, Reverend.”

Or

I just read a study that said placebos work 33% as effectively as drugs.
Some doctors argue it’s all in the mind, that it is not a real effect, but I
wonder…if you overdose on placebos, do you only think your dead?

Once you’ve calibrated your target, have fun as you use these techniques to
reframe their opinions!
Chapter 13
The Fourth Key: Turning Your Fear into
Power and Controlling Your Internal State
It is now time to begin to take your skills to the real world. I want you to
use and master this technology, and for that you need to be able to control
your own internal state. After teaching this for years, I see how students
want to use this information, but fear overtakes them and they clam up. It’s
against this background that I’d like to introduce a technique that will have
you go out there and use your skills.
Imagine this scenario. You are a student of mind control. You’re out and
about, and you see someone you want to meet. You review the rapport skills
in your head and you’re ready to approach your target. Then your stomach
tightens and you get feelings that you tell yourself you shouldn’t have, like
doubt and fear. It sort of feels like you’re a kid again! The fear overcomes
you. Your heart races and you have difficulty catching your breath. Your
hands tremble, your vision blurs, your hearing shuts off and your mind fills
with negative thoughts. You “naturally” interpret these sensations as fear.
Then, because you’ve studied mind-control techniques, you feel guilty and
then you begin to doubt yourself.
The same thing happens when you start to approach your boss about a raise;
you have the skills, and know your rapport skills are there, but you freeze.
Where is the Zen-like peace of a mind-control master? Where are the
techniques you’ve worked on? You ask yourself, “Why am I afraid? The
other person looks calm.”
You pray your skills will kick in, but will they?

Mind Training 101

To control your inner state, you must first be able to understand the
difference between the physical effects of an “adrenal push” and the
psychological state we label as fear, and make friends with both. They will
happen, but we can put them to good use.
Let’s look at the psychobiological stages of this state we call fear. To do
this, we must separate the physical responses from the psychological
interpretations of them.
This is the first step to overcoming them.
Fear is defined as a strong, often unpleasant, emotional and physical
response to real or PERCEIVED danger.

Physical
Adrenaline is a natural hormone secreted by the adrenal glands. This is
nature’s response to stressful environmental triggers. Its only job is to
prepare the body for action, fight or flight. It ought to be your ally. It comes
in four basic steps:
Pre-Event. There is a slow release of adrenaline. This state occurs often.
Many people refer to it as a stress reaction. You’re tense, slightly nervous
and on edge. If this state is prolonged, it can exhaust you. (This is why
high-stress jobs “burn” you out.) This state is intended to put you on alert,
both physically and mentally. It also releases neurotransmitters for
heightened mental focus. Fear of fear can increase this.
Event Rush or Adrenal Dump. This occurs rapidly and very intensely. It
happens when your adrenal glands “dump” large amounts of the hormone
into your system. This is to prepare you for major physical activity. Again,
fight or flight. The effects of adrenaline are varied, but it’s important to
remember that this state is the ultimate survival tool.
Adrenaline can cause:

• Tightening of the muscles in preparation for trauma.

• Visual exclusion. Narrowing of vision. This causes you to lose your
peripheral vision, creating tunnel vision.
• Auditory exclusion. You lose a high percentage of your hearing.
(It’s why you can’t hear the crowd noise during an athletic event.)
• Sped-up heart rate.
• Release of ATP to give extra physical strength, though it causes
rapid exhaustion. (It gives you the shakes!)
• Rapid cognitive activity. You get a load of thoughts flooding your
mind, usually negative; can make you feel overwhelmed.
• Increase in breathing.
Remember, none of these things, in and of themselves, is bad. They are,
therefore, not to be feared. They prepare your body for action. People who
channel this into productive use excel in tense/stressful situations. These are
the people who do better on rank tests and other events when most people
go down a notch.
In-Event Adrenaline. This is a second dump that increases the effects of the
above as well as:

• Blocks pain.
• Gives a secondary rush of energy.
• Creates extra negative thoughts—fighting doubts.

This state is intended to give you that “second wind,” extra physical
endurance, strength and power to finish an “event” (fight/flight, etc.). This
state explains why some people get better as a game (or fight) goes on. This
is why, in football, some athletes go out of their way to hit or get hit a few
times, to get into the flow of the game.
Post-Event Adrenaline Drip. After an event, the adrenal glands secrete
small amounts of adrenaline. This causes slightly higher physical tension
and leads to mentally repeating the event…reliving the fight. This state is
much like the first, and is intended to help your body readjust to the effects
of the stressful event. This leads to physical and mental exhaustion.
Now that you can understand that the physical states are intended to help
you, you can also see the importance of not labeling these as good or bad.
Just accept that these states are and then let the mind take over and channel
this extra energy from adrenaline to good use. Insight and knowledge are
only the first steps.

Moving Past Regret

Life is full of regret; from the time you broke your favorite toy to the time
you broke a loved-one’s heart to the time you lost your job, there’s always
something to regret. It’s something everyone faces during the course of a
lifetime. It’s simply unavoidable.
Moving past regret isn’t easy. Many people spend years of their lives and
thousands of dollars in counseling, only to end up heartbroken because they
don’t have the tools or knowledge necessary to move past hurts from the
past. Without the understanding or know-how to turn off the “regret
switch,” individuals become fearful of regret itself, and therefore hold
themselves back from life. Eventually, that tactic drains the life right out of
them.
There is hope, though. Here; we’ll expose the three levels of regret and the
fears that go along with them, and empower you to move past regret.

Three Levels of Regret Exposed

Everyone wants to live a fulfilled, successful and regret-free life. After all,
that’s the American dream. It’s impossible to succeed financially, physically
or emotionally while staring down the face of regret, but you can change
that. Understanding how regret takes hold and why people struggle will
help expose the root of regret.

Made to Look Foolish or Proven Wrong

No one wants to be wrong or look like a fool in front of others. It can be as
simple as making an innocent mistake or as big as losing a million-dollar
sale. While this is human nature, it actually holds people back and sets them
up for failure. Because they’re so intent on being right or not looking bad,
they hold back. They settle for less, turn away opportunities and eventually
regret their fear. There’s often safety in remaining quiet, in not pushing the
envelope or taking a chance to succeed, but the end result is that you stay
lost in your behavior, buried in the crowd of “average Joes.”

TIP: Admitting failure or a mistake is not easy, but sometimes it is less

expensive and agonizing than proving how right you are!

Could Of – Would Of – Should Of

How many times do people wish they would have invested, sold a stock,
bought a home or done something else that could have made them money or
led to success? Everyone has something they look back on and utter the
famous words, “I wish I would have…”
It’s difficult to be successful or happy when we work against ourselves. The
fear of making a mistake or doing something that you’ll regret conditions
you to believe that you’re better off not taking a chance. You doubt your
good judgment because you fear that, with one small imperfection, you may
stray from the all-important “norm.” The fear of regret then becomes a ball
and chain that leaves you insecure and without the confidence to move
forward into a life of freedom.

Bad Associations – the Cause & Affect Strangulation

Humans from every walk of life, educational background and socio
economic class fall prey to this “regret-seeking behavior.” For some reason,
most people choose to defy all odds because they have a “gut” feeling. They
feel they can beat the odds. While this sometimes works, most of the time it
lands individuals in hot water and leaves them regretting their actions. Then
that “could of, should of, would of” comes out, and they begin playing odds
that are even worse.
What makes people do that? Well, the human psyche is a complex structure
of information and design that’s too lengthy to detail, but it all boils down
to one simple phrase: Classical Conditioning. Those are fancy words, but
they speak of a very real behavior. Classical Conditioning can be a positive,
but it can also be a negative when we use it against ourselves. We’re taught
from the time we’re old enough to talk that following emotions, or that
“gut” feeling, will result in a positive outcome. After a while, we build
confidence in that “gut” feeling. It eventually gets the best of us.

TIP: Following a gut feeling is not always a detriment, but when all odds
are stacked against the decision, the individual should step back and re-
evaluate. For example, gambling odds and many other “statistically” sound
decisions are thrown to the wind to follow that feel-good gut feeling!

Back to Classical Conditioning for a moment: it’s human to associate one

action or behavior with another. This information isn’t always incorrect, but
when it’s carried over or bleeds into other areas of your life, it can be
problematic.
Take, for example, the association between foreigners and terrorists. With
the recent terrorist activity, the world is on guard, from the government
right down to the lonely old lady sitting on the park bench. Because fear is
heightened and people now associate Middle Eastern culture with terrorists,
there are tons of false reports. People walk around in fear. Airports, police
departments and other agencies have been observed “profiling,” or taking
extra precautions with anyone looking like they’re of Middle Eastern
descent. Is that bad? Well, it certainly could be, because not everyone from
the Middle East is a terrorist…not even close! So, the fact—some Middle
Easterners are terrorists—has become a harmful association, making people
believe all Middle Easterners are terrorists. See how associations can get
people in trouble?

TIP: If a salesperson makes one attempt at a sale, and then gives up when
the sale doesn’t go through, that salesperson will starve! One attempt…two
attempts…even three attempts don’t always signify another failure!

Taking No Chance Is Safe – Right?

Taking chances is a vital part of life and success, whether it’s in one’s social
life, financial circle, relationships or employment ventures. When we sit
and do nothing, it can feel good. It can even give us a little boost, because
we didn’t hear the word “no” or fail at anything. Regret tells you that if you
never try something, you will never fail to achieve it.
Unfortunately, while this may be a safe haven for the moment, it can turn
into a trap in the future. Years down the road, most people look back at their
sedentary—or “lack of doing”—attitude and regret what they have missed.
While it’s possible that a certain treatment program might not work for you,
it is ALWAYS a mistake to do nothing! That’s because clichés are
sometimes true: nothing ventured is nothing gained. By sitting idle, we end
up regretting years past. We still feel like failures because we didn’t take the
chance of success or happiness. That’s a dangerous place to be!

Regret’s Power

Cutting to the chase, it’s impossible to maneuver around regret when a

person doesn’t understand where “regret” gets its power. Where is it fueled,
where is it stored, and when is it strongest? While there is no single answer
for everyone, there are some very common links to the fuel of regret.
Most people find that they are at the height of regret when they’ve acted in
a manner that isn’t their normal or consistent self. When that behavior
causes them to fail, be embarrassed or have additional troubles, they find
themselves facing the root of regret. This feeling, and the comparisons you
make, then set you up for future failure because of your past associations.
Let’s take a simple example with which everyone can identify.

Example: You’re in a hurry to get home. You normally drive the speed limit
and obey the traffic laws, but today is an exception. You intentionally run a
red light and end up slamming into another car. All you can say when you
get a ticket is, “I never do that; my driving is always responsible.”

Though this example is not a life-altering change or regret factor, you can
use it to see how regret is fueled and how it can eat away at a person’s
psyche. This brings us to our next topic:

Are You a “Doer” or a “No-Doer”?

Most people, at some point in their lives, have been “doers.” They take the
chance when the opportunity arises and allow themselves to “step out of the
box,” per say. After a few failures or near failures, they begin pairing the
taking of the chance—not the actual problem or cause of the failure—with
the negative outcome. This causes them to become sedentary, not taking
that opportunity because they fear failure.
It all goes back to the Classical Conditioning that we talked about earlier.
Instead of weeding to the root of the cause, they simply begin believing that
every chance will result in a negative! Overcoming this conditioning is a
journey, but it’s a journey you can successfully complete. It’s a matter of
taking the time to realize that regret is a normal part of life, but that you
need to put it in a safe place rather than carry it through life full-time.
Turning a “no-doer” into a “doer” is an educational process of learning how
to put things in proper perspective rather than making faulty associations.
Becoming a “doer” instead of a “no-doer” is necessary if you ever want to
live the life you now only dream of.
So, what will you do now?
How to Channel Fear into Power

To learn to harness this process, the first step is to recognize that it is

normal.
This insight and knowledge opens the door, and now you can learn to
channel this wonderful, power-packed state to give you an edge in hostile
situations.
The first step is to find and identify the first feelings of “fear”—the pre-
event adrenaline release:

• How do you feel?

• Where do you feel it (Stomach, chest, shoulders, back, etc.)?
• How is your state of mind?

To do this exercise, think of something that makes you fearful

(confrontation with your boss, IRS audit, approaching that special someone,
etc.). Really relive it and notice the above sensations. Now label it and store
this information.

Develop a “Circle of Power or Excellence”

Think of a time you were at your very best. You were in control. You were
physically and mentally sharp. It could be a class you did well at, or a
sporting event, or a business deal. You were focused and sharp. Now
imagine a circle on the floor—and it is your “Circle of Excellence and
Power.”

• What color is it?

• Does it have a sound?
• What else do you notice?

Think of the event from above and step into your “Circle.” Breathe in
deeply. Breathe the “Circle” into you. Throw your shoulders back. Feel the
focus and power.
Repeat this twice.
Step out of the “Circle” and re-access the fearful state. As you begin to feel
the fear (adrenaline state), step into the circle and breathe in. Do this five
times.
This is true Fear into Power!
Search in vain for that old fearful state. As you start to access fear, you will
naturally go into a state of power.
Now that we have a basis for blocking the old fear response, you can take it
to the next level to excel. Once you are able to convert fear into power, you
can face, as Tsunetomo Yamamoto, an eighteenth-century samurai, once
said in his famous writing Hagakure (which translates to hidden among the
leaves):

“The realization of certain death should be renewed every morning.

“Each morning you must prepare yourself for every kind of death
with composure of mind. Imagine yourself broken by bows, guns, spears,
swords, carried off by floods, leaping into a huge fire, struck by lightning,
torn apart by earthquake, plunging from a cliff, as a disease-ridden corpse.”

It may sound morbid, but if you imagine your deepest fears--death,

humiliation, loss of pride, etc.—and step into power, you will be in a better
position to face whatever comes your way. You will start to develop the
heart of a warrior. You will be the type of person who is a master of their
own mind, which is the basis for mastering others.
People follow others who are confident and show little fear. This is what we
want in our leaders. Take this attitude and feeling with you as you master
and use these techniques.

WELCOME TO THE WORLD FEW HAVE BEEN EXPOSED TO, that is,
TRUE MIND CONTROL.

Twenty-One-Day Exercise

To really master these basic skills, you need to place the new thinking
patterns into your neurology…into your brain, thinking and habits.
Here’s an easy, fast way. Do the following exercises for the next 21 days,
and you’ll notice your skills grow and expand. Do follow the days in order;
they’re designed to build on each other.
After you’ve mastered these skills, you’ll be ready for more advanced
techniques, such as the methods you will see outlined in the section on
Obama’s use of hypnotic techniques!
Have fun!

Day 1: Sensor Acuity

• Take a different view of the world.

• Notice coworkers’ or friends’ hair, the color, the style.
• Notice the color and texture of the walls of your workspace.
• Sit in a different spot when you eat a meal.
• Notice the color of all your family/coworkers’ eyes.
• Wear your watch (or other jewelry) on a different hand.

Day 2: Rapport

• Mirror/match the physiology of three people, coworker,

friend/family member, stranger in a social setting.
• Be obvious.

Day 3: Anchoring

• Notice several self-anchoring experiences

• Auditory: music—what songs motivate you? Get you going? Calm
you down?
• Visual: find visual anchors that affect you—dogs, babies, the flag.
• Olfactory/Gustatory: walk into a bakery or other similar
establishment; close your eyes, and what do you notice?

Day 4: Review Basic NLP Techniques

• Which is your favorite and what, specifically, about it causes you to

choose it?
• Do this to someone in a casual interaction.

Day 5: State Control

• Maintain a high state (motivation, excitement, focus) for as long as

possible.
• What do you have to do to reenter it?
Day 6: Meta Model

• Do the short version of the Meta Model; gather information from a

coworker or acquaintance.
• No advice! Gather info!

Day 7: Presuppositions

• Notice the response to your communication; is it the response you

want?
• If not, what can you do differently?
• The meaning of the communication is the response to elicit!

Day 8: Acuity

• Put on your clothes in another way.

• Drink your coffee, soda, etc. with the opposite hand.
• Open up your vision by noticing the details in things you do daily.

Day 9: Rapport

• Go to a restaurant and mirror the waiter/waitress. Then match their

language and breathing.
• Can you notice their state?
• Can you change it?

Day 10: Anchoring

• Get a coworker or friend to laugh. As they do, anchor this.

• Try a few times.
• Can you elicit the response with your anchor?

Day 11: State

• Notice an unresourceful state in yourself. Can you notice the

stimulus?
• Change your state and keep it changed.

Day 12: Meta Model

• Can you notice how many times people delete/distort/generalize in a

conversation?
• Try to recover a small amount of this lost info by asking:
specifically?

Day 13: Techniques

• Do the swish pattern on yourself, then on someone else.

Day 14: Presuppositions

• Flexible—take an approach to something that will surprise your

friends or coworkers.
• Come up with a different way to solve a common problem.
• “The person with the most flexibility will control or influence a
situation.”

Day 15: Acuity

• Watch people interact in a public setting.

• Mirror/match them. Can you understand the communication?
• Can you “sense” their emotions?

Day 16: Rapport

• Go to a store or car dealer.

• You get into rapport with the salesperson.
• See if you can influence them to give you some “inside”
information.

Day 17: Anchoring

• Watch commercials and see how many “anchors” you notice, i.e.,
oldies music to set the mood, use of flag.
• Now that you recognize the anchors, does it de-anchor you?

Day 18: State

• Elicit a strong state in someone by entering into it yourself, and then

change your state quickly.
• What happens?

Day 19: Meta Model

• Listen to a conversation in a public place.

• After noticing Meta Model violations, what are their basic
representational systems?

Day 20: Techniques

• Do the new behavior generator and/or chaining anchors on a

coworker.

Day 21: Presuppositions

• Notice how many times someone mistakes the map for the territory
—their way is the only way.
• “The map is not the territory.”

Bonus:
1. Pick your weakest representational system VAR and use it all day
like it is a favorite.
2. Pick a technique you rarely do (or dislike) and find persons on
which to use it.
3. Try to take another’s position in a conversation—step into their
shoes.
4. Break down one of your normal tasks into small chunks. Can you
improve it?
Repeat Days 1-21. You’re a master in training!

Putting It Together—
Einstein’s Brain

In the June 19, 1999 issue of Lancet (the journal of the British Medical
Association), Sandra F. Witelson, Ph.D., Debra L. Kigar, and Thomas
Harvey, M.D., of the Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral
Neurosciences of McMaster University in Canada have reported that the
differences in the brain of Albert Einstein may explain his genius in
mathematics. When the Nobel Prize-winning physicist died of a ruptured
abdominal aorta in 1955 at the age of seventy-six, his brain was removed
and preserved within seven hours of his death. His medical history was well
documented, and biographies show he was mentally adept, doing research
until the end of his life. There had never been a report describing the
anatomy of his brain until now.
In the McMaster University study, the researchers compared anatomical
measurements from Einstein’s brain with the brains from thirty-five men
and fifty-six women who had normal intelligence. These researchers also
studied the brains of eight men over sixty-five so they could take into
account changes that normally occur with aging.
Einstein’s brain appeared similar to the others except for two areas found on
each side of the brain called the inferior parietal regions. Einstein had
extensive development in these regions on both sides of his brain; his brain
was almost 15 percent wider than the control group.
It is thought that the growth of this region seems to have occurred early in
the development of his brain, because it appears to have blocked the
development of a groove in the brain called the Slyvian fissure. In most
people, the Slyvian fissure runs along each side of the brain reaching about
three-quarters of the way to the back. In Dr. Einstein’s case, the fissure does
not reach as far back as normal, but instead it turns upward to join another
groove that normally runs down the side of the brain called the postcentral
sulcus.
The confluence of these, the Slyvian fissure and the postcentral sulcus,
forms a
C-shaped groove on the surface of each side of his brain. “This morphology
found in each of Einstein’s hemispheres was not seen in any hemispheres of
the 35 control male brains or of any of the 56 female brains, nor in any
specimen documented in the published collections of post-mortem brains,”
write Dr. Witelson and her colleagues.
The area of Einstein’s brain that appears to be overdeveloped is thought to
be involved in the creation and manipulation of three-dimensional spatial
images and the mathematical representation of those concepts, the
researchers write.
Therefore, the unusual anatomy of Einstein’s brain may explain why he
tended to think about scientific problems visually. “Einstein’s own
description of his scientific thinking,” the researchers write, “was that
words do not seem to play any role, but there is associative play of more or
less clear images of a visual and muscular type.” There were other
differences that might explain Einstein’s abilities. Because of the
differences in the grooves along the side of his brain, the neurons (cells) of
a particular area of the parietal operculum are not divided by one of the
grooves, but are instead kept together. The researchers speculate that the
absence of this groove may have allowed more neurons in this area to
establish better connections between each other. They further think that this
may have created an “extraordinarily large expanse of highly integrated
cortical network.”
It is thought that when large, well-integrated networks form in an area
dedicated to certain mental tasks, it may make the person much better than
normal at doing those tasks. In Einstein’s case it was visualizing solutions
to difficult mathematical problems. (Could this be a key to why some
people have difficulty in visualizing?)
“Einstein’s exceptional intellect in these cognitive domains and his self-
described mode of scientific thinking may be related to the atypical
anatomy in his brain,” the researchers concluded.

Remote Brain Control

John Chapin of the Hahnemann School of Medicine reports in Nature

Neuroscience that they have trained six lab rats to move a robot arm with
the power of thought alone.
First the rats were trained in the classical S-R way to press a spring-loaded
lever (which moves a robotic arm) using their paws to get a reward (water
or food). This allowed the researchers to ascertain which brain cells were
involved in the task. Thus, having their target cell-groups (parts of the brain
in the motor cortex and the thalamus) the researchers implanted arrays of
electrodes into these groups to study the role of individual neurons in them.
They now had a detailed outline on the neuronal activity that gives rise to
the bending, pushing, and stretching movements that constitute pressing a
lever.
Through analysis, over many hundreds of trials of the firing patterns that
make up such a movement, the researchers located the neurons responsible
for every stage of the action: preparation, flexing the forelimb, extending it,
pushing it, and so on. Then the team harnessed these neurons for their own
by wiring them so that they could fire them directly and move the arm
without the animal touching the lever. With this new setup, the rats quickly
learned that there was no need to physically push the lever in order for a
reward. A few tries later, they were able to reconfigure their brain activity
so that it alone moved the reward-bearing robotic arm.
This is the first time that brain activity, so high up in the motor pathways,
has been used to drive a machine. Older devices used cruder signals from
the stumps of amputated limbs or the surface of the skin. This new
technology will offer far greater speed and precision.
When you look at these two diverse studies, I am drawn to the hypothesis
that if rats can learn to control brain activity, can we, as a somewhat higher
developed animal, use our conscious thought to direct energy to the parts of
our brains that do different tasks? And could we stimulate growth and
change in the actual structure of the brain itself? There are studies that show
that with conscious attention, you can cause physical changes. This is the
basis of biofeedback. There is some research using MRIs to map brain
activity, and again it seems to be able to be controlled by conscious
attention.
Once we become aware of how to do it, it seems just so possible!
We therapists who use altered states to effect mind/body changes could use
our skills to do the same things. This could be our next big breakthrough,
using conscious and subconscious thought to alter our physical brains, to
improve them with mental exercises (hypnosis and NLP) the way athletes
use physical exercise to alter their bodies. Is not your brain a physical organ
capable of change and growth much like a muscle?
Try to develop ways to use your skills to bring advances in this exciting
field, and let me know how it works. In my programs, such as Designing
Your Destiny, second edition, tape series, much of this type of work is done.
Until next time, use the Force to spur growth in your own developing brain.

References:

Witelson, S. F., Kigar, D., Harvey, T., “The Exceptional Brain of Albert
Einstein,” Lancet,
1999, vol. 353, 2149-53 19 June 1999

Deary, I. J., Carl, P. G., “Neuroscience and Human intelligence

differences,” Trends
Neuroscience, 1999, no. 20 365-371

Chapin, J., Nature Neuroscience, June 1999

AN EXAMINATION OF OBAMA’S USE OF
HIDDEN HYPNOSIS TECHNIQUES IN HIS
SPEECHES
THE EVIDENCE IS HERE: This document contains over 60 pages of
evidence and analysis proving Barack Obama’s use of a little-known and
highly deceptive and manipulative form of “hack” hypnosis on millions of
unaware Americans, and reveals what only a few psychologists and
hypnosis/NLP experts know.
William Horton, Psy. D. CAC Master Hypnotist, NLP Trainer, Author,
Technical advisor co-author
Barack Obama’s speeches contain the hypnosis techniques of Dr. Milton
Erickson, M.D. who developed a form of “conversational” hypnosis that
could be hidden in seemingly normal speech and used on patients without
their knowledge for therapy purposes. Obama’s speeches intentionally
contain:

- Trance Inductions
- Hypnotic Anchoring
- Pacing and Leading
- Pacing, Distraction and Utilization
- Critical Factor Bypass
- Stacking Language Patterns
- Preprogrammed Response Adaptation
- Linking Statements/ Causality Bridges
- Secondary Hidden Meanings/Imbedded
Suggestions
- Emotion Transfer
- Non-Dominant Hemisphere
- Programming
Obama’s techniques are the height of deception and psychological
manipulation, remaining hidden because one must understand the science
behind the language patterns in order to spot them. This document
examines Obama’s speeches word by word, hand gesture by hand gesture,
tone, pauses, body language, and proves his use of covert hypnosis intended
only for licensed therapists on consenting patients. Obama’s mesmerized,
cult-like, grade-school-crush-like worship by millions is not because
“Obama is the greatest leader of a generation” who simply hasn’t
accomplished anything, who magically “inspires” by giving speeches.
Obama is committing perhaps the biggest fraud and deception in American
history.
Obama is not just using subliminal messages, but textbook covert hypnosis
and neuro-linguistic programming techniques on audiences that are
intentionally designed to sideline rational judgment and implant
subconscious commands to think he is wonderful and elect him President.
Obama is eloquent. However, Obama’s subconscious techniques are shown
to elicit powerful emotion from his audience and then transfer those
emotions onto him, to sideline rational judgment, and implant hypnotic
commands that we are unaware of and can’t even consciously question. The
polls are misleading because some of Obama’s commands are designed to
be triggered only in the voting booth on November 4th. Obama is immune
to logical arguments like Wright, Ayers, shifting every position, character,
and inexperience, because hypnosis affects us on an unconscious and
emotional level. To many people who see this unaccomplished man’s
unnatural and irrational rise to the highest office in the world as suspicious
and frightening and to those who welcome it, this document uncovers,
explains, and proves the deceptive tactics behind true “Obama
Phenomenon” including why younger people are more easily affected.

READ THIS TABLE OF CONTENTS

Skeptics will surely doubt the information provided in this document with
four specific oppositions – each
of which this document disproves
Foreword and commentary
PART 1 – HYPNOSIS BASICS
You must understand the basics of Ericksonian hypnosis to see what Obama
is doing
Real “hypnosis” explaine
Two separate definitions of “hypnosis”:
The origins of “covert hypnosis” and “conversational hypnosis” aka “black
ops” hypnosis
Bypassing the dominant hemisphere’s rational judgment (“critical factor”)
PART 2 – WHAT OBAMA IS ACTUALLY DOING
Obama’s actions are far more deceptive than simply lying
The study of the effects of mass hypnosis
Illegality of Obama’s use of hypnosis
The hypnosis technique of “pacing and leading” to sideline rational
judgment
How pacing is done:
Specific examples of Obama using 14 separate hypnotic pacing statements
in his Denver 2008
Convention speech
Embedded and hidden meanings – “deep structure” of language vs “surface
structure”
How Ericksonian “linking statements” mimic the way the brain accepts
information
Basics of Obama’s pacing and leading: The “because we need change, that
is why I should be your next
president” argument
Obama’s speeches as one big hypnotic trance induction using extra slow
speech, rhythm, tonalities,
vagueness, visual imagery, metaphor, and raising of emotion
The use of Ericksnian “vagueness” in speech as a linguistic induction tool:
“Change” and “Yes we
can.”
Use of visual imagery and imagination as an induction tool
The stacking of hypnotic language patterns in 40+ minute long speeches
Obama’s unusual use of hand gestures as subconscious programming and
hypnotic anchoring designed to
be triggered in the voting booth on November 4th
*Obama’s hypnotic command that “a light will shine down from
somewhere, it will light upon you, you
will experience an epiphany, and you will say to yourself, ‘I have to vote
for Barack’”
An example of Obama using both of these hypnotic hand gestures, hypnotic
programming followed by
hypnotic anchor back to back, in a way that can be nothing other than
hypnosis
Undeniable evidence that this is hypnosis: Obama hypnotically anchoring
the statement about a light
shining down and an internal voice saying “I have to vote for Barack”
Convincing without logic: “The Fierce! Urgency! of Now!” argument
(Obama caught anchoring)
Obama caught in subconscious hand gesture linking McCain to Bush
Obama caught using one-finger subconscious hand gesture regarding
Hillary
Obama caught in another undeniable subconscious hand gesture regarding
McCain

PART 3 – WHAT OBAMA IS EXACTLY DOING – SPECIFIC

SPEECHES “PLAY BY PLAY”
Obama’s California Democratic Convention speech 2007 - a “play by play”
of his undeniable use of
embedded commands, hypnotic induction, and hypnotic storytelling
Obama performs an undeniable Ericksonian hypnotic induction: Obama’s
“Turn the Page” Speech at
the California Democratic Convention in 2007
Obama caught intentionally controlling pace in obvious attempt to maintain
trance
Obama’s speech Tuesday after primaries ended June 3, 2008 – undeniable
evidence of Obama’s use of
hypnotic principles of anchoring, deletion, distraction, and leading
Obama caught delivering another powerful hypnotic command
Obama caught pacing and leading again
Obama’s 2007 California Democratic Convention “turn the page” speech –
further analysis
Obama using “turn the page” as a preprogrammed response:
Obama using “turn the page” as a hypnotic anchor:
Obama’s Democratic Convention speech 2008 – A “play by play” of his
undeniable and extensive
anchoring, pacing, leading, and delivery of subconscious commands
Obama’s typical pacing, leading, storytelling, and hidden meanings
induction:
Obama caught stacking language patterns
*Obama caught clarifying his hand gesture as unmistakable hypnotic
anchor of writing with pen
(twice):
Obama caught giving the primary hypnotic command of the speech:
Obama’s aggressive pointing- the subconscious signal of giving commands:
Obama caught in another hypnotic command, anchor, and a strategic pause:
Obama caught hypnotically linking himself with John F. Kennedy:
Obama again pacing and leading
PART 4 – ADDITIONAL SPECIFIC ASPECTS OF OBAMA’S
HYPNOSIS
Obama’s technique of head turned to the right side in interviews described
by body language expert as one
of the most powerful subconscious manipulation techniques possible by a
speaker’s body language
Interview of Professor of Psychiatry on CNN in which Dr. comes close to
hinting of her suspicion that
Obama is using covert subconscious techniques throughout his campaign
Hypnosis/NLP expert discusses Obama’s use of mind control techniques on
radio
Website analyzes Obama’s use of hypnosis in speeches
Obama uses hypnotic command to dismiss the Rev Wright questions
Obama’s speech on race March 18, 2008 Philadelphia – hypnotic
storytelling throughout
Obama’s hypnotic logo
Obama’s strange hand gesture & hand-holding conversation with Senator
Lieberman
Obama’s use of a fake presidential seal
Assorted other points:
PART 5 – THE VISIBLE EFFECTS OF OBAMA’S HYPNOSIS
The effects of his hypnosis are undeniable
Obama’s perceived greatness
Obama’s trance
The effects of Obama’s hypnosis on young people, and more educated
people
Conclusion and commentary
Personal Notes:
 Skeptics will surely doubt the information provided in this document with
four specific oppositions – each of which this document disproves.
These certain oppositions answered in this document are:
1. Hypnosis isn’t real - hypnosis wouldn’t / doesn’t work on me
Trance states of mind and enhanced suggestibility happen to everyone every
day; driving in your car, in the elevator, watching T.V., or listening to
music. This mild hypnotic state is all that is needed for Ericksonian
techniques to implant hypnotic commands you are unaware of.
2. Obama isn’t intentionally using mass hypnosis
This document contains over a hundred examples of Obama’s specific
language patterns and hypnosis techniques that follow textbook Ericksonian
principles and characteristics too much to be coincidence.
3. Obama’s popularity is not attributable to his use of hypnosis
Young people and more educated people actually have lower hypnotic
subconscious suggestibility thresholds for scientific reasons explained.
Popular perceptions of Obama are provable as inconsistent with his
accomplishments, history, background, and even what is heard from him
consciously – however, they match perfectly with the messages he is caught
sending intending to be received only subconsciously. People are
admittedly mesmerized by him. The irrational rise to power of and uncanny
passionate support for a logically unaccomplished and questionable man
based on his speaking alone like the “Obama phenomenon” is widely
accepted – only the rational explanation for it is missing. Finally, he would
not continue to use these deceptive techniques if he did not believe they
work.
4. There is nothing unethical about Obama’s use of hypnosis
The techniques used by Obama are the most deceptive forms of
communication known to man. They sideline rational judgment and implant
subconscious commands that change how people feel and behave without
any awareness of the manipulation. Obama’s techniques overcome the will
without convincing the judgment through trickery. Obama often says one
message that you are aware of, meanwhile implants a different message
hypnotically with double or hidden meanings. He conjures up emotions by
talking about your children, and JFK, and then is caught transferring those
feelings onto him with hidden hand gestures. He hides what he is doing and
brazenly uses these techniques in front of millions of people over and over.
Once explained, Obama’s actions can be shown to be the height of
manipulation and deception.
IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT YOU READ THIS
DOCUMENT IN ORDER, FROM BEGINNING TO END, AS
DEFINITIONS ARE BUILT ON TOP OF ONE-ANOTHER, AND
UNDERSTANDING OF THESE DEFINITIONS IS NECESSARY TO
FOLLOW LATER INTERPRETATIONS AND ANALYSIS

Foreword and commentary

The level of deception involved in Obama’s use of covert hypnosis, and his
presumption that he has the right to use hypnosis on us to gain votes is just
unconscionable. It is not a connection to another person that he can deny. It
is Obama’s own highly deceptive actions, provable once explained, on
video, playable over and over. Obama is sidelining rational judgment and
using undue influence to win over voters applying psychological
subconscious manipulation like never before in American history.
No other argument against Obama can fundamentally change the way
people feel about him deep down inside, EXCEPT, proof that precisely the
way they feel about him deep down inside is because of Obama's own
deception and use of hidden hypnosis. This is because exposing Obama’s
use of hypnosis takes the people who are entranced by him subconsciously
and emotionally, and puts the issue of why they feel that way on a
conscious rational level where they can analyze it. It is the one thing that
can fundamentally change the game, and shatter Obama’s magical
immunity to all of his other faults, logical disqualifications, and deceptions.
This can include the media changing their mind about Obama once they see
who he really is and also helping to expose what Obama is doing in the
interests of democracy. Many people do wake up from the effects of
hypnosis once you tell them they have been hypnotized and explain what
has happened to them. To a lot of people, it is just a missing piece of the
puzzle that makes everything else make sense - almost as if it were the
missing piece they were somehow even looking for on some level.1
PART 1 – HYPNOSIS BASICS
You must understand the basics of Ericksonian hypnosis to see what Obama
is doing
Almost nobody realizes what Obama is doing. These techniques are nearly
impossible for an untrained person to detect. With the exception of a few
trained experts in hypnosis, nobody understands even what to look for. It
sounds in every way like ordinary powerful speech.
Hypnosis is not sleep, nor what is portrayed in movies. In order to spot
what Obama is doing, one must first understand covert hypnosis and
conversational hypnosis, and know how the science works. Only by
knowing how hypnosis works will you see that Obama’s speech often
diverges from normal and logical speech patterns, and clearly uses the non-
logical, clearly artificial and intentional patterns of hypnotic trance
induction, and hypnotic critical factor bypass as taught in the field of covert
and conversational hypnosis. This document will explain what Obama is
precisely doing and how it works by explaining hidden hypnotic language
patterns and other hypnosis techniques, and pointing out these patterns and
techniques in Obama’s speeches.
Obama is using textbook, clinical trance inductions in his speeches.
Obama’s hypnotic techniques work on a subconscious level, and are
designed so that people watching him in an audience or on TV are
completely unaware of his techniques and their effects. Obama is using
clear hypnotic anchoring, pacing and leading, and numerous other hypnosis
techniques designed to take away our rational judgment in deciding for
whom
1 “The only thing you need to do to break a negative hypnotic spell that has
been cast on you is begin to think rationally, to begin to think critically. And
if you decide that you choose this message as one that’s good for you, by all
means sit back, relax, and enjoy the ride. But, if you decide that this is not
something you want to have in your life, just simply analyze it, criticise it,
ridicule it, and say “Hey, that’s not how the world works.” And you’ll have
protected your mind from taking on board something which you really dont
need.” The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor
Ledochowski, re the section entitled “The Dark Side of Hypnosis.”

Not only is this the only explanation that makes sense for the amazing rise
and “Obama phenomenon” sweeping our nation, but the evidence is
undeniable.
To say Obama’s amazing following and rise to power is simply because he
is a great speaker is not logically sufficient. Even if Obama were the
greatest speaker to come along in 30 years, it still would not explain why
even being simply a great speaker would cause people to say he is the
greatest “leader” of a generation, or “sent by g-d” or “JFK” and why that he
should be trusted to make decisions like he has never made in his life, or
that he will bring change when he hasn’t really changed anything in his 46
years. What he has done does not logically fit how he is perceived. In fact,
the gulf is too wide to be random unexplained phenomenon. As shown, he
does, however, use clever hypnosis techniques while discussing e.g. JFK to
subconsciously transfer feelings conjured up in his audience onto him
through, e.g. flashed hand gestures which appear innocent to uncritical
observation.
Real “hypnosis” explained
Most people are hypnotized and fall into trance every day of their lives.2 It
is a common, every day occurrence, whether for a brief second, or minutes
or longer. A very basic example is when you are driving a car while in deep
thought, and you suddenly realize you are much further along with no
memory of driving the whole distance. Another example, is when you are
on an elevator watching the numbers change and go into trance, and when
everyone else gets off, you take that as a nonverbal suggestion to get off,
before you “wake up” and realize it is not your floor. This elevator example
is an example of mass hypnosis, where the close rapport with the hypnotist
is not necessary, because many people are both hypnotized partly by
whatever is causing the trance, and partly by the fact that you are being
“paced” or also hypnotized by everyone else in the elevator doing the exact
same thing as you. The reason you cry from reading sad book simply by
reading ink on paper is because of the mind’s interaction with that
information, which is also a hypnotic process.3
Two separate definitions of “hypnosis”:
1. First, hypnosis, is “a particular altered state of hyper-suggestibility
brought about in an individual by a combination of relaxation, fixation of
attention, and suggestion.”4
2. Second, hypnosis is also “bypassing the ‘critical factor’ and setting
up acceptable selective thinking.5” The “critical factor” is the conscious
part of the brain that you think with that has the ability to make rational
logical judgments about what information is received.6 The critical factor
acts as a filter, determining what
2 Erickson maintained that trance is a common, everyday occurrence.
For example, when waiting for buses and trains, reading or listening, or
even being involved in strenuous physical exercise, it's quite normal to
become immersed in the activity and go into a trance state, removed from
any other irrelevant stimuli. These states are so common and familiar that
most people do not consciously recognize them as hypnotic phenomena.
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Milton_H._Erickson
3 The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor
Ledochowski
4 Modern Hypnosis, Theory and Practice, Masud Ansari, Ph.D.
5 Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1,
David X’s educational video, “How to Hypnotize with Covert Hypnosis and
Hypnotic Language” See video online, such as at:
http://www.revver.com/video/834827/how-to-hypnotize-with¬covert-
hypnosis-and-hypnotic-language/
6 Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X,

Part 1

Hypnosis/NLP can pass into the subconscious mind which is a non-rational

computer-like system which accepts everything in it as absolute truth.7 That
is why sidelining it is so dangerous.
Milton Erickson, had a broader definition of the unconscious mind,
described as, “both the functioning of the dominant hemisphere of the brain
that occurs below the level of awareness, as well as the functioning of the
non-dominant hemisphere.” 8
Ericksonian trance induction has three dimensions which we will return to
often and compare to Obama’s language patterns. They are:9
Pacing and distraction of the dominant (language) hemisphere;
Utilization of the dominant hemisphere, language processing which
occurs below the level of awareness;
Accessing of the non-dominant hemisphere;
This above three part process is extremely important to later analysis.
Essentially, hypnosis is an altered and common state of mind involving
intense focus, sidelining or disassociation of the rational critical thinking,
and the state of hyper-suggestibility brought about while the subconscious
mind is the dominant player.10 It happens while reading, listening to music,
and even while hearing a great speaker.11
However, the power of such methods is what is difficult to grasp. What we
are talking about is “transformational linguistics” – language that literally
changes who you are at your deepest levels, your deepest passions, drives,
and emotions while you are completely unaware.
Under Freud, there is the conscious mind that you think with, called the
“ego.” You also have a conscience, called the “super-ego.” Then, there is
the largest part of the psyche, the id, which is the back-end of all our
memory, our most basic instincts and drives, emotions, and suppressed
desires.12 “The unconscious mind is the source of our energy, and no
amount of conscious reasoning can override it. The unconscious mind is un-
critical, it accepts as absolute truth any idea that is allowed to enter its
computer-like system”13 The messages of hypnosis, including mass
hypnosis, can be far more powerful than just someone’s conscious thoughts,
as it affects their most basic biological drives and instincts.14 That is why
many of Obama’s followers are so passionate for him, why they are fainting
in his presence, comparing him to Jesus, and supporting him like no other
candidate before.
Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D.
Volume 1, p13.
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D.
Volume 1, p13.
The Religion of Psychology by Marty Wilson,
http://www.mychristiansite.com/personal/shilohcomes/hd.html
Roy Hunter, MS, CHt, cited at
http://www.mychristiansite.com/personal/shilohcomes/hd.html
Modern Hypnosis, Theory and Practice, Masud Ansari, Ph.D., Ch3,
Unconscious Mind and Hypnosis
Modern Hypnosis, Theory and Practice, Masud Ansari, Ph.D., Ch3,
Unconscious Mind and Hypnosis, p43
The International Law of Propaganda, By Bhagevatula
Satyanarayana Murty, discussing I.P. Pavlov, Conditioned Reflexes, an
Investigation of the Physiological Activity of the Cerebral Cortex. (Such
mass hypnosis is compared in psychological effect to “evoking responses
that satisfy the drives of biological instincts.”
The origins of “covert hypnosis” and “conversational hypnosis” aka “black
ops” hypnosis
Dr. Milton H. Erickson, also known as the father of modern hypnosis
method, was the single greatest practitioner of hypnosis, having
dramatically advanced the field.15 Dr. Erickson is internationally acclaimed
as the leading practitioner in the field of hypnosis16 for his understanding
of the science of both inducing and utilizing hypnotic states.17
Dr. Erickson discovered while working as a therapist, that he could hide
therapeutic hypnosis within the normal content of an inconspicuous
conversation with the patient, and avoid much of the patient’s conscious
resistance that normally accompanied hypnotherapy.18 Dr. Erickson
realized the subconscious mind was always listening, and understood better
than anyone before how to access it, and implant suggestions into it. What
Dr. Erickson did was figure out how to put people into trance and hypnotize
them and implant suggestions with seemingly normal conversation. He
discovered that people could achieve this heightened state of hyper-
suggestibility without the traditional difficultly-induced coma-like state
traditionally associated with hypnosis. Though his pioneering
understanding, he was able to do the same and much more often with
simple plays on words and embedded meanings in a single sentence.
The entire field of “covert hypnosis”, or “conversational hypnosis” is based
on Dr. Erickson’s techniques, and is now primarily used by hypnotists and
psychiatrists. 19 Conversational hypnosis is often referred to as Ericksonian
hypnosis. The word “hypnosis” is never mentioned and there is nothing
overt to give away that hypnosis is being used. It is impossible to detect
unless you know precisely what to look for. Hack versions of these
techniques are unfortunately taught to be used as persuasion tools for
salespersons, and even more unfortunately also for men looking to enhance
their success picking up and seducing with women.
The reason this is so unfortunate, is because covert hypnosis is designed to
sideline rational judgment. That is fundamental to how it works; to bypass
the dominant hemisphere and critical factor. It essentially tricks the
subconscious mind into accepting commands as absolute truths which
include not only those approved by the conscious mind, but outside
commands from a hypnotist who can implant any suggestion he wishes. Dr.
Erickson was adamant that only doctors be allowed to practice his
techniques because of how strongly he felt about how dangerous such
science could be in the wrong hands.

Milton E. Erickson, often looked at as the father of modern day hypnosis

understanding, was founding president of the American Society for Clinical
Hypnosis and a fellow of the American Psychiatric Association, the
American Psychological Association, and the American Psychopathological
Association. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Milton_H._Erickson He felt very
strongly that the field of hypnosis should only be allowed to be studied by
doctors because of its power.
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p1.
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p1.
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p25 “by communicating indirectly, Dr. Erickson avoids the issue of
resistance to a large extent.” “Erickson believed that the unconscious mind
was always listening, and that hypnosis could be used whether the patient
was aware of it or completely oblivious to the fact that a hypnotic technique
was being used. Erickson would see if the patient would respond to one or
another kind of indirect suggestion, and allow the unconscious mind to
actively participate in the therapeutic process. In this way, what seemed like
a normal conversation might induce a hypnotic trance, or a therapeutic
change in the subject. Andre M. Weitzenhoffer (1976) Introduction/forward
in Hypnotic Realities Erickson & Rossi. It is called conversational hypnosis
because the subtleties are slipped into a conversation and the other person
would not consciously realize it, while the tactics could have a very real
subconscious effect.” http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Milton_H._Erickson
Sometimes the field is called “black-ops” hypnosis.

and Subconscious suggestions are more powerful than even what the
subject believes consciously – as such suggestions become parts of their
deepest psyche. Because covert hypnosis is hidden in ordinary speech, the
subject is not aware that it is being used, it is even more powerful than
ordinary hypnosis. Since the conscious mind is not even aware of the
messages being sent, conscious scrutiny and resistance is eliminated.20 The
subject cannot even question the messages being sent – they are simply
implanted by the hypnotist as the subject’s most fundamental beliefs. Then,
even the subject’s own rational mind cannot overpower them.
Bypassing the dominant hemisphere’s rational judgment (“critical factor”)
The critical factor is the part of the mind that logically analyzes and
scrutinizes all information like a filter, and decides what information is
allowed to pass into your subconscious mind and become part of what your
mind accepts as unquestionably true, like your deepest and most powerful
emotions, drives, and instincts.21 It is the primary cognitive defense that
usually stops all information and rationally analyzes it, whether consciously
or unconsciously. It keeps your computer-like subconscious mind from
literally believing that you are a chicken when someone calls you a
“chicken”, and keeps you from literally believing that you are a square
(box) when somebody calls you a “square”, and keeps you from literally
believing you are a (snow or cereal) flake when somebody calls you a
“flake.” you don’t consciously ponder it when someone calls you a chicken,
your critical fator stops that information below the level of awareness.
The critical factor is the cognitive function best analogized to a security
guard (critical factor) who searches every person (information) entering into
a nightclub looking for weapons. (and stops all information that is
questionable)22 The critical factor stops all information and allows your
thinking and rationality to determine whether it is acceptable to the
subconscious mind or not.
Hypnosis uses language patterns, visual tricks, body language, voice, tone,
and other aspects of communication to get “suggestions” past the critical
factor part of the brain and directly into the listener’s subconscious.23 This
is wonderful if the command is to be free of a phobia, or quit smoking. The
reason hypnosis is used for such psychological change, is that the critical
factor allows in only what it accepts as true. Without bypassing the
smoker’s critical factor, a smoker has a difficult time quitting because they
have a difficult time accepting as absolutely true the information that they
are a nonsmoker, because their critical factor and conscious mind knows
differently and doesn’t let the information through.
How one might simplify this point, is, in normal everyday life, calling
someone a “chicken” will not cause them to literally believe they are a
chicken and act like one. This is because the critical factor stops this
information from passing into the subconscious. So how can a hypnotist get
a subject to cluck like a chicken believing they are one? The hypnotist
knows how to get the hypnotic suggestion that the subject is a chicken past
the critical factor part of the consciousness, and get the subconscious mind
to accept it as unquestionably true.
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p25 – “by communicating indirectly, he avoids the issue of resistance to a
large extent.”
Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1 David X’s
educational video, “How to Hypnotize with Covert Hypnosis and Hypnotic
Language” See video online, such as at:
http://www.revver.com/video/834827/how-to-hypnotize-with¬covert-
hypnosis-and-hypnotic-language/
Analogy used in The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and
Igor Ledochowski
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p129 “voice, tone, body movement” in addition to the linguistic aspects.
 PART 2 – WHAT OBAMA IS ACTUALLY DOING
Obama’s actions are far more deceptive than simply lying
If used by a politician and discovered, such hypnosis technique, if
understood as it should be, to be the height of manipulation and deception,
would destroy a politician’s career.24 There is no other way to view such a
politician other than disturbingly and disqualifyingly deceptive, someone
whom we apparently know very little about, and cannot trust, who has been
continually hiding something from us and manipulating us. To see a
politician continue to perform a multitude of hundreds of deceptive acts,
which he knows about but we are meant not to know about, that affect our
judgment and mental processes, and that manipulate us in ways we are not
even aware of, all the while thinking he is clever enough to get away with it
until he finally gets caught, is the height of immoral deception. It is perhaps
the biggest fraud and deception in American history.
Most of our beliefs come to us from our own rational judgment and
conscious analysis of the world. For example, we know it good to wake up
in the morning and do something because we rationally know the
consequences of staying in bed all day. When we like people, it is usually
due to a combination of our rational judgment and how that person
naturally makes us feel about them. We try to make people like us more by
following social norms, making people feel good, smiling, and so on.
However, a very small percentage of the population actually study
subconscious manipulation of not only how people feel about them, but
how to manipulate and alter the beliefs we usually come to by our rational
judgment, reason, and experience. These people study specifically how to
sideline this rational judgment, reason, and experience, and natural feelings,
and bend people’s feelings and will through the application of this branch of
psychiatry to their interactions.
Obama is an expert at this type of artificial manipulation. His ability to
convince rationally and any natural “charm” is only part of how a person
feels about Obama. The rest is deceptive subconscious manipulation. His
tactics are deceptive because he has mastered the science and art of
lowering the effects of the rational scrutiny parts of the mind through his
speaking, actions, and presentation. He gets you to believe not by
convincing you rationally until you decide to believe it, but by knowing
how to say to your subconscious mind literally the words that “you believe”
in a way that your subconscious mind will simply accept the message and
believe without having rationally decided to believe. He knows how to say
to your subconscious mind that it “chose” (Obama) even when it hasn’t, in a
way that you will believe that you have chosen. He understands
subconscious manipulation enough to know how to talk about families, and
your children, and John F. Kennedy, and conjure up feelings within you
from speaking in certain rhythmic and unnaturally slow tempos, and then
subconsciously transfer the emotions he conjures up onto him, such as with
hand gestures or hidden content in language. You genuinely walk away
from him feeling warm, and viewing him as a JFK, except it is artificial. He
knows how to say one thing, but have your subconscious mind ultra-
powerfully receive a different message and feeling than you are aware of.
He is actually implanting feelings and emotions into your subconscious.
They feel like your own. Rationally he is an unaccomplished man with
shady connections, but you are tricked into feelings about him that
overpower
Also distinguished, are common political tactics. Such tactics, like making
sure there is a Presidential podium in front of you, and American flags
behind you to make you look Presidential. While they send messages, they
are not analogous to the deceptive and unprecedented hypnosis used by
Obama that is the focus of this document.

those, that feel like your genuine feelings about him because they come
from inside you, implanted into the deepest parts of your psyche.
Obama’s deception here is not simply a few subliminal messages like those
used in some advertisements. Obama is employing with art and skill a
complex hidden system applying a multitude of the most advanced
techniques in subconscious manipulation known to psychology. This entire
system is designed to do one thing - to make us feel like the decision to
support Obama is our own when it is really, at least for many, implanted
artificially through hypnosis.
What Obama is doing is in effect the same as if he dangled a silver watch in
front of us and said “you are getting sleepy and going into trance... .you
have an unstoppable urge that you cannot resist you must vote for Barack.”
In fact, as discussed below, Obama was actually caught at least once saying
something very similar with his own lips. Yes, Obama was caught giving an
overt hypnotic command to vote for him.25 People even made fun of it, but
nobody realized it was actual intentional hypnosis until it is now explained.
(see below)
Hypnotizing someone without their knowledge is the height of immorality.
The level of deception involved here, in Obama’s use of covert hypnosis,
and his presumption that he has the right to use hypnosis on us to gain votes
is just unconscionable. If a stranger came up to you in a restaurant and tried
to hypnotize you to get you to do anything, even so much as buy them a cup
of coffee, and you figured out that they were trying to use actual hypnosis
on you, you would run.
If Obama simply lied, we voters would be able to use our rational judgment
to make a logical decision about what is the truth, and what we should
believe, and what we shouldn’t. However, because he is implanting
subconscious commands we are not aware of consciously, into the deepest
parts of our emotional and subconscious psyches, he is actually taking away
our ability to make those rational judgments. He is making the decision to
and taking away even our ability to question the commands he is
hypnotizing us with. We never even know the commands are being
implanted (until now with this document), and we are tricked into believing
that our feelings are coming from deep inside us. Obama’s concealment of
his hypnotic techniques can only be looked at as deception.
The passion people feel for Obama is real because it comes from deep
inside each of them. Thus, logical arguments against Obama become
irrelevant. To all those who were wondering what the impaired rational
judgment of millions of people looks like, here it is. It doesn’t matter that he
has no accomplishments, never takes hard positions, or that he changes to
opposite positions from almost one day to the next, or has long term
connections to extremists, racists, and other shady people, is endorsed by
Iran and Hamas, and simply says he didn’t know the character of his own
pastor and mentor for twenty years. The logic of this disturbing information
is on the conscious level, and cannot override the subconscious nor change
how his supporters feel internally.27 Many may be somewhat bothered by it
logically, but it hasn’t changed how
See below, regarding Obama’s Statement featured in McCain ad, “The
One”, - Obama’s hypnotic command that “a light will shine down from
somewhere, it will light upon you, you will experience an epiphany, and
you will say to yourself, ‘I have to vote for Barack’” – criticized for its
being ridiculousness probably without even awareness that it is hypnosis.
“Deception (also called beguilement or subterfuge) is the act of convincing
another to believe information that is not true, or not the whole truth as in
certain types of half-truths. Deception involves concepts like propaganda,
distraction and/or concealment.” http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Deception
“The unconscious mind is the source of our energy. No amount of will
power exerted by the conscious mind can override it.” Modern Hypnosis
Theory and Practice, Masud Ansari, Ph..D., p43.

many people feel about him. The fact that he has changed nearly every
position from the primaries to the general election doesn’t register in us
consciously what it should – that this unknown man can just as easily
change the day after he is sworn in as President and be anyone he chooses,
including a very different person than he has been portraying.
Now, what sounds like frightening science fiction is reality. Someone whom
we really don’t know, who is unaccomplished, with many shady
connections and supporters, is trying to use hypnosis on millions to get us
all to turn over control of the world’s largest nuclear arsenal to him, and he
is about to succeed.
The study of the effects of mass hypnosis
A widely held view among psychologists and experts is that conversational
hypnosis is literally a form of mind control. One author says:
“Essentially conversational hypnosis allow users to gain control of their
subjects mind through spoken word, and literally get them to do as they
wish - within reason of course. Essentially the English language has various
emotional triggers and tone's which can be utilised to induce people into a
trance. When people are in such a trance it is possible to alter their views
and control their actions.”28
Some video examples of the power of hypnosis are included in the
footnotes.29 However, this particular one at this footnote at the end of this
sentence of hypnotist Derren Brown is amazing, and very exemplary of
how conversational hypnosis works, and is highly recommended for a quick
understanding.30 To give you an idea of the power of hypnosis in the wrong
hands, hypnosis can be used to get a complete stranger to hand over a wallet
in seconds.31 MSNBC32 and BBC33 reports a man stealing from stores
and banks using hypnosis.
One book that studied mass hypnosis called Rape of the Mind was written
by Joost A. M. Meerloo, M.D., Instructor in Psychiatry, Columbia
University Lecturer in Social Psychology, New School for Social Research,
Former Chief, Psychological Department, Netherlands Forces. It examines
the dangers of mass hypnosis.34
An excerpt of the book discusses what a hypnotist could get a subject to do
through hypnotic commands, Chapter 3 – Hypnotism and Mental Coercion:
http://ezinearticles.com/?Cant-Control-Your-Children?-Learn-
Conversational-Hypnosis&id=959004
Hypnosis shows (examples) 1. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SEgrqg-
abKM 2. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Lg_-edxQ2Tw 3.
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=W5H3MgHiaJY 4.
http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=-219
1480905309037848&ei=o2biSIO2KJn-
qAPMve2RCw&q=street+hypnosis+wallet&vt=lf
***See Derren Brown perform mind control conversational hypnosis NLP
at: http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=
219 1480905309037848&ei=o2biSIO2KJn-
qAPMve2RCw&q=street+hypnosis+wallet&vt=lf
http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=-219
1480905309037848&ei=o2biSIO2KJn¬qAPMve2RCw&q=street+hypnosis
+wallet&vt=lf
http://crazymotion.net/news-hypnotize-people-through-
conversation/wQ0C3cuuCZf8jAy.html
http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/europe/7309947.stm
THE RAPE OF THE MIND: The Psychology of Thought Control,
Menticide, and Brainwashing, by Joost A. M. Meerloo, M.D., Instructor in
Psychiatry, Columbia University Lecturer in Social Psychology, New
School for Social Research, Former Chief, Psychological Department,
Netherlands Forces, published in 1956, World Publishing Company. (Out of
Print) Book available online at http://www.lermanet.com/scientology/mc-
ch1.html

There are many quacks who practice hypnosis, not to cure their
victims but to force them into submission, using the victim's unconscious
ties and dependency needs in a criminal, profitable way. One of the most
absorbing aspects of this whole problem of hypnosis is the question of
whether people can be forced to commit crimes, such as murder or treason,
while under a hypnotic spell. Many psychologists would deny that such a
thing could happen and would insist that no person can be compelled to do
under hypnosis what he would refuse to do in a state of alert consciousness.
But actually what a person can be compelled to do depends on the degree of
dependency that hypnosis causes and the frequency of repetition of the so-
called posthypnotic suggestions.
Rape of the Mind discusses psychological conditioning from World War II
Nazi tactics, to Soviet Cold-War theoreticians, to our own democracy. (See
Chapter 2 – Mass Conditioning Through Speech, and Political
Conditioning. The Book also discusses the dangers of the real phenomenon
of mass hypnosis:
Suggestion and hypnosis are considered by some to be a psychological
blessing, but they can also be the beginning of terror. Mass hypnosis, for
example, can have a dangerous influence on the individual. Psychiatrists
have found several times that public demonstrations of mass hypnosis may
provoke an increased hypnotic dependency and submissiveness in many
members of the audience that can last for years. Largely for this reason
Great Britain has passed a law making seances and mass hypnotism illegal.
Hypnosis may act as a trigger mechanism for a repressed dependency need
in the victim and turn him temporarily into a kind of waking sleep-walker
and mental slave. The hypnotic command relieves him of his personal
responsibility, and he surrenders much of his conscience to his hypnotizer.
As we mentioned before, our own times have provided us with far too many
examples of how political hypnosis, mob hypnosis, and even war hypnosis
can turn civilized men into criminals.
Pavlov’s theory of psychology also says that propaganda can create mass
hypnosis, and people can become conditioned to verbal or other symbols
used in propaganda. Such masses can lose their discretion and be easily
influenced.37 For Americans to presume that we are not subject to any
propaganda just because we are Americans is insufficient logic.
Illegality of Obama’s use of hypnosis
Hypnosis-type mental pressure has been held by the Supreme Court of the
United States to be so unduly influential as to deprive someone of their
fundamental rights. The US Supreme court case was Leyra v. Denno, 347
U.S. 556 (1954), Leyra v. Denno, No. 635, Argued April 28, 1954, Decided
June 1, 1954, 347 U.S. 556. After police questioned a suspect day and night
unable to obtain a confession, a hypnotist tried, and did successfully get the
suspect to confess. The legal battles over whether the confession was
voluntary or not, undue influence or not, went all the way to the Supreme
court of the United States, which decided that his confession could not be
used as evidence against him in court. In discussing what the New York
THE RAPE OF THE MIND, Chapter 3, Medication into Submission,
Hypnotism and Mental Coercion, available at
http://www.lermanet.com/scientology/mc-ch3.html
THE RAPE OF THE MIND, Chapter 3, Chapter 2 PAVLOV'S STUDENTS
AS CIRCUS TAMERS – Mass Conditioning Through Speech, Political
Conditioning.
The International Law of Propaganda, By Bhagevatula Satyanarayana
Murty, discussing I.P. Pavlov, Conditioned Reflexes, an Investigation of the
Physiological Activity of the Cerebral Cortex. Pavlov’s theories have
inspired several works on propaganda and brainwashing techniques. Sergei
Chakhotin, The Rape of the Masses (London, Routledge & Kegan Paul),
William Sargant, Battle for the Mind, Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1957)
and also citing to Rape of The Mind, by A.M. Meerloo.

Court of Appeals held, that “were so clearly the product of ‘mental

coercion’ that their use as evidence was inconsistent with due process of
law”, the United States Supreme Court said “exhausted suspect's ability to
resist interrogation was broken to almost trance-like submission by use of
the arts of a highly skilled psychiatrist.” It violated the most fundamental
rights of the suspect to have this confession used, because it was not of his
own free will.
Hypnosis on a non-consenting person may arguably constitute fraud38,
undue influence, and/or potentially other violations of the law, depending
on the jurisdiction.39 Undue influence is “persuasion that overcomes the
will without convincing the judgment.”40 Hypnosis works on mental and
emotional weaknesses fitting the legal definition precisely. For example,
with hypnotizing someone to get access to that person’s bank account –
even the hypnotist makes the person believe they want to do it, they are
using techniques which create an undue influence on the person.
The Executive Committee of the American Psychological Association
Division of Psychological Hypnosis has said, “clinical hypnosis should be
used only by properly trained and credentialed health care professionals
(e.g. licensed clinical psychologists), who have also been trained in the
clinical use of hypnosis and are working within the areas of their
professional expertise.” The Appellate Division of the Los Angeles County
Superior Court has held that practice of hypnotism as curative measure or
mode of procedure by one not licensed to practice medicine amounts to
unlawful practice of medicine.41
What Obama is doing is making some people’s support of him in this
election not of our own free will. He us using hidden techniques so we
cannot even question the commands he is slipping into our subconscious.
Many genuinely want to support him like smokers want a cigarette, and as
smokers, we find the logic to justify how we feel.
The hypnosis technique of “pacing and leading” to sideline rational
judgment
In a nutshell, “pacing and leading” is using hypnosis to bypass the critical
factor. By bypassing the cognitive functions that would normally critically
analyze and scrutinize information, the hypnotist tricks the patient’s
subconscious mind into accepting external information from the hypnotist
into the subconscious, as a hypnotic suggestion, as absolutely true. It is a
more powerful implant of information than even the subject can usually
communicate to themselves with his or her own thoughts.
Pacing and leading is a fundamental tool in conversational or covert
hypnosis.42 Normally only what you consciously know to be true is
allowed to pass. If you are a smoker, but tell yourself consciously that you
Fraud does not require an express false statement, though subconscious
connections to JFK and the like are clearly that. Fraud can also constitute
withholding information in some cases, such as when there is a duty to
disclose.
One article by Peter C. Johnson, describes conversational hypnosis as mind
control - http://ezinearticles.com/?Cant-Control-Your-Children?-Learn-
Conversational-Hypnosis&id=959004 - While stating it is “not illegal” in
his opinion, this example is relating to using it to get your children to do
things, and he cannot make a statement on what is legal across a spectrum
of varied situations, including the use of hypnosis to get political support,
votes and campaign contributions.
Undue influence is “Undue influence, in the sense we are concerned with
here, is a shorthand legal phrase used to describe persuasion which tends to
be coercive in nature, persuasion which overcomes the will without
convincing the judgment. (Estate of Ricks, 160 Cal. 467, 480-482, 117 P.
539.) The hallmark of such persuasion is high pressure, a pressure which
works on mental, moral, or emotional weakness to such an extent that it
approaches the boundaries of coercion. In this sense, undue influence has
been called overpersuasion. Kelly v. McCarthy, 6 Cal.2d 347, 364, 57 P.2d
118.” Odorizzi v. Bloomfield School Dist., 1966, 246 Cal.App.2d 123, 54
Cal.Rptr. 533.
People v. Cantor, 198 Cal.App.2d Supp. 843, 18 Cal.Rptr. 363, Cal.Super.
1961
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p13.

are a nonsmoker, that information is stopped by your own critical factor,

not allowed to pass into your own subconscious because your own critical
factor knows it is not true. Thus even you can’t get information past your
own critical factor.
Dr. Erickson discovered that through pacing, a hypnotist could neutralize
the filter of a person’s critical factor so he can slip suggestions past the
critical factor into the subconscious. 43
“Pacing” can be almost any technique by which a hypnotist gets your
critical factor to lower its critical analysis and scrutiny of the information
you are receiving.
The “lead” is the new information, suggestion, or command the hypnotist
wants to implant.
When done effectively, the hypnotist can “lead” – implant suggestions and
commands that pass through into your subconscious that will be taken as
unquestionably true.44 The lead can be something you are aware of such as
a statement you hear, or it can be embedded, hidden, something you are
completely unaware of consciously, yet still pass through into your
subconscious. The word “suggestion” is used in hypnosis, but it is not a
suggestion as we think of one, that we consider and rationalize.
“Suggestion” in the hypnosis world is actually a suggestion into the
subconscious, something your mind will take as unquestionably true, thus,
in effect, more powerful than even a command as we use this term.
How pacing is done:
Working with our analogy, if many people entering the club are searched by
the security guard and nothing questionable is found, the security guard’s
defense efforts become tired, lazy, and lowered. Normally though,
everything in our world is questionable keeping the critical factor sharp and
alert. The hypnotist paces the subject by providing the mind with
information that is undeniably true, something the subject strongly believes,
or is absolutely and immediately verifiable, in successive patterns until the
subject’s guard is lowered.
This pacing can take the form of almost any information that serves as an
accurate representation of the subject’s current ongoing experience,
including what they see, what they hear, what they truly believe, and
describing or imitating the subject’s conscious experience or even
subconscious experience, such as their breathing.45 Breathing is a common
pace in hypnosis. Breathing is something conscious when we are focused
on it, but when we do not focus on it, we do not stop breathing, it is simply
taken over by the subconscious mind. Often times, just the mention of
“breathing” is sufficient to bring the activity into conscious focus for
seconds or minutes, until such focus is not needed and the subconscious
takes over it again.
Pacing can be such as obvious statements the subject truly believes or
knows are true, or subconscious act/messages that the hypnotist does which
the subject is not even aware of, e.g. mimicking or describing
Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1
Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1 David X’s
educational video, “How to Hypnotize with Covert Hypnosis and Hypnotic
Language” See video online, such as at:
http://www.revver.com/video/834827/how-to-hypnotize-with¬covert-
hypnosis-and-hypnotic-language/ Essentially, David X summarizes the
conversational hypnosis process as: 1. Capturing focus, 2. bypassing the
critical factor/thinking, 3. activating an unconscious or emotional response,
(emotional people will not reason) and 4. leading those responses to the
outcome the hypnotist desires.
45 Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D.
Volume 1, p138 – Pacing, Distraction, and Utilization of the Dominant
Hemisphere.

breathing. Commonly, the hypnotist describes the experiences, sights,

thoughts, and feelings the subject is having.46
This is not just a politician saying what his audience is sure to agree with.
The hypnotist purposely describes absolute truths on multiple levels related
to the subject’s current reality, and thereby tricks the subject’s critical factor
into lowering its guard and gets the subject to accept the hypnotist as a
source for information to be taken into the subconscious as absolutely true.
The brain regularly absorbs representations of the subject’s current ongoing
experience, what the subject sees, hears, feels, as a natural part of
communication between the conscious and subconscious mind. Pacing
works by disguising information as part of the subject’s ongoing verifiable
experience to trick the critical factor into letting that information pass
through to the subconscious.
By repeatedly providing information to the subject that the subject
genuinely believes to be true, the hypnotist disguises himself as a source for
absolutely true information acceptable to your subconscious. The hypnotic
commands of the hypnotist can be disguised as information being
communicated in between the conscious and unconscious mind of the
subject. The subject trusts this information believing it is approved by the
conscious mind, and the command slips through the critical factor of one
person hypnotized, or millions watching on TV.
Unknowingly to the conscious mind, when this happens, the lead, or the
new information from the hypnotist is accepted as absolutely true, and
becomes part of the subject’s deepest beliefs.47
Specific examples of Obama using 14 separate hypnotic pacing statements
in his Denver 2008 Convention speech
Elementary pacing examples from Obama include, “now is the time”, and
“as I stand here before you.” These statements are undeniably true in the
simplest terms and commonly used parts of his pacing techniques, because
of course now is the time, and if he is there speaking, of course he is
standing before us. These are things the hypnotist says that are verifiably
true, and used to lower our critical factor defenses to allow implantation of
subconscious messages.
Looking at “pacing” statements alone, Obama’s 2008 Democratic National
Convention Speech in Denver48 uses them throughout. Yet, nobody
suspects these language patterns to be anything other than an innocent part
of his powerful speech.
Three of Obama’s favorite hypnotic paces are “that’s why I stand here
tonight”, “now is the time”, and “this moment.” Just these three pacing
statements are used by Obama a total of fourteen (14) times throughout this
single speech.
In this speech, Obama essentially said “as I stand before you tonight” three
separate times, around the beginning, middle, and end of the speech to
continue pacing the audience throughout, as follows:
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p138 – Pacing, Distraction, and Utilization of the Dominant Hemisphere.
Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1
Speech excepts from Obama’s Denver 2008 Democratic Convention
Speech, http://www.demconvention.com/barack-obama/

1. That's why I stand here tonight. Because for two hundred and thirty
two years, at each moment when that promise was in jeopardy, ordinary
men and women - students and soldiers, farmers and teachers, nurses and
janitors -- found the courage to keep it alive.
2. The fundamentals we use to measure economic strength are whether
we are living up to that fundamental promise that has made this country
great - a promise that is the only reason I am standing here tonight.
3. But I stand before you tonight because all across America
something is stirring. What the nay-sayers don't understand is that this
election has never been about me. It's been about you.
In the same speech, Obama says “now is the time” six times throughout.
While he phrase is apparent, it sounds to everyone like just his power-
phrase or theme for the speech.
1. Now is the time to end this addiction, and to understand that drilling
is a stop-gap measure, not a long-term solution. Not even close.
2. Now is the time to finally meet our moral obligation to provide
every child a world-class education, because it will take nothing less to
compete in the global economy.
3. Now is the time to finally keep the promise of affordable, accessible
health care for every single American.
4. Now is the time to help families with paid sick days and better
family leave, because nobody in America should have to choose between
keeping their jobs and caring for a sick child or ailing parent.
5. Now is the time to change our bankruptcy laws, so that your
pensions are protected ahead of CEO bonuses; and the time to protect
Social Security for future generations.
6. And now is the time to keep the promise of equal pay for an equal
day's work, because I want my daughters to have exactly the same
opportunities as your sons.
It is no coincidence that he happens to use these phrases that are
subconscious pacing statements because they are immediately and
verifiably true by their most simplistic terms, and cause the subconscious to
accept the hypnotist as a source for such absolute truth.
Obama also says essentially “this moment” five times, serving the same
pacing purpose.
1. We meet at one of those defining moments - a moment when our
nation is at war, our economy is in turmoil, and the American promise has
been threatened once more.
2. This moment - this election - is our chance to keep, in the 21st
century, the American promise alive.
3. You have shown what history teaches us - that at defining moments
like this one, the change we need doesn't come from Washington.
4. America, this is one of those moments.
5. At this moment, in this election, we must pledge once more to
march into the future
Notice how for each instance without exception, he has words before or
after “moment” to make it absolutely immediately and verifiably true, such
as “we meet at”, or “this election”, moments “like this one”, or “this is one
of those moments.” The notion that this is all also a coincidence is absurd.
This is carefully crafted hidden hypnotic pacing. And, this is only the
beginning.
Obama put these 14 pacing hypnotic language patterns into his speech
knowing them to be part of a hypnotic trance induction. It is not “just the
way he talks” nor “coincidence.” A more detailed play by play analysis of
Obama’s hypnosis techniques in this and other speeches is below.

Obama uses a variety of other statements nobody can disagree with as

pacing statements. More simplistic are statements like “we need change”,
“We are the hope of our future,” and “Yes we can.” They are logically
meaningless but they hit a chord, a subconscious chord, especially in
younger people, and are his most powerful words. See the analysis on
vagueness and trans-derivation below.
However, such pacing statements alone are only a small part of the complex
hypnotic trance induction Obama intentionally uses.
Embedded and hidden meanings – “deep structure” of language vs “surface
structure”
Most people do not realize Obama is using hypnosis because everything he
does is below the radar – hidden inside normal speech. There is nothing
special about these words or phrases to give them away as “hypnosis.” The
general public does not have an understanding of the field, and Obama is
hoping that these explanations will be too difficult for the general public to
understand, and too complex for the media to try and explain. In fact,
Obama is counting on the media to do what it has done for the past few
elections – control their coverage to keep the race as close to even as
possible until the end, making the story exciting, so that the effects of
Obama’s hypnosis triggered in the voting booth will push him over the edge
to victory.
The communications we are aware of are called the “surface structure” –
that is what the subject hears and realizes. The science of hypnosis requires
understanding the “deep structure” of what the subject sees, hears, and
experiences – the communication that is designed for our subconscious to
receive. our brains delete, change, distort, and jumble content on its way to
the subconscious mind. Hypnotists speak in a manner to put us into trance,
and then intentionally send “deep structure” communications designed for
only our subconscious minds without conscious awareness.
While below is an example of hidden pacing, imbedded commands in all
aspects of hypnosis serve the purpose of making commands to the client
indirectly, and thereby avoiding resistance. Indirect suggestion is such a
pivotal part of conversational hypnosis, that entire hypnosis practice
manuals have been written precisely on indirect suggestion techniques.
Obama has used as part of pacing, statements such as “we rise and(or) fall
as one nation.” That sounds powerful and true. In fact it is something no
one can argue with, as all pacing is. But why the “or fall” part if he is trying
to be optimistic? The hidden subconscious effect is that Obama is pacing us
in a hidden way we don’t even realizeRemember, pacing is something that
is unquestionably true and is an accurate
For “change we can believe in” – the word “believe” is key – it is one of the
most powerful words in hypnosis, and a word anchored continually by
Obama’s apparently innocent hand gestures.
The Illinois senator sprinkles speeches with “we” and “you” – “Yes we can”
and “you have done what the cynics said we couldn’t do” – as if he were as
much guiding a movement as running for president. How the Candidates’
Speaking Styles Play, By Ariel Sabar | July 11, 2008 edition,
http://features.csmonitor.com/politics/2008/07/1 1/how-the- Killer Influence
Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1, states how genuinely
difficult it is to get caught using covert hypnosis, because without an
understanding of the techniques, there is nothing to suggest any element of
hypnosis. Often you can only even detect that hypnosis is being used by the
effects, such as irrational actions. See
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Covert_hypnosis - Signs you’re not using
analytical mind.
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p153
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p172
See, for example, Conversational Hypnosis, A Manual of Indirect
Suggestion, By Carol Sommer
See discussion on trans-derivation below regarding alternate deep
structures.

These\representation of the subject’s ongoing experience. It is not just that

the nation rises and falls, but as we breathe, our chest “rises and falls.” We
are not aware of it consciously, but with this statement we are being
subconsciously paced by Obama’s words. Thus, without even realizing it,
Obama elicits a subconscious response - us subconsciously increasingly
seeing Obama as a source of acceptable absolute truth.
Notice how Obama rarely if ever asks for our vote in his speeches. (or
money) After repeated and continual pacing an entire audience of millions
with statements that are undoubtedly true that lower our critical factors’
defenses, Obama just slips in the hypnotic command (the lead) e.g. .. .“and
that is why I will be your next President.”
The hyper-confidence Obama uses, after having used multiple language
patterns to lower rational defenses, is because he must speak in a way that
your subconscious mind will have no reason to doubt. This does not raise
suspicion because politicians generally have to sound over-confident, e.g.
saying they will win. The reason Obama sounds so hyper-confident with
certain language patterns is because he has to in order to input a command
effectively so your subconscious takes it as absolute truth.
How Ericksonian “linking statements” mimic the way the brain accepts
information
After pacing you repeatedly in multiple ways and on multiple levels as
described above, and thus lowering your cognitive critical factor defenses,
the hypnotist will implant a “lead” - the command or absolute
unquestionable truth he places in your subconscious. Essentially, the pace
or truth is connected to the new hypnotic message or “lead” using
connecting or linking language. Paces are connected to the lead through the
use of the linking words including “and”, “as”, and “because” or “that is
why.”59 The latter linking words each being increasingly more powerful
than the former, especially the ones containing an element of causation,
because causation mirrors the way the subconscious mind accepts
information.
Saying, for one example: “We need change.. .and. ..that is why I will be
your next President.” is a basic pace and lead. No person can disagree with
“we need change.” Change is inevitable anyway, certainly when problems
exist. However, the fact that change will happen, or that we need change,
has absolutely nothing to do with being a valid reason why the choice for
President should be none other than Barack Obama.
56 See Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D.
Volume 1, staring p 16 and throughout – pacing techniques describing the
subjects ongoing observable experience such as breathing in and out is a
frequently used and primary pacing technique. “In standard inductions, the
hypnotist will frequently use descriptions such as. ..breathing in and out.. .in
the process, the hypnotist is making himself into a sophisticated bio-
feedback mechanism .. .to.. .match the client’s subjective experience on
both conscious and unconscious levels.
See Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D.
Volume 1, staring p 16
See McCain ad “The One” Obama is asked, “do you ever have any
doubts?” He responds, “never” and smiles obviously.
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p19, re implied causative and cause and effect statements, “the strongest
form of linkage occurs with what we call Cause – Effect. ..The important
feature of these types of linkages is not whether the logic of the statement is
valid, but simply whether they constitute a successful link between the
client’s ongoing behavior and what the client experiences next.” See a
detailed discussion of the linking statements and causal linguistic process
modeling including, “as”, “while”, “during”, “and”, starting p146.
Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1
Re causation - “this structure mirrors the structure of internal belief.” -
Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p19, causation is “the strongest form of linkage.” See also Killer
Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1.

Logically there is no connection at all between “change” and why he

should be President. Same when Obama describes how bad the economy is,
and how bad government is, and then follows with “and that is why I want
to be your next President.” When he has only listed problems, the logical
derivative is only that someone who is good at solving those problems
should be President. But he has not made any logical argument as to why it
should be him.
As a Harvard attorney, Obama knows clearly that his speeches have faulty
logic. But the use of these basic words as hypnotic linking statements in
your subconscious, connects an absolute truth you believe deeply, from a
(now) trusted source of absolute truths, to a new message that is slipped
past the critical factor because it comes from the same trusted source, using
the fundamental way your brain understands information.
The subject walks away believing we need change, therefore we need
Obama. It doesn’t matter whether the cause and effect linking statement has
any truth or logical connection to it. It works because it links statements the
subject knows subconsciously to be true, with statements from the
hypnotist, that the hypnotist tricks the subconscious mind to believe are
connected, and thus also absolutely true at the subconscious level.
Basics of Obama’s pacing and leading: The “because we need change, that
is why I should be your next president” argument
Building on this basic framework, you do not hear specifics largely because
much of Obama’s entire presentation is pacing the audience. Obama’s
sentence structure is often exactly what is taught by Erickson in ways that
cannot be coincidence. If he went into specifics, he would not be pacing, he
would be encouraging the use of the conscious mind, something he is
attempting to avoid. Obama’s entire campaign, essentially, can be
summarized as:
1. The economy is bad, or the country is going in the wrong direction
(pace) or we need to get an education for every child (whatever statements
no one can disagree with (pace) and therefore creates a “yes-yes-yes”
response, or “yes room.”)64
2. Change (can be used as a pace, an anchor, and/or a preprogrammed
response)
3. And or because or that is why (conjunction linking statement)65
4. I will be your next President. (subconscious lead)
Saying that things are bad and we need change is only a logical basis for the
conclusion that we need someone able to solve our current problems for
President – but the suggestion that the person to do this is Obama is
rationally under-supported or entirely unsupported. It doesn’t matter
though, because the connection is made on the subconscious level through
the use of linking statements applied precisely per Ericksonian techniques.
Obama says he offers hope, but actually much of Obama’s pacing is
negative, e.g. based on how negative things are. In fact, anger works well as
an emotion with which to change behavior through hypnosis. Notice how
Obama rarely if ever smiles during the substantive parts within his formal
hypnotic speeches.
Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1
The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor
Ledochowski , p35/631
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D.
Volume 1, p147

fact, he has been described as looking angry.66 The hypnotic analysis is

simple, angrily pointing while frowning and making emotionally strong
points in speeches send the subconscious message of a person in
commanding authority over you ordering you to act a certain way.67 Many
feel is that Obama is the person for whom to vote because he magically
“inspires”, when in fact, Obama has commanded subconsciously.
Obama says he is the person with judgment, and he says he is the person to
solve our problems because he recognizes what is wrong, but these are
logically empty arguments. His arguments based on his “ability to see”
what is wrong provides no real logical basis. His point is no more advanced
nor specific than the average listener’s viewpoint. He opposed the war in
Iraq in 2003, but so did half the world, logically, making Obama no more
qualified than half the planet to be President. However, because he uses
pacing and leading so effectively, he says, “because we need change, that is
why I want to be your next President” - it is absorbed into the subconscious
as absolute truth. The fact that this argument has no logic is irrelevant to
such feelings. Similarly, just because Obama powerfully says “its time for
new energy and new ideas” doesn’t mean he actually has any new ideas, but
through his hypnotic techniques, that’s what people walk away feeling.
Obama’s speeches as one big hypnotic trance induction using extra slow
speech, rhythm, tonalities, vagueness, visual imagery, metaphor, and raising
of emotion
Everyone knows the sensation of hanging on Obama’s every word as he
speaks. It is no accident. In fact, Obama intends to speak in such a way that
it is almost impossible to listen at all without hanging on his every word.
His unnaturally slow, rhythmical, four to eight word phrases with huge
pauses after, are delivered to be complete ideas by themselves on some
level, even though only part of a sentence or complete thought. He is
sensitive to exactly how to speak to fixate your attention based on his
understanding of hypnosis.
Obama’s speeches often use an unnaturally slow language to start.
Unnaturally slow speech is a common hypnotic technique in order to allow
the subject time to respond to suggestions, imagine images, and feel
sensations conjured by the hypnotist.68 The unnaturally slow speech holds
focus intensely, because the mind waits for new input, and is meanwhile left
analyzing what it has just heard. Absorbing attention is about making sure
people’s thoughts are what you set out for them. The intense focus of the
conscious mind frees the subconscious mind to act beyond normal
constraints of what the conscious mind thinks is real or normal or even
proper.69 Hypnosis is so closely aligned with this super intense focus on a
single thing that the study of mesmerism actually almost renamed hypnosis
“monoideaism” – mono for one, and
See discussion and images below regarding his Democratic Convention
Speech for 2008
The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor
Ledowchowski, p104 of 631
How To Perform Hypnosis, by: William Hewitt, The Llewellyn
Encyclopedia, http://www.llewellynencyclopedia.com/article/225 You do
need to give some thought and practice to the pace of your speech. The
speech pattern needs to be slow enough to give the subject time to respond
to your directions and yet fast enough to retain his or her attention and
interest. If you go too slow, the subject’s mind will most likely wander to
other thoughts. You want to maintain the subject’s attention to your voice.
You will find that some people need a faster pace while others need a
slower pace. Experience will help you find just the right pace. A pause of
two to five seconds is a good average.
69 The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor
Ledochowski , p33/631

We all know what it is like to go along with our imaginations on the ride
Obama takes us on with his powerful metaphors, and captivating visual
images and sensations, and passionate emotion as his speeches accelerate
from unnaturally slow, into fireworks. Being hypnotized is enjoyable,
reportedly affecting both serotonin and endorphins in the body.
Per the definition of hypnosis by Dr. Ansari, hypnosis is essentially the
subject’s fixation of attention, and while in that state of hyper-
suggestability, receiving a suggestion from the hypnotist. Every type of
hypnotic induction involves a fixation of attention, which is what Obama
accomplishes with his extraordinarily slow and rhythmical and powerful
speech pattern, hand gestures, and logo, always present on his podium,
small and barely noticeable (consciously).
Hypnotists use a rhythm of phrases of few words, usually approximately
four to eight word phrases, almost like a melody, not just because it holds
attention. Such rhythm to be used is taught as part of conversational
hypnosis. The “melody” of words delivered by the hypnotist in almost a
music like fashion accesses the non-dominant hemisphere because that is
where music is interpreted.
A hypnotist can become a master of using rate of speaking, tonalities, and
pauses to communicate indirect suggestions. Hypnotists also use tonality
and changes in tonality while speaking to hypnotize and send subconscious
messages.74 Based on Erickson’s advancements, entire works have been
written just on indirect suggestion, hidden meanings within language, and
communicate of those hidden meanings to only the subconscious mind of
the subject.
The use of Ericksnian “vagueness” in speech as a linguistic induction tool:
“Change” and “Yes we can.”
We all know Obama continually uses vague statements without being
specific of their meaning, including “yes we can”, and “change.” In fact, he
gets audiences to chant them.
Remember the three dimensions of Ericksonian trance induction discussed
above:
1. Pacing and distraction of the dominant (language) hemisphere;
2. Utilization of the dominant hemisphere, language processing which
occurs below the level of awareness;
3. Accessing of the non-dominant hemisphere;
A statement that we hear consciously contains only one surface structure
(unless we do a double-take and realize a secondary meaning). However,
one such statement can contain multiple deep structure meanings to our
subconscious.76 The process by which the mind searches between alternate
meanings is called transdiravational search .
The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor
Ledochowski , p33/631
Marshall Sylver, Hypnotist
The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor
Ledochowski, p94 of 631, The performance element of hypnosis: Rhythm
and tone (regarding using rhythm in conversational hypnosis to be more
compelling by being almost music-like)
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D.
Volume 1, p191 – Accessing the Non-Dominant Hemisphere by Melody
Using The Tonality Of Your Voice To Covertly Hypnotize Someone,
By Michael Bass, http://ezinearticles.com/?Using-The-Tonality-Of-Your-
Voice-To-Covertly-Hypnotize-Someone&id=737888
See, for example, Conversational Hypnosis, A Manual of Indirect
Suggestion, By Carol Sommer
See Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson,
M.D. Volume 1, staring p 164 – Ambiguity, surface structure vs. deep
structure, and derivation.
 The searching through these various meanings is part of what distracts the
rational part of the mind as part of hypnotic induction, even if we are not
consciously aware of our search between different meanings. This trans-
derivational search occurs below the level of awareness. A vague statement
introduced as part of a hypnotic induction and pacing and leading has
multiple functions in facilitating hypnosis – it makes the subject a
participant in the hypnotic process, it makes the subject select between
alternative meanings thereby ensuring a satisfactory pacing, and depending
on the nature of the vagueness, it employs his linguistic (or cognitive)
processes with a trans-derivational search for meaning in the vague
statement.
“The unconscious mind responds to openings, opportunities, metaphors,
symbols and contradictions. Effective hypnotic suggestion, then, should be
"artfully vague", leaving space for the subject to fill in the gaps with their
own unconscious understandings - even if they do not consciously grasp
what is happening. The skilled hypnotherapist constructs these gaps of
meaning in a way most suited to the individual subject - in a way which is
most likely to produce the desired change.”78
The fact that Obama uses vague statements with which nobody can disagree
is not just politics, it is part of the linguistic component piece of the puzzle
of Obama’s knowing and intentional use of Ericksonian hypnosis
techniques.
When Obama says “change” is can mean a lot of different things to
everyone. He is not specific in what he means because then he would lose
his pacing of the audience. Obama creates a trans-derivational search just
by saying the vague word change, allowing that message of change to slip
into the subconscious, as a command, that he has associated with himself in
a number of subconscious and conscious ways. People do not rationally
desire a change they do not have any idea of what it means. Some of the
people want change in this election but cannot explain what Obama will
actually do and can’t name anything Obama has changed in his 46 years are
supporting him because his implantation of this hypnotic suggestion of
“change” has been effective. partly why he is so frustrated about McCain
saying that he, the maverick is the true change candidate, is because Obama
spent all this time programming change, and doesn’t want McCain getting
votes from Obama’s hypnotic programming.
Use of visual imagery and imagination as an induction tool
Visual imagery, like Obama’s, is a key component of facilitating hypnotic
trance induction. Using metaphor in hypnosis is especially effective because
it engages the conscious and unconscious mind at the same time,
communicating logically while activating imagination and emotion allows
the use of “ultra-compelling communications.”
Imagination is a powerful hypnotic tool because creativity is an altered state
of consciousness.
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, starting p 170 – While this discussion discusses mostly language patterns
that have secondary meanings which are specific interpretations, the
concepts are applicable to all vagueness. See
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Milton_H._Erickson, Indirect Techniques re
vagueness as part of hypnotic induction. See also The Power of
Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor Ledochowski, Appendix 2
– p541/631 – With artfully vague language, the listener is employed to give
the language concrete meaning, that search for meaning is called a trans-
derivational searh which is a specialized trance state.
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Milton_H._Erickson, Indirect Techniques
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p180-191, quoting Erickson, Deep Hypnosis and its Induction, 1967, p.9,
“the utilization of imagery in trance induction almost always facilitates the
development of similar or related, more complex hypnotic behavior.
David Livingston, www.hypnosis101.com “Triggering Emotions During
Hypnosis: Anchor Collapsing”

Together, all three dimensions of Ericksonian trance induction are present,

as well as all three means of hypnotically accessing the non-dominant
hemisphere are present in Obama’s speeches (Dr. Erickson’s three classes as
visualization, melodic accession and linguistic) 82.
Per the Power of Conversational Hypnosis, the four steps to hypnosis are
also identical to the principles of Obama’s speech.
1. absorb attention.
2. bypass the critical factor (with pacing)
3. create an unconscious response (the classic one is emotion) and
4. lead the subconscious mind to the desired outcome.
An emotional response is an unconscious response. Raising of emotion is a
fundamental technique in hypnosis to make the subject more
programmable, more effectively, because emotion is a subconscious
reaction, and can be connected to other subconscious elements, including
commands.
Obama uses a visually, cognitively, and emotionally stimulating language
that forces your mind to follow slowly by experiencing his phrases, instead
of just listening to them. The pauses never get boring like other people who
speak slowly, because each phrase by Obama that is only a few words long,
is by itself sufficient to capture your attention, and hold it with thought, or
imagination, or an image, until the next phrase is spoken. Visual and
sensory imagery in the hypnotist’s speech is an effective element that uses
the subject’s own imagination while listening to the speech to bring them
deeper into trance.

Together, every hypnotic element is present in Obama’s speeches, all

working together to hypnotize the audience. You will notice Obama has all
of these in his speeches, unnaturally slow language in simplistic phrases
which catch and hold your attention, and countless images that grab and
hold your imagination, such as “turn the page”, and “a breeze is blowing
across this nation,. ..and change is in the air.” and “write the next chapter in
American history.”
“There’s a new breeze blowing across this nation...”88 The phrase is a
visual and hypnotically captivating statement that you cannot disagree with
because it makes your subconscious associate relaxation, pleasure, and
other emotions and your most tranquil moment with his voice, preparing
you for his following sentence, “and change is in the air.”
The stacking of hypnotic language patterns in 40+ minute long speeches
The more a hypnotist paces and leads you, and uses other hypnotic speech
patterns in succession, the more effective they become at manipulating you
because the repetition wears down your critical factor. Doing what Obama
does once or twice doesn’t do as much, but doing it throughout a speech,
and continuously throughout a campaign, subconsciously brainwashes you.
http://www.hypnosis101.com/stock-metaphor.htm
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p60, Inquiry with Aldous Huxley An example from Erickson, is “you
know how a raindrop can cling to a leaf before it finally lets go.”
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p199.
The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor
Ledochowski , p34/631
The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Meed and Igor
Ledochowski, p32 of 631. www.conversational-hypnosis.com
David Livingston, www.hypnosis101.com “Triggering Emotions During
Hypnosis: Anchor Collapsing”
http://www.hypnosis101.com/wordpress/hypnosis-tips/hypnosis-emotions/
“Using hypnosis, the information that was gathered during the guided
imagery session is now reframed into positive suggestions that are accepted
by the unconscious mind.” GUIDED IMAGERY & HYPNOSIS, By Rhona
Jordan, C.GIt, C.CHt.
http://www.lagunaplayhouse.com/onstage/2008/tranced/GuidedImagery.php
Barack Obama in his speech on Super Tuesday night
Obama made this statement in his speech on Super Tuesday.

Obama speaks for 40-50 minutes, 20-30 minute longer than most political
speeches. Have you ever wondered why Obama gives these long 40-50
minute speeches? Probably not, because most people do not even realize
time has gone by. This process of pacing then leading, pacing then leading,
again and again, as well as using other hypnotic language patterns is called
“stacking language patterns” (as in, one on top of the other)89 The
hypnotist blends the process with embedded commands, anchors, emotional
transfers, and other techniques. What occurs is that the critical factor is
bored, worn down, gets tired, and stops being critical because it is too much
work – then, the hypnotist’s effects increase.90
Obama’s unusual use of hand gestures as subconscious programming and
hypnotic anchoring designed to be triggered in the voting booth on
November 4th
While most people believe that Obama’s hand gestures as he speaks are
meaningless, or innocent emphasis to enhance the presentation, this may be
sometimes perhaps to reserve the argument that they are meaningless, but is
not always the case. Sometimes Obama does use his hand gestures simply
for emphasis or to help illustrate what he is saying. However, sometimes,
his hand gestures are designed to have very specific effect under the
principles of hypnosis. Obama uses certain hand gestures as hypnotic
anchors, and others to aid in hypnotic command implantation.
Anchoring is a hypnosis/NLP technique where the hypnotist programs the
subject to respond a certain way from a specific trigger or stimuli. A
"hypnotic anchor" is any stimulus that triggers a consistent psychological
state.
An anchor is essentially an internal state that is triggered by an external
stimulus
An example would be, a hypnotist eliciting a certain response from the
subject, whether outward or inward, e.g. emotional, and then the hypnotist
doing a certain act (the anchor) which is a touch, or a keyword, or signal,
that the hypnotist associates subconsciously to the response. The hypnotist
can then bring about that response just by repeating the anchor. It is similar
to how Pavlov would ring a bell whenever he fed his dogs, and then
eventually, his dogs would salivate just from the sound of hearing a bell
ring. The hypnotist stirs up feelings or emotions. “When that feeling is at its
strongest, “anchor” is by making a gesture.
Anchors do not have to be created or triggered by a physical touch, and
could be any symbol or gesture that is a unique association.
What is the different between innocent use of hand gestures by Obama and
deceptive hypnotic use of hand gestures? Obviously, it is Obama’s
knowledge of such hypnotic and manipulative effects of certain hand
gestures, and his intended use of such hand gestures for hypnotic effect.
Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1
Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1-6
Neuro-Linguistic Programming – a way of programming the subconscious
mind through language
‘Anchors occur throughout all of our sensory channels in a potentially
infinite number of ways. There are four keys to anchoring: The intensity of
the state; Timing (peak of experience); Uniqueness of the stimulus,
including the number of senses used (visual, auditory, kinesthetic, olfactory,
gustatory), and; Exact replication of the stimulus, or trigger..”
http://www.hypnos.co.uk/hypnomag/valente.htm See also, Anchoring is one
of the most useful nlp techniques developed by Bandler and Grinder, it's a
method for using the powerful unconscious resources of others to get the
responses you desire. http://www.nlp-hypnosis.ws/nlp_anchoring.htm
Gemma Bailey 4 Tips For Anchoring, An NLP Practitioners Tool
http://weslandinstitute.com/blog/date/2007/03/
Gemma Bailey 4 Tips For Anchoring, An NLP Practitioners Tool
http://weslandinstitute.com/blog/date/2007/03/

You may have noticed how Obama holds his thumb and forefinger.
Because a gesture is subconsciously linked by programming to a response,
it must be unique.95 Obama uses this thumb and forefinger hand position
essentially uniquely, differently than all other speakers, and continually, far
more frequently than other speakers who use any similar hand gesture. It
was even made fun of on Saturday Night Live.
So besides the fact that he has a somewhat unique hand gesture, which he
uses more often than other speakers, what is the proof that this is part of
Obama’s unethical use of hypnosis?
Obama uses his thumb and forefinger pressed together as a hidden (deep
structure) hypnotic anchor. He also uses it to deliver hypnotic commands.
The evidence it is not an innocent hand gesture e.g. for emphasis, but rather
as a hypnotic anchor is that Obama is repeatedly caught using it
extraordinarily often and specifically for very specific words and concepts
like “believe”, and “chose.” In fact, often he is caught using certain it for
such hypnotic programming words more so than at the point of his sentence
that he would be emphasizing. Specific examples are plentiful below.
Obama also uses hand gestures to aid in delivery of hypnotic commands,
and this is evident from his use of very specific hand gestures at very
specific times.
What is meant by the above two examples, is that while Obama’s hand
gestures often are simply for emphasis or to assist visually with his
narrative, they are caught repeatedly diverging from this purpose, and
following entirely different principles, the principles of hypnotic anchoring
and programming.
The hand gesture can symbolize anything, and it is possible that Obama’s
hand gesture of his thumb and forefinger pressed together symbolizes a “C”
for change, money, an infinite (hypnotic) connection between himself and
the audience (by pointing with his index finger to the audience repeatedly
and then emphasizing a point with his two fingers together, and others.
Most likely, because it is a hypnotic trigger, Obama’s thumb and forefinger
hand gesture, as shown below, is meant to hypnotically anchor and be
triggered by the voter’s own hand holding a pencil, at the voting booth, or
when signing in to vote. This way, the voter would trigger all of the
hypnotic programming right when Obama wants it triggered, while voting,
for maximum effect. It is actually a very convenient design to have an
anchor that looks like almost like an ordinary speech hand gesture, and also
looks like the holding of a pen. Obama rarely needs to twist his hand to
show you the backside. The image can be an effective anchor and trigger
even if not understood consciously.
Obama uses his thumb and forefinger hypnotic anchor in strategic ways. He
does this repeatedly and often, programming (anchoring) many messages
into your subconscious. The hypnotic anchor that Obama is programming
you with continually in his speeches is designed so that when you are in the
voting booth holding a pen, or sign in your name, and see the same image
Obama has been flashing at you throughout his campaign, you recall all of
the messages he delivered during his speeches as he flashed the hand signal
that consciously you didn’t even realize were connected. His subconscious
messages may influence your vote because you will be re-enacting what he
has been preparing you for by loading that image of you holding the pen
with his subconscious commands. Even people who did not intend to vote
for Obama may do so at
There are four keys to anchoring: The intensity of the state; Timing (peak of
experience); Uniqueness of the stimulus, including the number of senses
used (visual, auditory, kinesthetic, olfactory, gustatory), and; Exact
replication of the stimulus, or trigger..”
http://www.hypnos.co.uk/hypnomag/valente.htm

that moment. It is also effective because a primary message is Obama

himself, and Obama has to a certain degree, anchored himself to the image
of your hand as you hold a pen.
Obama is also caught loading this hand gesture with very specific concepts,
such as JFK, and then pointing this same hand gesture inward towards
himself a moment later, in ways that are clearly no accident, and ways in
which he does at no other time other than with a concept he expects us to
subconsciously associate with him.

Obama has also anchored and programmed you verbally with imagery for
another part of this same experience in the voting booth through his clever
use of the words “turn the page.” His “turn the page speech” hypnotically
anchors messages to the idea of literally turning the page, which you do not
realize consciously, but subconsciously means, e.g., the voting ballot
“page.” Thus, holding the pen and holding the paper ballot are anchored
your subconscious for an experiences that will be recreated when it is time
to act he has programmed you to act with multiple subconscious anchors
triggered by the same experience in the voting booth.98
As far as voting machines where you push buttons, or electronic voting,
Obama’s other very common hand gesture is pointing and poking, including
for example, pointing straight downward and saying “there is no destiny we
cannot fulfill.” Many speakers point occasionally, or on a very strong point,
but not continuously and strenuously like Obama points. Most have never
wondered what he is actually pointing at, or whether there is any rhyme or
reason to it, probably assuming it is simply part of his presentation. In fact,
Obama’s hand gestures often do symbolize what he is talking about
perfectly, so that when he does do something hypnotic with his hand
gestures, the message is received as having meaning subconsciously then
also.
Obama’s other primary hand gesture tool, pointing, also often has meaning.
Pointing sends the subconscious of the subject the message that a person in
authority over them is commanding a certain action; ordering you to act a
certain way and is a textbook part of hypnotic programming when giving
commands of actions the subject is required to take. If Obama said, “I
command you to vote for me”,
Photo
http://weblogs.newsday.com/news/local/longisland/politics/blog/2008/03/ob
amas_speech_what_did_it_mean.html
Photo http://www.zimbio.com/Race+Relations/articles/2 1
Barak+Obama+speech+race+thoughts+economy
In a blog questioning whether Barack Obama is the anti-christ, bloggers’
reports are described as “Some people have reported Obama appearing in
dreams and even mysteriously controlling their actions in the voting booth.”
http://timmcnellie.blogspot.com/2008/08/enter-anti-christ.html
which the subconscious mind interprets, because it often deletes negatives,
as “we fulfill destiny.”
The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor
Ledowchowski, p104 of 631
 people would get this consciously and reject it. However, if he does it in a
way that you only pick it up subconsciously, you can’t question it, and can’t
reject it. See the analysis below of Obama’s Denver Democratic National
Convention 2008 speech in which he uses this command as he is
programming the audience to vote for him on “November 4th.”
*Obama’s hypnotic command that “a light will shine down from
somewhere, it will light upon you, you will experience an epiphany, and
you will say to yourself, ‘I have to vote for Barack’”
An example of Obama using both of these hypnotic hand gestures, hypnotic
programming followed by hypnotic anchor back to back, in a way that can
be nothing other than hypnosis
In this speech by Obama, he is caught giving an overt set of two hypnotic
programs back to back. This is probably one of the most simple to
understand proofs of his undeniable use of hypnosis:
Perfectly demonstrating both the hypnotic hand gestures explained above is
Obama in this sentence. Yes, that’s correct. Barack Obama actually said in a
speech once:
“a light will shine down from somewhere, it will light upon you, you will
experience an epiphany, and you will say to yourself, “I have to vote for
Barack”’102
It was even made fun of in a McCain ad entitled “The One”, probably
without any realization that he was serious, and actually attempting to use
hypnosis103 In this statement, Obama went too far, too obviously, and was
clearly overtly hypnotically programming his audience. Probably, he
intended to use statements like this more often, and probably stopped either
because he thought it was too obvious, or because he was ridiculed for this
by Hillary and McCain, or both.
First, notice how voting for Obama is made absolutely compulsory with the
words “have to” – precisely as a hypnotic command. He is not asking for
our vote – he is telling us how we will vote.
Notice the language “light shining down”, and “it will light upon you” a
description of some supernatural (subconscious) force. This statement by
Obama leaves no doubt that he is using hypnosis – which a mysterious
force shining down and causing you to say to yourself obviously is. It
leaves no doubt that his mindset is on completely non-logical, but rather
mystical/supernatural (subconscious) forces will be compelling people to
vote for him. Why would a politician who logically convinces voters ever
joke about something like this? What purpose would there possibly be for
any politician ever saying that a mysterious force will guide you and you
will “have to” vote for me? This is potentially his worst slip up.
Video of Obama saying this phrase in this McCain ad
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mopkn0lPzM8
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mopkn0lPzM8
See the McCain ad entitled, “The One.” Available, e.g. at
www.johnmccain.com Hillary Clinton has also criticized this statement.

Notice the language, “you will experience an epiphany” – a revelatory

manifestation of a divine being.104 While hypnosis text contains
considerable information about hypnotists attaining g-d complexes, it is
quite disturbing to see a presidential candidate, even in jest, suggest that he
presence would cause such an “epiphany.” More disturbing, see below why
it is provably not jest in which he makes this statement.
Undeniable evidence that this is hypnosis: Obama hypnotically anchoring
the statement about a light shining down and an internal voice saying “I
have to vote for Barack”
Obama, while saying this sentence uses both his pointing gesture as a
hypnotic command implantation, and his thumb and forefinger gesture as a
hypnotic anchor, back to back.
In fact, watch this video to see how Obama uses these hypnotic hand
gestures.
Notice how Obama, as he says “you will say to yourself” – points up into
the air, as explained and analyzed, pointing is the hypnotic gesture for
commanding someone to do something, to perform a specific act.
Then, notice how Obama clearly uses his typical thumb and forefinger
hypnotic anchor for the words “I have to vote for Barack.”
By no cosmic miracle does this happen by coincidence. He is clearly using
a back to back set of hypnotic hand gestures while giving this sentence
containing overt hypnotic programming to be compelled by a mysterious
internal voice, taken over by a mysterious force, and to “have to” vote for
him.
It is clear he was not joking either. Because if he were joking, he would not
use any hand gesture as emphasis for the commands of a statement he was
not serous about. Let alone two hand gestures. If he uses a hand gesture
even for innocent emphasis, that means he is seriously emphasizing the
underlying statement, “a light will shine down from somewhere, it will light
upon you, you will experience an epiphany, and you will say to yourself, “I
have to vote for Barack”’
While this is a caricature of what Obama is doing throughout his campaign,
this statement cannot be viewed any other way than an obvious attempt at
sending a hypnotic message to voters in the voting booth.
Convincing without logic: “The Fierce! Urgency! of Now!” argument
(Obama caught anchoring)
While giving speeches, Obama often poses to himself the question: “Why
are you running so soon? You can afford to wait.” He then answers his own
question by saying the powerful language “because the Fierce! ... Urgency!
of ... Now!” First, notice how he posed the question to himself, to give
himself an opportunity to use the anchor. It doesn’t make much sense to
pose a question to oneself that you then fail to logically answer. He then
answers flashing just during those words his unique thumb in forefinger
anchoring hand gesture. These words have preprogrammed emotional
meaning to all of us, which he with such techniques anchors you to recall as
you hold the pen and “turn the page106” in the voting booth.107
American heritage Dictionary – Fourth Edition
Example: Billings, Montana, 1:07pm EST
See below more detailed discussion of Obama’s preprogrammed hypnotic
response use of his famous phrase “turn the page” and

Watching such gestures in his speeches, they are clearly intentionally

designed to coincide for a specific hypnotic purpose, not just innocent
emphasis and enhancement.
Notice how powerfully saying “the fierce urgency of now” provides
absolutely no logical basis for why he should not accomplish at least
something in the senate first, nor any logical argument as to why we should
elect an inexperienced person. It is effective because he uses causation, by
saying “because the fierce urgency of now!” Again, he uses the most
powerful causality linking statement “because” (with no logical value)
followed by powerful words “fierce” and “urgency” – both of which are not
only powerful but have embedded meaning to each listener, and then he
puts his emphasis on “now!” “Now” is not only a powerful word in
hypnosis because it brings the subject’s focus and attention on the present,
but, is a command that the voter take action “now.” Those in the marketing
field know that adding “now” to the end of any command, such as “buy this
product” “now!” increases sales by measured degrees.
Obama caught in subconscious hand gesture linking McCain to Bush
Giving a speech about healthcare in Raleigh North Carolina, right as
Obama mentions Bush and McCain, he slips a barely noticeable double
handed gesture with two fingers (the same of each hand) pointing parallel,
to suggest to you subconsciously that Bush and McCain are on parallel
courses.108 A primary value of this little gesture is critical because it is a
slip up, it is obvious. If there is any doubt that Obama is using hypnosis
including hidden hand signals, watching this tape clearly shows him
flashing a parallel signal which cannot be an accident, right when he
mentions Bush and McCain. From the ethical perspective, Obama could
make policy arguments and try to convince you logically that he feels
McCain will follow similar policies to Bush. However, Obama apparently
feels that he needs to do more to convince you. What Obama decides to do,
is to implant a subconscious image of parallel, which you subconsciously
associate with Bush and McCain, that in many people is the deep psyche
source of associating their policies. Whether true or not, Obama through
this subconscious programming, decided voters should not even be able
logically analyze or debate the issue, but should simply have the image of
parallel implanted without their conscious awareness to look at Bush and
McCain as parallel.
Obama caught using one-finger subconscious hand gesture regarding
Hillary

107 Speech by Barack Obama in Billings, Montana, “the fierce urgency of

now”, around 1:07pm EST “why are you running so soon, can afford to
wait, ruining now “because of the fierce urgency of now” and he flashes the
thumb and forefinger together exactly for that sentence in a way that cannot
be accidental.
108 Barack Obama in speech, Raleigh North Carolina June 9, 2008 ~1 :40m
EST
http://weblogs.newsday.com/news/local/longisland/politics/blog/givefinger.j
pg
 Obama was caught doing this. While pretending to be innocently
scratching, he was caught giving this subconscious signal regarding Hillary,
with his middle finger.110 This alone might be excused as an accident, but
in combination with everything else, is clearly another piece of the puzzle.
Like the “light shining down” statement discussed later, like his logo, like
the “lipstick on a pig”, and all of his other slip-ups, it also gives you some
insight into Obama’s true character. Further proving that this Hillary gesture
was not an accident, see Obama’s similar gesture regarding McCain
discussed directly below.
Obama caught in another undeniable subconscious hand gesture regarding
McCain
Even after Obama’s Hillary gesture above was caught by the media, he
didn’t stop. On Wednesday September 17, 2008 at around 2:56pm EST in a
televised speech in Nevada, Obama made some remarks about terrorism,
then the economy. Shortly after Obama began to discuss John McCain, with
his right hand he apparently reached up to scratch the top of his head, then
again scratch the top side of his head. As Obama pulled his hand away, he
clearly flashed the “L” symbol with his hand (thumb and finger
perpendicular), which to many young people, is the symbol for “loser.” He
did it as he was mocking how bad John McCain was on the economy. This
was no accident. It is unusual for someone like Obama with such perfect
body language to have to scratch in the middle of a speech anyway.
(without doing a hand gesture which insults his opponent) It is even more
unusual for someone to have to scratch in two different places as he did.
When watching this video, it is clear that he was pretending to scratch as an
intentional diversion to slip in the subconscious message. He even appeared
to hesitate to be sure to “pull it off” inconspicuously. It was intended to be a
subconscious message to millions of people, to associate the “loser” symbol
with John McCain. This act was designed to take away votes from John
McCain not with any logical explanation of policy differences, but with
messages to an unaware audience - messages to our subconscious that we
are not intended to question the correctness of.
To those who think this may have been accidental or coincidence, watch the
video of Obama on 8.4.2008, where Obama gives a speech discussing John
McCain’s economics. When Obama says “McCain” in the sentence
“Senator McCain has been eager to share some of his plans” – notice
Obama again flashes the “L” symbol with his hand.
PART 3 – WHAT OBAMA IS EXACTLY DOING – SPECIFIC
SPEECHES “PLAY BY PLAY”
This Part 3 is the primary analysis of the document. The quotes herein are
taken uncut from Obama’s speeches. Readers and experts are encouraged to
confirm this analysis by watching these videos firsthand, and seeing that the
language patterns, manner of speaking, and timing of hand gestures prove
undeniably the points raised in this document. All of these videos are
available online and example links are provided in the footnotes. The times,
minute: second (3:16 means 3 minutes 16 seconds) are measured per the
videos cited. While these are only a few examples, close examination of
most or all of Obama’s major speeches under expert scrutiny will likely be
found to contain hypnotic tactics throughout.
As evidence of Obama’s use of hypnosis, he generally doesn’t do these
hypnotic techniques and hand gestures as much when he gives impromptu
speeches that are not prewritten. Obama’s hypnosis is something he
carefully crafts, plans for, and rehearses. Town halls with impromptu
questions do not lend themselves to be a forum for Obama’s hypnosis, and
that may part of why he has avoided town halls with John McCain.
http://latimesblogs.latimes.com/washington/2008/04/obamaflipsoffcl.html
Obama’s California Democratic Convention speech 2007 - a “play by play”
of his undeniable use of embedded commands, hypnotic induction, and
hypnotic storytelling
Embedded suggestions are messages within other messages, in which while
the conscious mind is receiving one message (the surface structure), the
subconscious is receiving another, the real message. This can be done a
number of ways, including by change in tone, or pauses, even ones so
subtle the audience is not consciously aware of it, such as a split second
pause or breath by the hypnotist at a specific time.
Pauses during speech and changes in tonality and in emphasis are a primary
technique of conversational hypnosis. This is because you can say one
sentence, and buried within it is another word or phrase with another
meaning. A pause in speaking by the hypnotist, even is only for a split
second, even if you are not even consciously aware of it, can turn that
hidden meaning into a subconscious command because it is isolated, and
emphasized in the subconscious. The subconscious mind does not interpret
and analyze as the conscious mind does, and often many words are removed
“deleted” from what you experience, and only specific portions fall through
to the subconscious mind. His statement is heard by the audience in one
way, but subconsciously received another way, the way actually intended by
Obama.
Obama performs an undeniable Ericksonian hypnotic induction: Obama’s
“Turn the Page” Speech at the California Democratic Convention in 2007.
Note: While there are many examples and play by plays which are
undeniable evidence of Obama’s hypnosis. carefully reviewing and
understanding just this analysis of this part of this speech leaves little doubt
of Obama’s intentional use of hypnosis.
One journalist describes Obama’s turn the page speech as having “had the
California Democratic Convention spellbound for 23 minutes.” Seeing the
analysis below of just the first paragraph of this speech explains why his
audience was in a spell from the very beginning.
Obama began his speech: (notes added)
“It has now been a little over two months (pause) since we began (pause)
this campaign for the Presidency. (pause) In that time we have traveled all
across this country. (pause) And before every event we do (pause), I usually
have a minute to sit quietly and (pause) collect my thoughts. (pause) And
recently, I’ve found myself (pause) reflecting on (pause) what it was that
led me (different tone, and thumb and forefinger anchor for “me”) to public
service in the first place.”
Barack Obama’s speech to California Democratic Convention, 2007,
available at http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UZUXhCW-OGM
See a thorough discussion of embedded commands starting page 172 of
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson M.D.
See Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D.
Volume 1, throughout.
Barack Obama’s speech to California Democratic Convention, 2007
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UZUXhCW-OGM
By Frank D. Russo Barack Obama’s “Turn the Page” Speech Wows
California Democratic Convention,
http://www.californiaprogressreport.com/2007/04/barack_obamas_t_2.html

First, notice how much Obama uses storytelling in his major speeches,
especially at the beginning of nearly all of his speeches. Storytelling is a
primary hypnotic tool because it employs images, metaphor, the
imagination, rhythm, makes us feel like children, and takes us to another
time and place so the mind tells itself “it is only a story” and allows it to
pass into the subconscious. However, this is just the beginning.
Obama tells a hypnotic story to start this speech with his ultra-slow
speaking style with huge pauses after 4-8 word concepts, to force you to
hang on his every word.
But this is only a small part of the proof that he is intentionally using
hypnosis.
The key is, that the story he is telling is a story about a “trance theme.” In
one of the most popular conversational hypnosis courses available online,
the Power of Conversational Hypnosis, the first principle taught in how to
use hypnotic stories, is exactly what Obama does in this paragraph. This
primary technique is to “Use Simple Stories About Trance Themes”, or in
other words, tell stories about processes which are hypnotic, such as per the
examples given, relaxing on a holiday or being fascinated by a film.
Obama follows precisely this technique in telling a simple story in slow
hypnotic rhythm about himself “sitting quietly”, “collect his thoughts”, and
finding himself “reflecting.” Hypnotic stories use embedded suggestions so
that while in trance and you believe something is happening to a character
in the story, in reality the story is about you, implanting messages in your
subconscious. The story requires you to use your imagination, and then the
only way to understand the story is to imagine the themes Obama is
presenting.
Obama’s first storytelling language pattern about a trance theme is “Sit
quietly” – also a pacing statement because everyone in the audience is
sitting quietly. The story is, as taught by this course, “isomorphic” in the
sense that the story precisely mirrors what is happening with the subject e.g.
sitting quietly. Then, it is also an embedded command, because when
someone sits quietly, something they have rehearsed many times throughout
their lives, because external stimuli are absent, sitting quietly makes
someone’s thoughts turn inward or internally – as in trance. Notice how the
story is in past tense, but the trance theme (command) comes out in present
tense.
Notice how Obama puts the focus on this word “quietly” with the pause
afterward, to use it as a hypnotic message, as the silence emphasizes the last
word spoken. His pause after “sit quietly” also serves another purpose.
(Even though he says “and” after “quietly”, there is a substantial pause
there.) It is also a pace in the manner that Obama says the word “quietly .
..and”, and for a brief second there is silence afterward. He is in fact making
his statement about quietness an absolute immediately verifiable truth,
because he makes it true by pausing, and finds a way to pace you in yet
another way. The more different ways he can pace the audience on different
levels, the more effective it is.
Obama’s second storytelling language pattern about a trance theme is
“collect my thoughts.” Though
The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor
Ledochowski, “How to Destroy Resistance With Stories” p244 – discussion
of how “it’s just a story” and mind goes on “automatic pilot.”
The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor
Ledochowski, “How to Destroy Resistance With Stories” p245
The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor
Ledochowski, “How to Destroy Resistance With Stories” p245-246, and see
discussion how Dr. Erickson used a story about a tomato plant feeling good
to in fact make the patient feel good.
Your subconscious interprets the story and applies it to you, even though
Obama tells the story as if it were him speaking innocently about himself.
As a basic hypnosis example, I can say “don’t think of a black cat” – in
order to understand the message, you have to think of the cat – it doesn’t
matter that I say “don’t.”
The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor
Ledochowski, “How to Destroy Resistance With Stories” p246

Obama says it from his perspective, to make sense of it, and because of his
pacing, your subconscious also hears it as collect “my” thoughts, and thus
the minds of everyone in the audience is commanded to become more in
depth into each’s own thoughts, and go deeper into trance. Notice again this
story about past actions is again delivered in present tense.
Obama’s third storytelling language pattern about a trance theme is “I’ve
found myself reflecting.” It works similarly. The pause after “myself”, and
then again after “reflecting” cause the audience’s subconscious mind to pick
up on these commands. Thus Obama uses this as a command for all
listeners to collect their thoughts (as in hypnotic focus) and be reflecting
(essentially focus on another deeper level). Notice again how he starts out
telling the story in the past tense, but then says “reflecting” in the present
progressive tense to be a command for his audience to do what they are
doing now.
The course on conversational hypnosis is not the only source to say such
language has specific trance induction effect. See also Dr. Erickson’s
discussion of use of words like “reflecting”, and how a hypnotist will
construct sentences using the internal states consistent with a human being
undergoing trance induction (e.g. wondering, learning, thinking, feeling,
remembering, recalling, experiencing).
Obama then directs this focus. Obama says “reflecting on (what it was that
led) me” While the sentence continues, the hypnotic message is for the
audience to “be reflecting on me” (Obama). Obama’s emphasis and use of a
different tonality for the word “me” is undeniable – it can clearly be heard
when one is listening for it. When not consciously focused on that
emphasis, it is just heard by the subconscious. After being paced by three
separate stories with trance themes, delivered in hypnotic slow speech, the
subconscious mind is waiting for clues about what to be so focused on and
reflecting on, and surely enough, Obama tells our subconscious minds,
“me.” Because he is speaking, the message is actually to focus not only on
him, but his voice.
Then, perfectly timed, at the same moment Obama says the word “me”, he
flashes his thumb and forefinger hand gesture, his classic anchoring tool.
Watching this tape – it is amazing, yet undeniable. Obama is not just using a
subliminal message. He is knowingly and intentionally performing a
clinical Ericksonian hypnotic induction and putting his audience trance.
Obama has hidden undetectably in normal-sounding speech what a
hypnotist would do to start an induction by saying “sit quietly, begin to
internalize your thoughts, collect your thoughts, reflect, and focus on the
me and the sound of my voice.”123 He is talking to your subconscious
mind, preparing it for deeper induction and programming, while you think
he is just telling you stories. Then, for the rest of the speech, your
subconscious mind will be receptive to messages on this level that you wont
even be aware of.
Look at how cleverly Obama disguises this induction as him simply telling
you a story about himself sitting quietly and reflecting. Logically, there is
no reason why Obama would be talking about himself sitting quietly and
reflecting. Yet, you would never notice this unless you understood the
science behind it. By no
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p137 focus as a key to hypnotic induction.
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p214, Use of these words as part of an ill-formed sentence, as a means of
ensuring successful pacing of a client’s experience.(ill-formed here because
Obama says “recently found myself” – a play on words the literal meaning
of which is ill formed – as one cannot lose or find themselves.
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p17, the most basic pacing and induction example given is “as you sit
there, listening to the sound of my voice.”

astronomical coincidence could Obama simply happen to be telling an

irrelevant story which just happened to innocently contain three separate
hypnotic trance induction themes in precisely this way, with pauses after
each, with such an emphasis on the word “me” in conjunction with his
unique hand gesture for this word. Let alone a story allegedly about past
experiences that somehow ends up with each trance theme being delivered
in the present tense. There is no logical reason why he would have pauses
after the concepts “sit quietly”, “collect my thoughts”, and “reflecting on”
because those aren’t (supposedly) the ends of the idea nor the sentence.
Unless, that is exactly what he wants! There is no logical reason why he
would place an unnatural emphasis on the word “me” – nor reason to use
any hand gesture precisely for this word. What else watching this tape a few
times also shows, is that Obama is a pro. He performs this so smoothly and
comfortably, that he is clearly well rehearsed, and an expert.
Obama caught intentionally controlling pace in obvious attempt to maintain
trance
As additional evidence that Obama purposely places and keeps his audience
in trance, he is here caught controlling the tempo of his speech to make sure
everyone is kept in trance. He says at 5:30124 “Why would you want to go
into something dirty and nasty like politics?” Then, he realizes he is
speaking too fast, and he may not be properly leading everyone in the
trance he is inducing, so to ensure he has everyone in trance, he repeats the
sentence, slower, much slower, and with an extra extra long pause before
“politics.” The second time he says, “Why would you want to go into.. .
(huge pause to slow down the audience mentally and slow them down to his
unnaturally slow rhythm) .. .politics.” He does this to make sure he does not
speak so quickly as to lose the trance he is putting his audience into. This
act, obvious on video, clarifies the difference between a person who just
happens to be a good speaker who may have some innocent trance effect on
some, and someone who knowingly and intentionally makes sure he has
everyone in trance as he speaks. Watching this video, it is clear Obama
knows exactly what he is doing.
While there is too much to analyze every hypnotic aspect of such complex
speeches, this speech is a roller coaster ride of raising emotion, slow
accelerating to fast, moderate volume leading to loud, and at each peak of
the emotional highs he creates, he anchors the emotion he has raised to his
“turn the page” language pattern.
Occasionally an interesting concept can be caught, for instance this tidbit:
At one point when Obama talks about “parting of the sea”, his
corresponding hand gesture is not one of the sea parting with his palms
turning upward, but of pushing apart downward the water palms down, as if
he were himself g-d parting the water. Perhaps accidental, or perhaps an
intentional small part of some larger themes and concepts discussed below,
connected to the reason why people like Nancy Pelosi make some strange
comments, e.g. referring to Obama as “sent by g-d”, and other people refer
to Obama as the Messiah. The frightening part is, if Obama is doing this
intentionally, he either wants to send the subconscious message that he is
the messiah, or he actually believes that he is. More on this later.
5 minutes and 30 seconds into the start of the speech per the video used for
analysis.
Remarks of Senator Barack Obama: Final Primary Night, Date: 06/03/2008,
Location: St. Paul, MN, video available at
http://video.google.com/videosearch?
q=obama+speech+St.+Paul+&ie=UTF-8&oe=UTF-8&rls=org.mozilla:en-
US:official&client=firefox-
a&um=1&sa=N&tab=wv&oi=property_suggestions&resnum=0&ct=proper
ty-revision&cd=2#

Obama’s speech Tuesday after primaries ended June 3, 2008125 –

undeniable evidence of Obama’s use of hypnotic principles of anchoring,
deletion, distraction, and leading
Obama, also began his speech on the Tuesday night after Primaries were
over with an undeniable hypnotic induction, using the paragraph below.
First he said, in his ultra-slow speech with huge strategic pauses, “after fifty
four (pause) hard fought contests (pause) our primary season has finally
come to an end.” – A pace for which he got tremendous applause. Then,
Obama continued:
“Sixteen months have passed (pause) since we first stood together on the
steps of the Old State Capitol (pause) in Springfield, Illinois.(pause)
Thousands (pause) of miles have been traveled. (paused) Millions of voices
have been heard. (pause) And because of what you said (pause) because
you decided that change must come to Washington (pause); because you
believed (pause) that this year must be different than all the rest (pause);
because you chose (pause) to listen not to your doubts or your fears (pause)
but to your greatest hopes and highest aspirations (pause), tonight we mark
the end of(pause) one historic journey (pause) with the beginning of another
(pause) – a journey (pause) that will bring a new and better day to America.
(pause) Because of you (pause) tonight, I can stand here and say that I will
be (pause) the Democratic nominee (pause) for President of the United
States of America.”
The analysis below explains what Obama is really doing, and what message
your subconscious mind is actually receiving and why.
First, again the unnaturally slow speech as discussed, which forces you to
hang on his every word, creating focus. Notice how his pauses are designed
to have you reflect and ponder, and have your mind wander during each
pause. As your mind wanders, his words echo in the subconscious mind
while your conscious mind is left hanging. This technique is designed to
strain your critical factor’s efforts until it gets tired, and begins to tune out,
leaving your subconscious mind in his hands, unprotected.
While he starts out ultra-slow, his plan is to guide you by slowly
accelerating his speech to the point where he increases volume, raises
emotion, and delivers the lead. This is almost like how a horseracing
announcer starts out speaking slow when the horses take off from the
staring gate, and by the final stretch he is yelling and speaking very rapidly.
Just like how a horserace announces builds excitement in his audience to
promote the emotion-charged intensity and betting. It is not accidental. It is
done and learned and rehearsed to manipulate us. He brings the listeners
into trance with this process. Subconsciously, the raising of rate of speech,
volume, and emotion send the message that all of the before is building up
to his grand finale of the paragraph, the lead, e.g. that he will be President.
However, while a horseracing announcer does it once per race, Obama in
his speeches repeats this roller coaster again and again while combining it
with complex hypnotic pacing and leading, anchoring, and other
manipulative subconscious techniques. The repetitiveness is also
hypnotic.126 This is all part of the hypnotic trance induction.

Again, like all of Obama’s major speeches, he starts off from the beginning
using hypnotic storytelling. Storytelling e.g., of standing on the old steps
together, traveling thousands of miles, having heard millions voices. It is
not only magically captivating, but as discussed, is a textbook hypnosis
induction. It makes your conscious mind imagine things and drift off to
another time and place using imagination – an altered state of consciousness
and fundamental tool of hypnosis. Listening to this, you have no option but
to strain your conscious mind trying to figure out what comes next, while
using your imagination to follow along through his images and stories. This
helps bring the usually protected subconscious mind to the forefront,
making it vulnerable.

He not only forces you to focus, and asks you to use imagination, but he has
you count numbers, e.g., “sixteen months”, “thousands of miles”, “millions
of voices heard.” Firstly, “one of the techniques employed by hypnotists in
inducing or deepening a trance state in a client is that of having the client
count.”
Now here is where it gets really interesting. Obama uses the following key
hypnosis technique, now his fourth separate and distinct fundamental
hypnosis technique in just his first paragraph. He applies a dominant
hemisphere distraction technique precisely as taught by Erickson’s three
dimensions of hypnosis. Distraction is a common and fundamental
technique in hypnosis in which the dominant hemisphere is distracted by
the language its job is to process. The dominant hemisphere is sent on an
assignment using the linguistic processes and imagination. The critical
factor is thus occupied, to make the non-dominant hemisphere and
subconscious more susceptible to suggestion
Here is how it works. He asks you to imagine sixteen months, so you do.
You follow where the storyteller takes your mind and so you try to imagine
thousands of miles, and continue following along where he leads you.
However, the conscious mind cannot imagine a million voices, the number
is too big, though Obama tricks you with the first two numbers into trying,
by leading you down a path of increasingly difficult concepts to imagine
consciously. Notice how cleverly he leads you down a path which causes
the dominant hemisphere to be distracted, and tune out of trying to do
exactly what he is asking you to do.
Your mind tries to imagine a million and is distracted, sent off on an
assignment it can’t perform, tuning out, and exposing your subconscious
mind. This is a calculated and pre-scripted hypnotic induction technique,
and the only specific and logical explanation that makes any sense for what
he is saying. Does this seem a bit too unlikely to be coincidence? What
other purpose for this could there be for this language to be delivered
exactly this way? What is he even talking about?
There are four chapters on Hypnotic Storytelling in Conversational
Hypnosis, The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor
Ledochowski, “How to Destroy Resistance With Stories” as well as a cheat
sheet on using hypnotic storytelling to break resistance.
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p60, Inquiry with Aldous Huxley
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p187
Erickson’s three dimensions are: Pacing and distraction of the dominant
(language) hemisphere; 2. Utilization of the dominant hemisphere, language
processing which occurs below the level of awareness; 3. Accessing of the
non-dominant hemisphere;
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p13 – “[Erickson’s] overall strategy while conducting trance inductions
appears to have these three dimensions. 1) pacing and distraction of the
dominant (language) hemisphere; 2) Utilization of the dominant
hemisphere, language processing which occurs below the level of
awareness; and 3) Accessing of the non-dominant hemisphere.” See also,
p137, “The induction of the altered state of consciousness called trance
requires and implies the distraction and/or utilization of what Milton calls
the conscious mind.”
One cannot imagine all the grains of sand on a beach individually. you can
imagine a lot of them, or the beach, but the conscious mind cannot process
numbers of that size.
 Then, right after the distraction, notice the causality linking statements,
FIVE of them, back to back, “because of what you said... because you
decided change must come to Washington... because you believed that this
year must be different... because you chose to listen to your doubts not your
fears... because of you” - all pacing and leading techniques with the
causation already embedded, with the paragraph ending with the words
“President of the United States” as the effect brought about by all those
“becauses,” thereby becoming subconsciously linked. The most powerful
linking statement “because” according to Dr. Erickson and every covert
hypnotist cited in this document, is used not once, but five times,
connecting Obama’s concepts to the lead, not that he is the democratic
nominee, but “President of the United States,” the only words of that
sentence he can be seen using pointing down hand gestures for. This is
something nobody would never notice without an understanding of pacing,
leading, and causality linking statements, but now that it is pointed out it
certainly seems more than odd that he is using the word “because” so
obtrusively. Why would anyone set up sentence structure for any concept
this way? (Because A, because B, because C, because D, because E,.
..therefore X) Concepts are never set up to be communicated this way. It is
too difficult to follow and impractical, and there is no purpose for it. Not
unless one had a very specific purpose for using the word “because.”
Now let’s look at his use of hypnotic programming words: “decided”,
“believed”, and “chose.” (other hypnotic programming words include
“realize”, “know”, “understand”, and so on.) These are hypnotic
programming words because instead of convincing you rationally until you
actually decide, or believe, or choose, the hypnotist simply puts you in
trance, distracts your dominant hemisphere, and implants the command into
your subconscious. He hypnotizes you and simply tells you that you chose,
that you believe, that you decided. Implantation of this word is more
powerful than hours and hours of convincing you rationally. It is neither
simply presumptuous nor coincidence that he is telling you what you
decided, believed, and chose. So these words stand out in your mind, he
places the most minute emphasis on “decided”, then a much larger
emphasis on and pause after “believed”, and then a huge emphasis on and
pause after “chose.” Some of these concepts are in the past tense, and that is
also effective, sometimes even more so, because telling us prior our mind
states may make them even deeper.
Obama uses “because” before each of these programming words because
you must accept the premise in order to be able to follow the concept to the
end and understand it. That’s why starting with five separate “because”s
leading to one later “therefore” does not other than hypnotically make good
communication structure. Because normally it tries to get you to accept
precursor concepts before you even know what they are connected to -
before you even know what the alleged actual concept being communicated
is.
Now let’s look at the pacing used in this same paragraph. “Tonight
Minnesota” is a pace, because it is tonight, and he is in Minnesota.
“Primary season has finally come to an end” is a pace because it is
obviously true. Standing together and voices heard may help pace the
audience because that is what they are doing literally, standing there and
hearing the voices of the crowd. “You decided change must come to
Washington” is a pace, because it is something we all know is needed –
almost nobody can disagree with that. However, when you accept that, the
hidden meaning to accept is that Obama should be President. “This year
must be different than all the rest” is a pace, because literally every year is
different. When you accept that, you also accept his hidden meaning, that
this year will be different because Obama will become President. “I can
stand here and say” is again a literal pace because he is standing there and
saying something.
Also notice how, because of the five “because”s, he not only connects these
concepts to the lead, but connects these concepts to each other. Starting
with a literal pace, he connects standing there hearing voices, to wanting
change to come, to this year being different, which he connects
subconsciously to your greatest hopes and highest aspirations, to back again
to another literal pace, the fact that he is standing there
saying something. He doesn’t even need to know what your greatest hopes
and highest aspirations are, and he doesn’t even need to care. He has linked
your greatest hopes and highest aspirations, no matter what they are, as sure
as he is standing there speaking, to him being the President of the United
States. That’s how hypnosis works. it doesn’t get you to believe, it tricks
your subconscious mind into accepting the word “believe.”
Now let’s look at his perfectly timed hand gestures for the same paragraph.
His hand gestures with his right hand give essentially the same thumb and
forefinger hand gesture starting precisely at the words “believe (that this
year should be different than all the rest)”, and “chose.” He does not,
however, do this hand gesture, if it is truly for innocent emphasis, for what
you normally think he would, the alleged message, e.g. “change must come
to Washington”, not for “greatest hopes and highest aspirations”, nor for “a
new and better day for America”, nor does he do that gesture for “I will be
the democratic nominee.” While he uses this hand gesture at some other
parts, from the beginning, he doesn’t use them at all until, and then
primarily for “believe”, and “chose.” Then, as he says “democratic
nominee” his hands appear motionless form this video, and he emphasizes
and points downward for the word “President.”
Now we look at “deep structure” – how the audiences’ subconscious minds
might interpret the same paragraph as delivered by Obama. Under the
fundamental hypnotic principles of “deletion”, “distortion”, and
“generalization”, the mind alters the content it receives as it goes into the
subconscious. – A translation which is used and planned for by hypnotists.
While your critical factor is distracted and captivated deeply by Obama’s
trance, the same paragraph, to your subconscious, may be received
something like this: [this is one possible translation with partial analysis
added]
“we stand together ... my voice is being heard. ..because you said. ..because
you decided that change must come. ..because you believed [anchor] this
year must be different than all the
rest. ..because you chose [anchor] to listen [trance theme in storytelling]
your greatest hopes and highest aspirations. ..we bring a new and better
day.. .Tonight I can stand here and say [pacing] I will be the Democratic
nominee [no visible hand gestures on the video] ‘the President of the United
States’” [Pointing hand gestures downward (as if on a touch screen or push
button voting) command gesture]
Also notice yet another distraction technique – rhyme. He rhymes I will be
with the democratic nominee – a distraction technique which again distracts
the linguistic processing part of the mind, as he points downward and says
“President!”
An apparently innocent yet powerful paragraph on the surface structure, is
actually intended to be received as clear commands to feel as one with
Obama and hear his voice. He programs into you that you have already
chosen, you have already decided, and you already believed. Before your
conscious mind can say “wait, did I decide that?” he rewards you by
conjuring up your own feelings “greatest hopes and highest aspirations.”
Then, the “because”s come together for the lead, with hand gestures,
“President.”
By reviewing Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson,
M.D. Volume 1, as well as other works on Ericksonian hypnosis, one may
see a more detailed discussion of “deletion”, “generalization”, and
“distortion.”
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p165, discusses how a single surface structure communication can have
not only different, but multiple “deep structure” representations to the
subconscious mind.
A subconscious deletes parts of communication that it does not understand
or are incomplete. For example, “It seemed like an impossible task” – since
it is unclear to whom it seemed impossible, there is no way for the
subconscious to comprehend the meaning of it, so all that the subconscious
takes away from this sentence is “task.”

Now one might argue that half of this is coincidence, and the other half is
just him being a great and powerful speaker. But let’s look at it. Why would
he speak so slowly? We know he speaks faster in interviews and debates –
why speak so slowly in speeches? What about the acceleration of his rate of
speech to the lead? Why such storytelling? Why the exorbitant use of
visualization and imagination? ...Which lead the audience down a path of
imagining things until asking the imagining of something that can’t be
consciously imagined? Why the five “because”s and why the unusual
message structure from someone who speaks so well? Why the hyper-
confidence for specific words like “decided”, “chose”, and “believe” with
pauses after each one when they are not supposed to be the end of neither
the sentence nor the idea? Why the hyper-arrogance for “greatest hopes and
highest aspirations?” Why the repeated stating of the obvious and
undeniable “I stand here tonight?” (used in all his speeches) Why no hand
gesture for “democratic nominee”- why only for “President? And finally,
how come all of these “coincidences” can all be explained by a single
reason – all under the principles of hypnosis?.. .Which causes exactly the
type of mesmerized effect everyone admits they have from him?
Obama caught delivering another powerful hypnotic command
Not every hypnotic technique of Obama in this speech is discussed herein –
only a few examples are listed. Notice his anchor at 9:17 of the word
(independents and republicans who) “understand.”
Notice his extraordinarily long pauses after “change” 9:20 and 9:28.
At 9:55, Obama slips in a powerful hypnotic command. A moment after he
can clearly be seen anchoring it with a hand gesture.
At 9:55, Obama says,
“All of you chose (notice the different tone and volume and microsecond
pause after chose) to support a candidate you believe in deeply. (pause) ”
No, it is not simply presumptuous or arrogant to tell his audience that they
“believe in him” “deeply.” Again, it is hypnotic programming.
First, he uses “chose” to program our subconscious minds that our
conscious minds have already analyzed and made a decision. Again, the
same hypnotic programming word he used in his opening paragraph
discussed in the above example. If effective, this programming can even
override our conscious knowledge that we haven’t in fact chosen. We will
simply believe that we have chosen, and simply choose Obama. As he
speaks the word “chose”, while your critical factor is analyzing whether in
fact you chose any such thing
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, Starting p 7, discussion of how models of the world we create differ from
reality, then, on p 20, “One of the most powerful of these linguistic
modeling techniques is deletion, the case in which a portion of the meaning
of the sentence (the Deep Structure) has no representation in Surface
Structure...” Under complex deletion principles, the audiences minds filter
out certain aspects of the speech, and such speeches are designed by
hypnotists to have certain parts deleted, to communicate to implant the real
message into the subconscious, hidden in the speech, the content of the
speech is largely to distract the conscious mind, to make the remainder, the
commands, be implanted into the subconscious more effectively. See a
thorough discussion of deletion from p 159. (See also discussion of
generalization and distortion of language in deep structure)

and what you might have chosen and is distracted136, Obama uses the
other hypnotic programming word “believe” (also discussed above), and he
ends the sentence with “a candidate you believe in deeply.” He is not asking
us to believe in him by any means. He is implanting the hypnotic command
into a hypnotized audience that they already “chose.” Then, he is compiling
the command by programming the audience with the utmost “hyper”
confidence that they “believe in (him) deeply.” The reason he sounds so
confident is because he is inputting a hypnotic command. Notice the pause
after to allow “deeply” to sink in.
Let’s look at this phrase again:
“All of you chose to support a candidate you believe in deeply.”
When thinking about this language carefully, it becomes clear how unusual
it is. A candidate may say “thank you for believing in me”, or “please
believe in me”, or might say in any number of ways that his supporters
believe in him. But to simply say as if it were fact “you believe in me” is
unprecedented. If he didn’t use hypnosis, people would stop and say “no we
don’t”, or “who are you to tell us what we believe.” However, people are so
entranced, it slipped past everyone. And how odd is it that a candidate
would say “all of you chose” and then refer to himself as a candidate “you
believe in deeply.” This is beyond presumptuous, and beyond any confident
political speak. He is not saying he will be President. He is telling us what
we “believe.” He is telling us what we believe as though it is fact. He is
telling us something he could never know, as though it is fact. This is a
fundamental of hypnotic programming, that he does not convince the
rational mind with logical basis, he simply puts the subject into trance, and
literally tells them what they believe. And, he says we “believe” this
“deeply.” People don’t speak like that accidentally about others’ feelings.
This is all unacceptable as either arrogance, political confidence, or
coincidence. Especially the word “deeply” a word that does not even
require explanation to sound like hypnotic programming. This is a slip up
that he got away with. It is hypnosis commands intentionally being laid by
Obama in the subconscious minds of the audience.
Notice again the hypnotic programming words “chose”, “believe”, the same
ones that were analyzed earlier at the beginning of this same speech, again,
back to back, this time, in the same sentence. He was clearly in the same
train of thought as he was while drafting the earlier part of this speech.
Then Obama anchors to himself this concept of believing in this candidate
deeply. Then, a moment right after he says “deeply” (it needn’t be
simultaneous138), in his next sentence he does his thumb and forefinger
hypnotic anchor, and points to his torso with his fingers in that position,
subconsciously associating in the audience those deep feelings and
emotions with himself. That next sentence is about “we aren’t the reason
you came out.” For this, he would have no logical reason to point to himself
at the word “reason” –
Also notice how he doesn’t say “you believe in me.” He leaves it to the
subconscious mind to put that together to make it as subconscious as
possible.
Before this phrase, Obama says “there are young people, and African
Americans, and Hispanic Americans, and women of all ages who have
voted in numbers and who have inspired a nation.” But he is not referring to
these people when he says “All of you chose a candidate you believe in
deeply, though me may be trying to reserve that as an excuse. The reason is,
he doesn’t say “all of them chose”, he says “all of you chose.” He is talking
about these people in the third person, and he is saying this hypnotic phrase
in the second person. As an attorney, he knows this is incorrect, and that he
is applying this phrase to his entire audience, not just the people he listed
prior.
The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor
Ledochowski, on the discussion of pacing with body language as an
example, of how subconscious gestures need not be simultaneous to be
effective, and delay of a couple of seconds is effective, and sometimes
necessary, including so as to not be obvious.

especially when all of his other hand gestures are timed well to correspond
to his words. There is no other explainable reason for his thumb and
forefinger to be in that position, and then turn it inward to point to his torso.
As discussed below, in Obama’s 2008 Denver Democratic Convention
Speech, he uses this exact same technique of his thumb and forefinger,
talking about John F. Kennedy, then pointing that hand gesture inward
toward his torso a moment later, to create a subconscious association
between himself and JFK. Odd once to be sure, but caught twice, or more,
with the same hand gesture, it is no coincidence.
Obama caught pacing and leading again
In another classic Obama pace and lead, notice how he gets the crowd all
roused up around 20:40, with his peak speech, peaking in intensity,
emotion, volume, and rate so much so he doesn’t have even a high or low at
the beginning or end of his points. He discusses how teachers should be
paid more, everyone should have healthcare, and then he says “that’s the
change we need ...that’s why I’m running for President (pause) of the
United States.” Again, this is his classic pace and lead. It makes no sense
that because we need those miraculous changes he described, that is the
reason why the President should be none other than him. Logically he has
not said why he should be the one, what he would do, or anything of the
sort. However, because his leading is so powerful, it is something the
cheering audience believes in strongly, he adds the element of causation,
“that’s why” and then his two part lead, 1. President, and 2. (reinforcing it
again) of the United States. Because this lead is embedded in our
subconscious, we simply create the logic to justify how we feel – the
missing component – that supposition that Obama is the person who can
and will create this type of change and make all these miracles happen.
Obama’s 2007 California Democratic Convention “turn the page” speech –
further analysis
“Turn the page” is not just colorful visual metaphor that Obama happens to
like to say. In Obama’s 2007 “turn the page” speech he uses the phrase
“turn the page” fourteen (14) separate times. 140 141 He uses it as a
hypnotic anchor, and as a preprogrammed response, to stir emotion, and as
a hypnotic metaphor.
Obama using “turn the page” as a preprogrammed response:
A preprogrammed response is anything to which your body has already
been conditioned to react to with a certain response. For instance, you have
been already preprogrammed to know that change is a 100%
It appears Obama does this a third time in his speech on race in
Philadelphia, when he says Telling story about a poor kid, he says, “Now,
Ashley might have made a different choice”, then he hand gestures like
writing with a pen, clarifying the meaning of his thumb and forefinger
trademark, similarly as he does in his 2008 Denver speech, discussed in that
analysis. Then, while talking, a moment later, he gestures to himself with
the thumb and forefinger his anchor - making the subconscious message
that he is that “different choice.”
Barack Obama’s speech to California Democratic Convention, 2007
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UZUXhCW-OGM
Transcript, Obama’s Turn the Page speech, April 29, 2007, available, e.g.
http://www.californiaprogressreport.com/2007/04/barack_obamas_t_2.html
 certainty, and when you are reading and holding the page in your hand
“turning the page” is a 100% certainty. When a person reading gets to the
end of the page, the decision to turn the page is automatic, subconscious. It
also happens at a time when we are reading, and in trance. This is
something each of us is programmed with because we have each rehearsed
this thousands of times by turning pages in books, students and more
intellectual people even more so. It is an automatic reaction. What Obama
tries to do is apply that level of certainty and automaticnesss to your
decision to support him as President.
Obama using “turn the page” as a hypnotic anchor:
“Turn the page” is also used by Obama as a hypnotic anchor, to cause you
to recall his planted hypnotic suggestions when you are in the voting booth,
with the pen in your hand like his thumb and forefinger, the other primary
anchor. It is a hypnotic anchor that is used very cleverly by Obama by
taking advantage of a preprogrammed response in the subject. Turn the
page is not just a vague and colorful way to say that Obama will improve
America. It is designed to be triggered when we are holding the pen and
“turning the page” in the voting booth. The vagueness of such language
used in hypnosis, and the multiple meanings, as discussed aove, are part of
precisely what makes it work. See the discussion on secondary meanings,
embedded commands, surface versus deep structure, and trans-derivation.
Obama’s Democratic Convention speech 2008142 – A “play by play” of his
undeniable and extensive anchoring, pacing, leading, and delivery of
subconscious commands
This first example isn’t a documented hypnosis technique, just a bit of
classic deception that is part of Obama’s show. When Bill Clinton gave his
speech earlier in the Convention, he could barely get started for minutes
because the applause and cheering was so loud he genuinely could not
speak, and it refused to die down.
Obama didn’t have that problem, so he faked it. He didn’t have such
applause and cheering, but he faked it by pretending it was so loud he
couldn’t speak, and pretending it was interrupting him, saying “thank you”,
pausing and allowing the low level of applause to continue, and then saying
“thank you” again, and repeating, as if he was trying (though not really) to
quiet down the unquietable crowd. Comparing his opening to Bill Clinton’s,
it is clear that Bill Clinton genuinely could not speak, and Obama could
easily speak over the much quieter cheering and applause had he wanted to.
Before I discuss Obama’s use of hypnosis in his speech, I really have to
point out one other amusing point. Obama said “I am grateful to finish this
journey with one of the finest statesmen of our time.” (referring to Joe
Biden) What journey is he finishing that is almost over? Wouldn’t he be
President for four years? Americans certainly hope the end of the election
season is not the end. This is a slip. He looks at the election as the journey
because his entire mission is simply to make it into the Presidency before
we realize what he is doing, or who he really is.
Obama’s typical pacing, leading, storytelling, and hidden meanings
induction:
Above in this document under the heading “What is “pacing and leading”,
and how does Obama use this hypnosis technique?” – are listed Obama’s
use of three pacing statements fourteen times in this speech which are not
repeated in this section.
Obama’s Democratic National Convention Nominee Acceptance Speech,
August 28, 2008, available at
http://www.huffingtonpost.com/2008/08/28/barack-obama-democratic-
c_n_122224.html

Again, like all of Obama’s other major speeches analyzed in this document,
he starts off with hypnotic storytelling. This is not because he figures we
would all want to hear a story. His calculation is how to get the quickest and
deepest trace induction without anyone knowing what he is doing.
Obama says:
“Four years ago, I stood before you and told you my story, of the brief
union between a young man from Kenya and a young woman from Kansas
who weren't well-off or well-known, but shared a belief that in America
their son could achieve whatever he put his mind to. It is that promise that's
always set this country apart, that through hard work and sacrifice each of
us can pursue our individual dreams, but still come together as one
American family, to ensure that the next generation can pursue their
dreams, as well. That's why I stand here tonight.”
Again, Obama uses hypnotic storytelling in his unnaturally slow pace. The
story starts past tense, to have you imagine another time and place.
The story is also a pacing statement, “I stood before you and told you my
story” which is a present account of exactly what he is doing now, an
accurate current representation of the subject’s ongoing verifiable
experience because he is standing before us now telling a story. This is a
very powerful trance induction technique, because Obama tells a story,
forcing you to apply and use imagination, an altered state of mind and
different perspective, to look at the present situation. He is making you
apply an altered and subconscious state of mind to your present experience
of watching his speech.
The well-off or well-known statement is again, a play on words for
dominant hemisphere linguistic distraction in order to access the non-
dominant hemisphere per Erickson’s three dimensions of hypnosis. He is
already pacing, and the play on words is precisely the type of “utilization of
the dominant hemisphere, language processing which occurs below the
level of awareness.” Your dominant hemisphere below the level of
awareness analyzes this play on words, and becomes distracted, leaving it
open for implantation of hypnotic suggestion.
Then, sure enough, notice how he flashes his thumb and forefinger gesture
again starting with when he says the word (shared a) “belief.” The “belief “
that he is anchoring here is: that in America their son, (Obama) could
achieve anything he set his mind to. It is difficult to follow consciously, but
that is the belief they shared. What in fact their son has set his mind to, is to
become President. Consciously, it is difficult to follow that when Obama
says “belief”, and anchors it with his hand gesture, Obama is really
anchoring himself achieving the Presidency. He is anchoring and
implanting the command of his becoming President without expressly
saying it, so it remains subconscious.
Notice his words, “promise”, “hard work”, “sacrifice”, “each of us can
pursue our individual dreams” and then ends the paragraph with “That is
why I stand here tonight.” Promise, hard work, sacrifice, each of us
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p 218 - Utilization of plays on words in hypnotic induction works
because, in addition to employment of conscious linguistic processing
mechanisms, it “activates additional meaning recovery processes which
develop meanings which are available to the to the unconscious portion of
the client’s mind but not the conscious.” – What Erickson’s book means by
this is that the “play on words” isn’t caught consciously, but trips up and
confuses your subconscious linguistic processing mechanisms, thereby
facilitating the distraction necessary for hypnotic induction.
See also the discussion on trans-derivational searches brought about by
phonological ambiguity incl. p166, knows/nose, here/hear etc.

pursue our dreams are beautiful concepts nobody can disagree with, and
they are pacing statements. In no logical way however does Obama connect
these beautiful concepts to why he would make a great President. Instead,
he simply uses causation, the strongest Ericksonian linkage statement, and
says “That is why I stand here tonight.” This statement is a brilliant use of
Ericksonian hypnosis techniques, including pacing and leading, because
this statement is both a pace and a lead in one. Obama has actually set it up
in the run up to this paragraph, so “that is why I stand here tonight” – is
both a pace, as it is immediately and verifiably true that he is in fact
standing there tonight. Also, he has set it up in the whole preceding
paragraph, that what this obviously true statement means, is that he will
become President, by starting with and connecting his parents dream, and
stating all the beautiful concepts, and then saying “that is why....” he stands
there tonight – obviously meaning he is there because he wants the
Presidency.
This is the really clever part. When he says “that is why I stand here
tonight”, your subconscious mind accepts that as absolutely true. But the
question is, which interpretation? 1. That he is literally standing there
tonight? or 2. That he is standing there so his parents’ dream will be
realized? or 3. That he is standing there is because that promise, hard work,
sacrifice, and our children’s dreams is the reason why he is there? The mind
is distracted with this trans-derivational problem that occurs below the level
of awareness. Meanwhile, the subconscious mind accepts all three
interpretations as absolute truth. Remember, the subconscious mind cannot
make rational distinctions. Once the subconscious mind labels this
statement (that is why I stand here tonight) as absolutely true, it accepts it,
including all of its meanings, including hidden meanings. You look at him
standing there tonight and confirm below your level of awareness that that
statement is true on one level, and that acts as a confirmation of the other
meanings in the paragraph, that his parents dream will be realized, and that
promise, hard work, sacrifice, and our children’s dreams is the reason why
he is there. And remember, this all awhile you are entranced by his
unnaturally slow, poetic, melodic, hypnotic storytelling, imagination
provoking, emotion provoking, and passion provoking content. He doesn’t
send this message to you consciously, but intentionally and powerfully
implants and programs you with it subconsciously.
The statement that is verifiably true is the very same statement that means
he will achieve the Presidency and associates him with all those beautiful
concepts. This is no coincidence. This is classic embedded suggestion
programming containing every element in hypnosis trance induction
through all of the required elements, from pacing and leading, to pacing,
distraction, and utilization of the non-dominant hemisphere. It is beautifully
crafted and advanced Ericksonian hypnosis.
He uses the same phrase “that is why I stand here tonight” again at least two
more times later on in the speech. Millions of people feel like voting for
Obama and cant point to an accomplishment or change he has brought. This
hypnotic gamesmanship is the cause for many.
Obama caught stacking language patterns
Obama’s speech contains similar hypnosis techniques throughout, including
this very same technique immediately following the previous command.
This repetition of hypnotic language patterns one after the other is typical
stacking language patterns, and is very effective at subconscious
programming without conscious awareness.
Obama follows the above with:
“Because.. .Every time our nation has been in jeopardy, ordinary men and
women” (points to his audience) .. .students, teachers, nurses, janitors.. .had
the “Courage” (points to his audience) “to keep it alive.” “We meet at one
of those defining moments now.”

He paces everyone in the audience by talking about “ordinary men and

women, teachers, students, ....” for identification. Then, notice how he
points to the audience when he says “defining moments”, as if voting for
him will define us e.g., as open minded, as courageous. While difficult to
follow consciously, he just said, essentially, that because you (points) have
had courage (points) at every dark time, and this is one of those times, that
is why he is standing before us.
The pace and lead is again a single statement, “we meet at one of those
defining moments.” Again, same technique as in the previous sentence. You
can immediately verify that we indeed are meeting, at this moment, and
thus you subconsciously accept this statement as a true pace. When this
statement is accepted as true, you again also accept as true all the other
programming and meaning that Obama sends along with it into your
subconscious. What logical sense does that make though? What does him
standing there have to do with people’s courage throughout history?
Because he is standing there people can pursue their dreams?
At 15:50, Obama uses this same technique again.
After discussing economic issues, building emotion by mentioning a
waitress who can take off from work to take care of a sick kid without being
fired, and having an economy that honors the dignity of work, Obama says:
“The fundamentals we use to measure economic strength are whether we
are living up to that fundamental promise that has made this country great -
a promise that is the only reason I am standing here tonight.”
He starts out saying things nobody can disagree with, and building emotion.
Again, he uses causality to link beautiful and emotional concepts he
conjures up to himself with causation language that logically is completely
without any logical support. Why use this language of causation without
any basis for it, when there is no need for causation language “the only
reason.”
More importantly, yet again, Obama links these beautiful concepts with
causation to a statement that is both verifiably true in the literal sense in
order to implant the meaning he has built into it. He talks about “the
fundamental promise that has made this country great”, and says “a promise
that is the only reason I am standing here tonight.” He uses language about
the promises that make this country great and builds that meaning into “that
is why I am standing here tonight.” He doesn’t say “that is why I am
running for President.” “I am standing here tonight” is something more
easily and immediately verifiable and serves as a more literal and effective
pacing statement. When your mind accepts the statement “that’s why I am
standing here tonight” as absolutely true, it allows it to pass into the
subconscious. However, this statement has two meanings, 1. that he is in
fact literally standing there, and 2. the meaning he built into himself
standing there, he is there to make sure that we are living up to the
fundamental promise that has made this country great. When your mind
accepts “that’s why I am standing here tonight” as absolutely true, all
meanings attached to it are absorbed into the subconscious as true, because
your subconscious mind cannot differentiate and rationalize which meaning
he intended.
What he is doing is no coincidence and no accident. He is repeatedly setting
up language patterns that support subconscious beliefs of why he should be
President to intersect and be embedded within statements immediately
verifiable by the subconscious as absolutely true, such as “that is why I
stand here tonight”, or “we meet at one of those defining moments.” Then,
the audience sees him standing there as he says it, processes this below the
level of conscious awareness, and unknowingly accepts subconscious
programming as absolute truth consisting of all of the underlying meanings
he has set

up to correspond with the obvious surface statement. Nobody just happens

to speak like that. Not once, let alone again and again, one after the other.
*Obama caught clarifying his hand gesture as unmistakable hypnotic
anchor of writing with pen (twice):
You have to watch these videos. As he says “the only reason I am standing
here tonight, he waves his palm towards his chest, taking that emotion and
saying “me”, then he points upward signaling “command”, and then he does
this:
Right after that, at 16:22, right after he says, “the only reason I am standing
here tonight” analyzed above, notice his hand gesture when he says “the
faces of those young veterans.” Notice how he appears to be writing with a
pen, to complete the three-part hidden hand gesture, “me” “command” and
“write”(or probably “vote”). At 16:22 – his gesture of writing with a pen is
unmistakable.
Similarly, at 6:5 1, Obama also clarifies his hand gesture. He says, “more of
you have lost your homes, and even more” and at that moment, he does a
very strange thing with his thumb in forefinger technique, clearly making a
gesture as if he is using his hand as a pen writing. It is unmistakable. We
don’t consciously recognize it, but he anchors us for when we are holding
the pen in the voting booth, thereby clarifying for us subconsciously the
meaning of his consistent thumb and forefinger anchor. (being our hand, our
pen)
Watching this video of these two of Obama’s hand gestures, no reasonable
person would believe Obama accidentally made these gestures. You can
watch these scenes in these videos all day long and you cannot come up
with another reasonable explanation for what he is doing than hypnotic
programming.
A few tidbits::
Obama says “come together” – notice his hands towards his mid section, to
signal come together to him.
He points to us as he says “(these) challenges,” suggesting that we are being
challenged, or that we have a challenge to fulfill i.e. to follow his
commands.
Look at how he blends commands to stay in trance into his speech. He says
at 17:08 “When I listen to another worker tell me his factory is shut down.”
– listen to how he enunciates “listen”, to keep people subconsciously
listening to his voice.
When he says we are “better than this. ..more descent” notice how he uses
his hand palm towards himself, to send us the signal subconsciously that he
is ‘better” and “descent.”
He does the thumb and finger anchor again as he tells the story about the
man who “chokes up” – anchoring the symbol with our emotion. This is just
before the primary command explained below.
He also does an unmistakable hand gesture for the word “keep” just before
the primary command explained below.
He says “we are more compassionate” and again puts his palm towards his
chest, to send the message that he is compassionate.
The reason this is deceptive and manipulative, is that Obama is not telling
us that Obama is compassionate,

nor is he providing any logical basis for us to believe that he is

compassionate. He pretends he is talking about someone else. He is tricking
our subconscious minds to believe that he is compassionate without even
telling our conscious minds that he is communicating that message.
Consciously, we can’t even analyze it or make a rational judgment about it
because we are not even aware of having received the message.
Obama caught giving the primary hypnotic command of the speech:
After having raised in us a number of emotions, and having paced
considerably, and prepared us for a hypnotic suggestion, Obama delivers
the following paragraph, his primary hypnotic command of the speech:
Tonight, (pace - it is tonight) I say to the American people (pace - he is
obviously saying to the American people), to Democrats and Republicans
and Independents across this great land - enough! This moment (pace - it is
this moment) - this election (pace - it is this election) - is our chance to keep
(thumb and forefinger anchor - as in to keep his hypnotic messages), in the
21st century (pace), the American promise alive (pace – who would
disagree). Because (causality linking statement) next week, in Minnesota,
the same party that brought you two terms of George Bush and Dick
Cheney will ask this country for a third. And we are here (pacing) because
(causality linking statement) we love this country (pace) too much to let the
next four years look like the last eight. On November 4th, we must
(strongest command word possible) stand up and say: "Eight is enough."
The command is not “eight is enough.”
Obama executes the hypnotic lead that follows his emotional stirring and
pacing just before that, as he says, “on November fourth, on November
fourth!” Obama says “on November fourth” twice, attempting to make it
seem as if he unintentionally double-spoke. However, this is very
intentional. Notice how he has his thumb and forefinger together anchoring
“November fourth”, together with the emotion he just stirred up, for the
first time he says “on November fourth” He does this so we will recall his
hypnotic messages and programs and emotions when we hold the pen in the
voting booth.
Then, notice how the second time he says “on November fourth” with the
same hand that was thumb and forefinger for the first, he changes it to
firmly point. He is pointing, which is the international and subconscious
signal that he is giving us a command. Frowning and pointing is a common
technique in conversational hypnosis to get someone to do something,
because on the subconscious level, we perceive it as a command that we
must perform, regardless whether consciously we feel like we are doing it
voluntarily.145 Look at the firmness of his point, with a serious face
perhaps a slight frown, as he says it the second time. Obama is not asking
us for our vote, he is absolutely commanding it. One website even discuses
how angry Obama appeared during parts of his speech.146 He is
commanding all subconscious minds under his trance to support Obama.
In fact, it was so good at looking accidental;, that the written speech
transcript only has “on November fourth” once.
The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor
Ledowchowski, p104 of 631, “And likewise, when you are suing
‘command’ tonality, maybe you want to frown a bit. I used to point my
finger at an imaginary client, and then give him instructions. So that, every
time I pointed my finger and frowned, my voice started going down,
because the physiology of commands, or instructions, is to point and frown
slightly, and really get someone to do something.
The Angry Barack Obama Acceptance Speech, August 29th, 2008,
http://www.mikefrancesa.com/wordpress/?p=101 1

is easily proven that his double-speak is intentional, because his hand

gestures are so pronounced and clear, and how clearly he switches from one
hand gesture, the anchor, to the second, the command. Were the double
speak accidental, he would not have such clear and definitive and
purposeful and different hand gestures. The reason he says “On November
fourth” twice is because he is giving us a two-part hypnotic command, 1.
recall the hypnotic commands by the hypnotic anchor, and 2. act on them
and vote for me – both commands to be recalled “on November fourth” –
That’s why he gives you the specific date. .
This is undoubltable evidence that he is implanting commands in a way we
are not designed to be consciously aware of. He doesn’t coincidentally
happen to again use the hypnotic anchor, and the pointing technique. Notice
how these are the same gestures he uses in his statement for the same two
principles, reception of the hypnotic message, and taking the commanded
action by voting, that he uses in his overt hypnotic statement discussed
above:
“a light will shine down from somewhere, it will light upon you, you will
experience an epiphany, and you will say to yourself, “I have to vote for
Barack”’
Any forgiveness of this is simply because one may not understand how
powerful and effective such techniques are. How effective these tricks of
Obama’s are, can only be shown by the effects – millions of people
completely irrationally in love with him, and compelled to vote for him.
While you do not see it as consciously swaying you in any way, as of
course it doesn’t logically, or you may not even notice it, in fact, it is a
powerful command that compels millions to want him president, regardless
how they feel logically.
Obama’s aggressive pointing- the subconscious signal of giving commands:
Here are some general examples of Obama aggressively pointing – the
hypnotic symbol for giving a command.
At this point, Obama goes into a pattern, as he occasionally does, where his
hand gestures just normally flow with the conversation without any specific
meaning for the most part – essentially using his hands the way be believe
he always is, in order to not be obvious.
Shortly thereafter, Obama anchors the word “believe” yet again with his
usual thumb and forefinger
Images from Democratic National Convention speech in Denver, 2008 (as
examples of aggressive pointing, like those he uses as commands, not
necessarily designed to coincide with specific commands discussed.) Photos
http://www.mikefrancesa.com/wordpress/?p=101 1

technique. Is it again a coincidence? If there were no rhyme or reason to

his hand gestures, why is it that he uses the same thumb and forefinger
gesture for the same word (“belief”) that he anchored the same way at the
start of his speech? He is subconsciously training us to “believe’ his
hypnotic programming.
Obama caught in another hypnotic command, anchor, and a strategic pause:
Obama then says 15:50 “its time for us to change America...” (pacing
statement) “...and that’s why I’m running for President (pause) of the
United States.” (causality linking statement and the lead, delivered again
with his standard hypnotic anchor, the thumb and forefinger flash) This is
another classic Obama 1. pace 2. causality linking language 3. lead 4.
hypnotic anchor in which he inputs the hypnotic command - that he will be
President of the United States, to be recalled in the voting booth on
November fourth.
Why does he pause between ”President” and “of the United States”?
Because when you are in the voting booth holding the pen as he has
anchored, and all these commands are coming back, when you read the
actual ballot, it reads, “President”, and then on the next line below, “of the
United States”148, and as you read the ballot in the voting booth, you will
subconsciously pause for a split second as your eyes skip because you read
from one line to the next. By pausing when he gives you the command, it
will more perfectly match the situation in which you must act according to
that command, to make the subconscious link more effective. That is how
clever and strategic and precise Obama’s hypnosis techniques are. This is
how the unconscious mind works. Everything he is doing, the thumb and
forefinger “holding the pencil” hand gestures, the pointing, the pauses, the
hand gesture where he appears to be writing with a pen (in his democratic
speech), the metaphors (anchors like “turn the page”, are all preparing you,
anchoring you for recall of all his hypnotic commands recalled by you
yourself holding the pen and the ballot card that day on November fourth
when you are in the voting booth.
Notice his palms towards himself again when he says “rewarded by a
grateful nation.” It is difficult to tell, but he may actually be implanting the
subconscious suggestion that he is so wonderful, that we as a nation must
reward him (by giving him the Presidency).
He talks about soldiers, and says “(these are my) heroes” and at that
moment points to himself, to cause us to subconsciously associate the word
“hero” with him.
He then rouses emotion for the troops and hard working people, and says he
will keep their dream alive “as President of the United States.” He uses “as”
here as an implied causality, another powerful linking statement.149 Notice
then how he keeps his palms towards himself, as the crowd cheers, sending
the message of focusing that cheering on him. This is the same gesture he
uses sometimes to discuss himself.150
Obama can change positions from one day to the next151 to mirror
McCain’s positions, and through his hypnotic speech make people believe
that Obama feels as strongly as McCain does on these issues.
http://www.londonderrynh.net/wp-
content/uploads/2008/01/20080108_dem-ballot.jpg
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p147-149. The primary focus of this document has been the linking
statement using overt causation, the most powerful, however, other linking
statements are also used by Obama.
“my background, my politics” palms inward towards himself. – his speech
on race, Philadelphia.
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YbnKoJP1_xk&feature=related 2:25

He then anchors “we will keep our promise to every young American” with
his thumb and forefinger technique – suggesting he will keep his promise to
us.
Obama consistently delivers a very simplistic hypnotic pace. “Now is the
time. ..now is the time...”. The message is simply 1. pen in your hand, and
2. Obama. and 3. now is the time.
Obama caught hypnotically linking himself with John F. Kennedy:
Obama then mentions John F. Kennedy 27:47 (“what John F. Kennedy
called our international and moral strength”), which he anchors with his
thumb and forefinger. He then says “yes government must lead. ..but each
of us” and as he says “us” he points that same thumb and forefinger anchor
at himself (it doesn’t have to be simultaneous or immediate),
subconsciously programming us to look upon him as John F. Kennedy.
Then he repeats the word “yes’ in the middle of that anchoring, and does
another palm towards himself, reaffirming the JFK programming yet again.
It is an unlikely coincidence because he uses the same thumb and forefinger
hand gesture to discuss Kennedy’s values, and then points that same gesture
at himself a moment later. People believe he is John F. Kennedy, and have
no conscious awareness of the connection that he is causing through
subconscious manipulation. Notice this is the exact technique Obama used
in his St. Paul speech, discussed above, when he anchored “a leader you
deeply believe in.”
Obama again pacing and leading
This is just another of countless examples. Barack Obama said regarding
healthcare:
“It's time to finally challenge the special interests and provide universal
health care for all.” (Pace and Pace) “That's why I'm running for President
of the United States” (Lead) “because I believe that health care should be
guaranteed for every American who wants it and affordable for every
American who needs it.”152 (Pace and Pace)
Notice how powerful this statement by Obama sounds, while logically
empty. Notice how he says that’s why he’s running for President, before the
“because.” Odd to be certain, but we let is pass because we do not
understand the causation linkage that he is prepping our subconscious for.
Notice how it makes no logical sense that its time to change special
interests and provide universal health care, that’s why I am running for
President. There is no logical connection between those statements - Maybe
that is a reason why someone who has fought against special interests, or
someone who has solved healthcare problems or at least has knowledge
about these issues should be President. However, what he says is its time to
change Washington and provide healthcare, and “that is why I am running
for President.” The purported logic comes after as to not interfere with the
pace and lead causality statement. Even that purported logic provides no
real basis. It is just another pace. If Obama would have said the reason he
should be President is because he believes in healthcare, it wouldn’t work
as a pace because the audience doesn’t know what he believes – that is why
he uses what the audience believes, even though it diverges from logic in
order to follow perfectly the hypnosis principle of pacing and leading.
Because he believes healthcare should be guaranteed for everyone who
wants it, and affordable for everyone who needs it? Who doesn’t believe
that? It is a statement everyone can agree with, used as a pace. Notice how
powerful this statement sounds, yet has absolutely no logical basis. Because
he believes everyone who wants medical care should have it, that’s
Remarks of Senator Barack Obama: Health Care Town Hall, Date:
06/05/2008

why the President of the United States should be no person other than
Barack Obama? The use of the most powerful linking statement here
repeatedly, “because”, is more that suspicious. However, the proof, is that
he is a Harvard Attorney, and he knows not to use a “because” when he is
not making a proper argument that one thing causes another. Drafting such
false logic sticks out to attorneys like a sore thumb and he cannot
accidentally make this mistake once, let alone three times in one paragraph,
and consistently throughout his speeches.

PART 4 – ADDITIONAL SPECIFIC ASPECTS OF OBAMA’S

HYPNOSIS
Obama’s technique of head turned to the right side in interviews described
by body language expert as one of the most powerful subconscious
manipulation techniques possible by a speaker’s body language
Notice how Obama has his head tilted to the right in interviews such as the
Fox News interview with Chris Wallace April 27, 2008, his ABC News
Nightline interview, as well as the August 16, 2008 meeting with Rev. Rick
Warren,153 and many others.

It is undeniable how Obama significantly tilts his head to the right in these
and other interviews, but not when Obama is giving speeches.
According to Tonya Reiman, Author of “The Power of Body Language,”
such a head tilt to the right is “one of the most powerful manipulation tools
of body language.”157 Tonya Reiman describes how there is no difference
between what such gestures and manipulation. Barack Obama is actually
manipulating you subconsciously by tilting his head without you even
consciously realizing it. The reason is that tilting your head to the right
specifically is a sign of vulnerability, a very effective one. Per our animal
instincts, a head tilted to the right exposes an animal’s jugular vein, their
weakness, and in turn, causes us to lower our defenses subconsciously as a
counter-measure, without even being consciously aware of it.
This is a clear example of Obama intentionally using a subconscious
technique for gaining trust and lowering the subconscious guard and
resistance of his audience, using one of the most powerful manipulation
tools of body language.
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KjqOXEOzSc0
See also Obama can be seen with his head tilted to the right in many
interviews where he faces the camera. Google “Obama head tilt” - See
“Watching the Saddleback Church Forum with Pastor Rick Warren
interviewing Senator Barack Obama on Saturday August 16, I was struck
by the marked and obvious tilting of the Senator’s head Forum. The tilt is to
the right side. This phenomenon has not been widely written about from a
medical perspective.” at
http://www.drnoahklein.com/blog/35/senator¬barak-obama-has-a-head-tilt/
As an example http://www.foxnews.com/story/0,2933,232960,00.html
As an example
http://lifeisanongoingprocess.com/imageshome/obama_mtp.jpg
Obama at Saddleback church interview
The Power of Body Language, Tanya Reiman, p95-96.

This is not just confident body language. When Obama lowers his head to
the right as he often does, he is not convincing us logically, he is
manipulating us without our knowledge. We may say, “oh, well this doesn’t
seem so bad, his head tilted to the right doesn’t make me vote for him any
more so.” You may feel none of these tactics do. In fact, because they are
subconscious tactics, we do not realize how effective they are. Only after
November fourth can one be sure they are unaffected. We are
subconsciously tricked into trusting him more and liking him more, not
logically, but in our internal feelings to vote for him.158 This goes beyond
deceit, and is in fact mind-control. People watching him listen to him, and
like him, and trust him, they genuinely feel it, and it is artificially induced.
Now a single tactic like this head tilt by itself has effect. However, it is
when Obama combines it with hundreds of other gestures, techniques,
language patterns, and other aspects of hypnosis. There is an “Obama
phenomenon” of millions of people who call him JFK, or Jesus
reincarnated, and nobody can explain why. We are ready to turn over the
united States of America to this largely unknown man and nobody can
explain why. This is why. His arsenal of hypnotic and subconscious
manipulation brainwashes causing an unstoppable grade school-like crush
on him in some cases, and in others, simply pushes us over the edge,
overpowers our logical concerns, to supporting him when we otherwise
wouldn’t.
Much of Obama’s body language may be considered beyond confident, to
actually manipulative. As another example, when appearing with his
opponents Hillary Clinton and John McCain, in debates and elsewhere,
notice how, when he shakes their hand such as after the debate, Obama does
an additional touch on the arm or shoulder of his opponent. He is not being
friendly here. He does this to purposely appear “commanding” and “in
charge” to his audience. He is showing that he has the right, power, and
authority and confidence to touch this person. This is all conscious and
intentional. He even makes sure that after every debate, he takes the
forefront walking across the stage at the end, to the front center, and
meeting the moderator or other people up in the front and center, so people
are left with the end thought of him being at the forefront.
Obama’s manipulative body language is so perfected, that you actually have
to consciously detach yourself from it to try to not be influenced by it. He
never shows a hint of nervousness in his body language, and is always
commanding in his presence. He is so strategic in his body language, that
when he is on stage with Hillary after primaries or Joe Biden talking about
and praising him, he actually consciously sits slouching a little hunching his
shoulders, with his back arched in his chair, as if to put the other person as
the perceived leader while they speak well of him so their message is more
effective.
Interview of Professor of Psychiatry on CNN in which Dr. comes close to
hinting of her suspicion that Obama is using covert subconscious
techniques throughout his campaign.
Excepts from an interview of Dr. Gail Saltz by Erica Hill, Professor of
Psychiatry, New York Presbyterian Hospital, on Anderson Cooper 360,
CNN June 7, 2008 22:00 EST speak for themselves.
“Obama used words like "change," "hope," "action." They have high
emotional valence, particularly at this time. Clinton used words like
"conversation" and "leader," and they didn't have the same emotional
valence. And in addition, Obama delivered them with a tremendous
inspirational tone. That also affected things greatly. So yes, I think actually
it did play a big role. ...
http://flickr.com/photos/jbenson2/253 1469404/ The details that go into
Obama’s “look”

If you think about it, a campaign is really about PR and marketing. And
interestingly, the father of public relations was the nephew of Sigmund
Freud. He used those same concepts of the subconscious.
And that's what we're talking about here. It's not the conscience meaning of
the word: it's the unconscious emotion it evokes. Because when it's out of
your awareness, it has the ability to make you behave and do certain things
that you wouldn't if you knew it was present.
...
I do think Obama really has a special talent in this arena of deciding what
words to use with a particular valence.”
Dr. Saltz seams here to strongly suggest that Obama is indeed using
subconscious hypnosis techniques in his campaign. However, she only
scratches the surface of Obama’s techniques and does not put together the
ethical issue of how deceptive and immoral his tactics are.
Hypnosis/NLP expert discusses Obama’s use of mind control techniques on
radio
Dr. Horton, who has been working in the field of hypnosis and NLP for 25
years has called Obama’s methods clearly the use of hypnosis and
effectively “Mind control.”159 The discussion on this radio program160
describes Obama’s use of the 48 Laws of Power, by Greene, a treatise on
mass deception, total absence of emotion.161 Obama is often referred to as
detached emotionally, and not just “cool” but in fact so detached as to be of
concern to some people. Discussed is Obama’s ability to project people’s
hopes and dreams onto him, and Obama’s use of hypnosis to get masses to
view him as the vehicle to get whatever he wants through Obama’s vague
“yes we can”, “change” and “we are the ones we have been waiting for”
speeches.
The discussion addresses Obama’s cadence rhythm and speaking tone,
taking breaks after 5-8 word phrases, and how he cleverly uses pauses such
as “together, . ..as we look to the future,” to send subconscious messages we
are not even aware of.
One specific hand gesture being used by Obama discussed was Obama’s
rousing emotion from the audience, and then touching his face, or tie, as a
method of subconsciously transferring those emotions onto him by bringing
the person’s focus back to him while in that elicited state. Also discussed is
how Obama morphs into a different person with different voice depending
on which group he is talking to.
Website analyzes Obama’s use of hypnosis in speeches
A website looking at the hypnotic aspects of Obama’s speeches and
comparing them to other candidates, and Hitler, who was well-known to use
hypnosis, provided the following commentary:
http://www.nfnlp.com/
Dr. Wil Horton, licensed clinical psychologist, 8/2/2008 2:00:00 PM
clintons4mccain radio,
http://www.blogtalkradio.com/clintons4mccain/2008/08/02/Does-Hillary-
REALLY-Have-a-Chance

Law 3: Conceal Your Intentions. Law 7: Get Others to Do the Work for
You, but Always Take the Credit. Law 15: Crush Your Enemy Totally. Law
33: Discover Each Man's Thumbscrew.
162 by Michael, website at http://www.transformdestiny.com/blog/?
tag=conversational-hypnosis

Barack Obama: Democratic candidate, Feb 5, 2008, remarks on Super

Tuesday
58% hypnotic language. Complete mastery of the language, including
highly abstract pacing and leading language for creating emotion and
motivation. In addition to the language patterns, he is fantastic at going
higher up in level of abstraction beyond details, while still managing to
sound relevant. He uses Ericksonian-style language patterns, including
presuppositions and
nominalizations extensively.
This is only a sample of 500 words from a single speech, but as you can
see, Obama tops the crowd using nearly 60% hypnotic language patterns. In
my opinion, this is purposeful language, likely written by a very skilled
speech writer — perhaps someone trained in Neuro-Linguistic
Programming or Hypnosis.
Another website also provides similar commentary.163
Obama uses hypnotic command to dismiss the Rev Wright questions
Regarding Rev. Wright, Obama in an interview with Chris Mathews on
MSNBC, simply says, with his amazing hyper-confidence, “three weeks
from now, everybody will have forgotten..” He doesn’t even say, I hope this
will be forgotten. He clearly states it as a command. That easily, for
millions of Americans, the question of why he sat in a racist, anti-American
church for 20 years is unimportant.
When Obama faces any attack or issue that hurts him, he simply says this is
the old politics, and that this issue doesn’t solve the people’s problems. He
calls it a “distraction.” A word that clearly has a very powerful message, to
be overlooked. When the idea of a distraction is commanded hypnotically,
in can, as we see, sometimes be more powerful than all the logic which
says, “wait, Obama’s character is relevant.166 He groups everything that
hurts him politically, from his empty record to his connections with
Farakhan and Hamas, to his elitism, and all the questions about his
character and patriotism under his magical umbrella of issues that
“distractions” or what he calls “fear tactics.” The rational part of one’s mind
should realize that Obama’s connections to these people, combined with
how little we know about Obama disqualify him from the Presidency, but as
emotional beings, many are driven by simply wanting him as President.
Obama’s speech on race March 18, 2008 Philadelphia – hypnotic
storytelling throughout
This speech is symbolically in the “city of brotherly love.” Notice how he
carefully plans venues for such speeches, Berlin to be like JFK, “Unity”
when he and Clinton are trying to get along. Has any candidate before ever
paid this much attention to such small symbolisms?
Obama is using hypnotic storytelling techniques from the start of the
speech, when Obama is talking about a different time, “221 years ago...in a
hall that still stands across the street....farmers, scholars” in his slow
rhythm, through to the end. As discussed above with regards to the
California Convention 2007 Speech, hypnotic storytelling is a fundamental
of hypnosis. The stories in this speech are countless, practically
http://greatguys.blogspot.com/2008/09/i-mustve-seen-different-speech.html
Hardball College Tour interview Barack Obama, Chris Mathews,
http://www.msnbc.msn.com/id/23925495/page/4/
As he said it, in three weeks’ time, it was forgotten by most. Coincidentally,
Wright, happened to shortly thereafter come public with some more
extreme comments precisely giving Obama another chance to now
denounce him more concretely. This had the precise effect of Obama then
being able to say he did denounce Wright, after Obama initially refused to,
so that the story would die down, and Wright has been largely silent since. -
Another interesting coincidence nobody suspected.
Obama said in his democratic convention acceptance speech that issues
such as his character are off limits.

throughout. Through much of Obama’s speech, what is a story and what is

not are completely blended and intertwined. He takes you through a host of
emotions starting with guilt about slavery, to all types of stories about
brotherly love and togetherness, meanwhile using his thumb and forefinger
anchoring technique almost throughout, and implanting messages hidden
within the stories into your subconscious. He gets your imagination prevail
over your rationality, and you find yourself feeling the heartwarming tales
that the people in all these stories felt, and associating those with him. He
consistently paces throughout, “This presidential campaign” or “I chose to
run for president – at this moment (in history)” just two of many pacing
statements with anchors, and “this moment”, “this election”, and “this time”
(repeated nearly half a dozen times).
He builds warm emotions with generic statements like “We all want to
move in the same direction. ..towards a better future.. .for our children and
grandchildren.”
The way he dismisses the whole Rev. Wright affair without discussing how
he could have not known Wright was racist and anti-American (which he
denies) is by saying he is “not the most conventional candidate.” Notice
how you have to agree with it because you do not have time to dissect what
part of non-conventional is due to his race, and what part is due to
something improper that he has done for twenty years.
At 4:56 he says “A story that has seared into my genetic makeup the idea
that this nation is more than the sum of its parts, that out of many, we are
truly one”, meanwhile pointing down as if to command almost the whole
way through that statement. Notice how many times he talks about being
one with his audience. This is building and reinforcing a subconscious
connection with his audience, often by using his hypnotic anchor hand
gesture. In fact, such stories are designed to “sear” their way into your
subconscious with the message that he and you, the subject, “are truly one.”
More include “let us all find our common stake in one-another”, and “we
can come together.” He describes children of different races getting along at
multiple times throughout the speech. He tells stories containing embedded
all the warm feelings that he in fact places into the subconscious minds of
the audience, which warms, or at least thaws the outrage over Wright.167
He beautifully plays the audience like a violin taking positions on both
sides, and criticizing from all angles and perspectives. In the end, we forget
that he fails to address what he calls “nagging questions” because he
cannot. They aren’t “questions”, they are impossibilities for which there is
no answer, but which he dances around and dodges beautifully. It is
impossible that he could not have know his pastor’s true views and
character for twenty years. It is impossible that someone who says “g-d.d-
mn America” loves this country in the same way as someone who is
shocked by these words. It is impossible that Obama had he good and
strong character, would have stayed in that church. It is impossible, that had
Obama possessed good judgment, that he would have stayed in that church.
It is impossible, that had Obama not agreed with such views, would have
stayed in that church.
In the end, he convinces many on emotion and warm feelings driven
through to the subconscious through continuous hypnotic storytelling,
telling hypnotic story after hypnotic story each with a theme about how he
wants the audience to feel. Obama ends up slipping out of the consequences
of a personal history what would rationally have destroyed any candidate.
The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor
Ledochowski, How to Destroy Resistance With Stories: Priming the
Subconscious Mind, p246-247.

Obama’s hypnotic logo

Obama adds to this by giving a visual point of fixation – his logo. No doubt
that one intended meaning, of many, is that the circle is also an “O” for
“O”bama. By itself that is not all that significant.
Obama’s logo is highly hypnotic, because unlike any other logo in
presidential history, you do not look at it, but through it. One
subconsciously looks though the circle to the light inside, like the light at
the end of the tunnel, without consciously realizing it. This visual point of
focus is helpful in multiple ways to focus one’s attention, as well as to
distract the critical factor. Notice how it is always there on the podium – a
small one in the middle, just enough for your conscious mind to miss, but
for you to see subconsciously.
Additionally, Obama’s logo looks very much like a crystal ball. Notice how
it looks like it is shining brightly. Crystal balls are used by hypnotists as one
of their favorite focus points for aiding in trance induction. 168
Also notice how Obama’s podium messages are never something like
“country first” like McCain has, which needs conscious interpretation.
Obama’s podium messages are always simplistic hypnotic commands
including the words “Need” or “Believe” or “Change.” A common Obama
podium message is the word in large letters “CHANGE”, and beneath it
“WE NEED.” The reason this is hypnotic, and part of his hypnotic trance
induction, is because the message is vague, and has two meanings because
it can be read both as “change we need”, and as “we need change.” Per the
discussion on trans-derivation in this document, as your mind tries to figure
out which meaning is intended (and cannot resolve it because both are in
fact intended) your mind is subject to trance induction and distraction,
while your subconscious mind becomes more accepting of suggestion.
Obama’s strange hand gesture & hand-holding conversation with Senator
Lieberman
In a very unusual report, Obama is reported to grab another Senator with
whom he is in a disagreement with, Sen. Joseph Lieberman, and lead him
by the hand across the Senate floor and then speak to Lieberman in a
passionate manner with strange had gestures.169
The reason this is strange, is, besides the investigation of Obama for use of
hypnosis in his speeches and other aspects of his campaign, is that the
description of this “heated conversation” sounds somewhat like some very
specific hypnotic induction techniques, including one hand and handshake
instant induction techniques.170
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p189 re use of crystal balls in trance induction.
Obama in heated Conversation with Lieberman
http://www.huffingtonpost.com/2008/06/04/lieberman-
carries¬mccains_n_105179.html
The Handshake Induction (from
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Milton_H._Erickson)
Confusion is the basis of Erickson's famous hypnotic handshake. Many
actions are learned and operate as a single "chunk" of behavior: shaking
hands and tying shoelaces being two classic examples. If the behavior is
diverted or frozen midway, the person literally has no mental space for this
- he is stopped in the middle of unconsciously executing a behavior that
hasn't got a "middle". The mind responds by suspending itself in trance
until either something happens to give a new direction, or it "snaps out". A
skilled hypnotist can often use that momentary confusion and suspension of
normal processes to induce trance quickly and easily.
By interrupting the pattern of a "normal" handshake in some way, the
hypnotist causes the subject to wonder what is going on. If the handshake
continues to develop in a way which is out-of-keeping with expectations, a
simple, non-verbal trance is created,

The article states:

“Obama In Heated Conversation With Lieberman, June 4, 2008 12:24 PM,
Sam Stein, The Huffington Post: Furthermore, during a Senate vote
Wednesday, Obama dragged Lieberman by the hand to a far corner of the
Senate chamber and engaged in what appeared to reporters in the gallery as
an intense, three-minute conversation. While it was unclear what the two
were discussing, the body language suggested that Obama was trying to
convince Lieberman of something and his stance appeared slightly
intimidating. Using forceful, but not angry, hand gestures, Obama literally
backed up Lieberman against the wall, leaned in very close at times, and
appeared to be trying to dominate the conversation, as the two talked over
each other in a few instances. Still, Obama and Lieberman seemed to be
trying to keep the back-and-forth congenial as they both patted each other
on the back during and after the exchange. Afterwards, Obama smiled and
pointed up at reporters peering over the edge of the press gallery for a better
glimpse of their interaction. Obama loyalists were quick to express their
frustration with Lieberman’s decision and warned that if he continues to
take a lead role in attacking Obama it could complicate his professional
relationship with the Caucus.”171
It sounds more unbelievable than to even suggest seriously, but certain
aspects of the “conversation” just have hypnotist written all over it. This
report is not inconsistent with the absurd-sounding possibility that Obama
tried to use hypnotic techniques on Senator Lieberman right there on the
Senate floor. This includes the motive, Lieberman’s recent criticisms of
Obama, and Obama’s alleged method of grabbing Senator Lieberman by the
hand and leading him by the hand across the Senate floor (see handholding
as part of instant induction techniques), the forceful hand gestures, backing
Lieberman up against the wall, and leaning in very close, appearing to try to
dominate the conversation, the patting on the back, all until being
apparently interrupted by reporters.172
Obama’s use of a fake presidential seal
Obama at one speech had on the front of his podium a fake presidential seal
which he created, which looked like the Presidential Seal of the United
States, except with a few modifications such as “Obama” written on it, and
his hypnotic logo in the center.173 This was likely an attempt at another
subconscious message
which may then be reinforced or utilized by the hypnotist. All these
responses happen naturally and automatically without telling the subject to
consciously focus on an idea.
The various descriptions of Erickson's hypnotic handshake, including his
own very detailed accounts, indicate that a certain amount of improvisation
is involved, and that watching and acting upon the subject's responses is key
to a successful outcome. The most important thing is that the "normal"
handshake is subverted in such a way to cause puzzlement, which may then
be built upon.
Richard Bandler was a keen proponent of the handshake induction, and
developed his own variant, which is commonly taught in NLP workshops.
Any habitual pattern which is interrupted unexpectedly will cause sudden
and light trance. The handshake is a particularly good pattern to interrupt
because the formality of a handshake is a widely understood set of social
rules. Since everyone knows that it would be impolite to comment on the
quality of a handshake, regardless of how strange it may be, the subject is
obliged to embark on an inner search (known as a transderivational search,
a universal and compelling type of trance) to identify the meaning or
purpose of the subverted pattern.
(see also “instant induction techniques” online, such as “one handed
induction”)
Obama in heated Conversation with Lieberman
http://www.huffingtonpost.com/2008/06/04/lieberman-
carries¬mccains_n_105179.html
See previous footnote on instant induction and handshake induction.
http://www.victoriataft.com/2008/06/obama-unveils-presidential-seal.html

looking Presidential, that, like the light shining down statement described
above, was caught and ridiculed because of its impropriety. Both probably
without went without anyone’s conscious awareness of their small role in
Obama’s broader hypnotic efforts. Both were simply ridiculed because of
their impropriety. This could be argued to simply have been an effort by
Obama to appear Presidential, but why the subtle modifications then and
why his logo in the middle?
Assorted other points:
Obama often uses a variety of other subconscious verbal tricks. At 4:55 pm
on September 24, 2008, in a response to McCain suspending his campaign
as a show of non-partisanship to work on the economy, Obama made a
statement about how in this crisis, there are some immediate aspects, and
also some long term aspects that the net administration will have to deal
with. Then he says in the next few sentences “we”. ..”we” several times,
and then follows up with how “we” will have to deal with those long term
issues down the road. He separated it so he was not obviously saying that he
will be the next administration, but subconsciously, that is probably an
intentionally sent message.
There are too many issues to address, and too many hypnotic techniques to
look into even in a single speech. However, here are a few miscellaneous
points.
Notice how often he starts his turn speaking with the words “Now look...”
Not just once or twice, but repeatedly, especially when he is in trouble in an
interview or conversation.
When Obama first introduces Biden as his vice president to take the stage
with Obama for the first time, Obama announces Biden as, “the next
president of the United States” and then corrects himself to say vice-
president, as if he misspoke. It is difficult to know whether Obama did this
on purpose to make people who are uncomfortable with him feel more at
ease as though Biden would be running the show. Perhaps he misspoke, but
then again, how often does Obama misspeak? .. .As compared to his proven
prior acts of misspeaking purposely as part of subconscious tactics.
Notice Obama’s sparkling eye-shadow makeup.
On Hannity and Colmes, Mary Matalin said Obama was “attacking McCain
subliminally”, calling McCain “confused.” In another Obama ad, when
McCain was criticized for not knowing how many houses he owned, the
voice slowly paused before saying “he cant remember,” in a deep powerful
voice. Clearly this was a similar tactic to get people to be concerned about
McCain’s age.
When Hillary had lost the nomination, Obama came to meet with her. As
the story was relayed, Obama had all journalists board his plane to cover
him, and then, in an unbelievable move, Obama sent his plane, without him,
to another city to intentionally do away with the press so Obama could talk
to Clinton privately without journalists there.

Regarding the lipstick on a pig comment, it is hard to know whether

Obama intended this to be subconscious or not. However, on Wednesday
September 10, 2008 in what appeared to be a small library, Obama did try
to cover it up. He said, “nobody actually believes...” that the McCain camp
is offended. Notice how much emphasis he puts on his favorite
programming word “believes” – and the huge pause thereafter. That is not
(supposedly) the end of the idea nor the sentence. Why a huge pause and
emphasis if that were not the end of the idea? Notice how the whole
statement is made as if it were a command, “nobody actually believes!”
Notice how Obama copies and piggybacks the popular points of every
candidate he is going against. This is so people will look at him as equal to
every issue logically, and only differentiate Obama on the issues where he
chooses to, where he is strongest. It allows him to appropriate the best of
the other candidates without ever taking a position. Look at how he does
this even in debates. He would allow Hillary to answer a question with her
wealth of experience, and then he says that he would have given the same
answer, sometimes even using a metaphor like “dovetail” but he is also
Barack Obama. Remember how starkly different he was than John McCain?
What issues can one name where he is even describably different than
McCain on?

PART 5 – THE VISIBLE EFFECTS OF OBAMA’S HYPNOSIS The

effects of his hypnosis are undeniable
“The unconscious mind (where Obama is implanting his hypnotic
commands) is the source of our energy. No amount of will power exerted by
the conscious mind can override it.” Modern Hypnosis Theory and Practice,
Masud Ansari, Ph..D., p43. - this is why many people are so passionate
about Obama. Nobody knows who, not even they. It is difficult to know
how many people have been affected and how much until November 4th
when people actually vote. Because of Obama’s tactics, we can expect
people to change their mind at the last minute, feel entranced in the voting
booth, vote for people other than they intended, and other interesting
reports. We can expect irregularities because the lengths people will go to
elect Obama to be unusual, as that desire will supercede some people’s
interest in democracy. We can expect significant voter fraud, and other
problems. We have already seen such strange behavior, including many
instanced of voter fraud, people bending the rules as if Obama winning is
more important than the rule, the obviously biased positions of most
journalists, and reports that a respected journalist Gwen Ifill, who is
moderating a debate, who may not have properly disclosed that she is
writing a book on Obama, which should have been done even to avoid the
appearance of impropriety.
Obama’s perceived greatness
Bill Richardson called him the “greatest leader of a generation.”
Nancy Pelosi called Obama “a leader that g-d has blessed us with at this
time.”
Millions of people are worshipping a man who has accomplished virtually
nothing but given speeches.
Obama is drawing crowds like only John F. Kennedy could, except John F.
Kennedy was in the military as commander of a torpedo boat, a
congressman for six years, a senator for seven years, won the Pulitzer Prize,
and was President of the United States before he had such support. Obama
now is practically more popular than John F. Kennedy, except without any
of the accomplishments.
 Obama puts us in a trance where it doesn’t even seem like it is the
Presidency of the United States on the line – he makes us feel like it is
American Idol and we are kids who want the guy we have a crush on to
win.
The media admits Obama is so memorizing it is difficult to remain
objective, that they get chills and shivers from watching him. The McCain
web ads “Love”, as well as “The Road To Denver” have examples of how
people are spellbound by Obama174, including media persons. Journalists
admit how swept away they are, how they have a crush on Obama like they
haven’t had since grade school, and feel sensations going through their
bodies while listening to him.17 5 Journalists admit “its hard to remain
objective,” describing the sensations running up their legs as they listen to
him speak. “I feel a need to do this, I have to” one Obama supporter says.
“Regarding the “turn the page” speech, one typical supporter comments
online:
“I was there - i heard, i saw, i witnessed what i had been hearing only over
the media. This guy is a myth, a legendary figure around who we must all
assemble. He is the man to remember, the tree to lean on, the rock on which
to build. Let America give this guy a chance and it is obvious that it will not
be a regretable decision. I am quite sure that that rustic Medical Doctor who
manifested a high degree of ignoramus when he naively spoke against
Barack the day after he announced his candidacy on C-Span must be
gnashing his teeth now. Barack has demonstrated that he is not only
eloquent, but he is savvy, apt, sound and good enough for this country, so
let's all endorse him, and work hard to ensure that we place him in the
White House. He has made it clear that this campaign is not about him, and
not about his family. It is about us, so let us take this whole thing into our
hands, get iito every nook and crany of this country and win voters for our
darling candidate. Barack, you are the man!!!!!!!!!!”
Another supporter shortly thereafter, writes, “I believe this wonderful man
is a gift from God.” Others compare him to John F. Kennedy.176 These
above are just a small sample.
Obama’s trance
Mark Bergin of World Magazine writes:
~ ~ ~Obama spell mesmerizing but empty - Candidate's appeal takes on cult
quality, Charles Krauthammer, Washington Post
Writers Group, And now, in the most amazing trick of all, a silver-tongued
freshman senator has found a way to sell hope. To get it, you need only give
him your vote. Barack Obama is getting millions. ... "We are the hope of the
future," sayeth Obama. We can "remake this world as it should be." Believe
in me and I shall redeem not just you but your country -- nay, we can
become "a hymn that will heal this nation, repair this world, and make this
time different than all the rest." http://www.chicagotribune.com/news/chi-
oped0218krauthammerfeb18,0,7036639.story
Obama casts his spell – by Charles Krauthammer - ABC's Jake Tapper
notes the "Helter-Skelter cultish qualities" of "Obama worshipers," what
Joel Stein of the Los Angeles Times calls "the Cult of Obama." Obama's
Super Tuesday victory speech was a classic of the genre. Its effect was
electric, eliciting a rhythmic fervor in the audience -- to such rhetorical
nonsense as "We are the ones we've been waiting for. (Cheers, applause.)
We are the change that we seek."
http://www.realclearpolitics.com/articles/2008/02/obama_casts_his_spell.ht
ml
175 http://www.hypemovie.com/?gclid=CM7LtP3
17ZUCFQhJagodWnYpeg Tucker Carlson on the press’ early teenage crush
for Obama being beyond love.
176 Tracy Smith says Obama's "stoic eloquence, " with lines like, "WE are
the ones we've been waiting for," conjures up images of President Kennedy.
http://www.cbsnews.com/stories/2008/02/14/earlyshow/main3829938.shtml

“In typical fashion, Obama roused the crowd with soaring rhetoric:
“We are the ones we’ve been waiting for.” With heads cocked, many
onlookers seemed to glaze over with trance-like admiration for the man
they believe will reinvent American politics.177”
Another Obama fan writes:
“...so I switched to a video of Barack and within a few moments, I had
faded and gone into a drone-like TRANCE! Like an altered state. Anyone
else notice this? What could it mean?178”
Nicholas M. Guariglia describes Obama’s effect on many as:
~Everyone is telling me he’ll tickle my fancy. I’m supposed to be endeared.
Apparently he does all sorts of amazing trance-like things to you: he’ll
“look into your eyes,” “inspire” your political senses, and when he speaks
to his audiences, he bestows upon you feelings you “haven’t felt in
ages.””179
Daniel Zanoza writes:
“It's as if a significant portion of the American public is under some sort of
ungodly spell when it comes to Obama and someone needs to give me a
good explanation for it.”180
Another blogger writes:
“It continues to stun me that people are hypnotized by Obama's rhetoric
given his lack of substance. His only message is "I offer hope" followed by
"trust me". He offers no plan for change and becomes annoyed when asked
directly for details (hear his interview with Steve Inskeep on NPR 1/9/08).
He depends on young voters who- apparently - do not realize he stands for
nothing.”181
One blogger on HuffingtonPost.com writes:
“Like 'vsign' I actually started out liking Obama and thinking that he had a
chance to make a difference. After listening to him and reading about what
he proposes to do as president, I no longer trust him. It's a pity that so many
people seem to be in a trance and believe that he is some kind of a god. I
hope that they will come to their senses before it's too late.”182
http://www.worldmag.com/webextra/13750
http://www.godlikeproductions.com/forum1/message594429/pg1
http://www.globalpolitician.com/24075-elections
http://rffm.typepad.com/republicans_for_fair_medi/2008/02/obama-the-
antic.html
http://politics.wikia.com/index.php?
title=Why_I_will_Not_Vote_For_Obama
http://www.huffingtonpost.com/users/profile/vanessar?
action=comments&display=all&sort=newest

As a final example, see Reverend James Manning’s video, likening him to

other world leaders, in which he says
“Barack . ..has got you all in a trance”, “Paralyzed hypnotic people that
follow Barack”
– essentially arguing that Obama with virtually no accomplishments has
more support than JFK did, and more that Martin Luther King did, and that
this is unnatural,, and this should be a wake up call that something is not
right.183
We know the “Obama phenomenon” is occurring, and that it is powerful. To
many who see through it, it is a quite creepy. Not only because his image
does not match his complete lack of accomplishments, and complete failure
to bring any real change in his 46 years. People who follow Obama with
sparkles in their eyes try to bring you into what is a very intense and
frightening cult-like following – a childish trance-like religious experience
wherein you give up all resistance and submit to Obama love and it fulfills
you completely184 There are significant reports of even high level political
people breaking rules to support Obama. One narrator of a criticism of
Obama supporters’ improper voting tactics describes Obama followers as
simply not being able to see through it.
The first question that no one really wants to examine, that we must
examine, is, what is the logical explanation for the Obama phenomenon? As
logical human beings, everything has a logical explanation. The media
writes it off as “he is simply very charming and a great orator.” Does that
suffice? His popularity is historic already. Historically, with some of the
horrible leaders who have come to power through their guile, can we
presume such cannot happen in this case just because this is America, and
not even examine this phenomenon?
Perhaps the best way to know Obama’s hypnosis techniques are having an
effect is because he is continuing to use them. If these techniques weren’t
working, he wouldn’t continue to risk his entire political career.
The effects of Obama’s hypnosis on young people, and more educated
people
The effect Obama is clearly having on younger people is undeniable, and
common knowledge that young people are one of his primary bases of
support. Polls, colleges and the internet are flooded with young people
raving about Obama. Obama also apparently has an increased effect on
people who read more, or are more intellectual. In a recent article in
Newsweek Magazine entitled, “Letter to the Obama Generation”, author
Jonathan Darman advises “cut the blind devotion.”
In hypnosis science terms, this is not surprising, as young people are known
in psychology to respond better to hypnosis.185 The critical factor is
something that one is not born with, but is something developed through
life experiences.186 Dr. Erickson’s said of younger people’s susceptibility
to hypnosis:
These two case reports have been presented in considerable detail to
illustrate the naturalistic hypnotic approach to children. There is seldom, if
ever, a need for formalized or ritualistic technique. The eidetic imagery of a
child, his readiness, eagerness and actual need for new learnings, his desire
to understand and to share in activities of the world about him, and the
opportunities offered by “pretend” and imitation games all serve to enable
him to respond competently and well to hypnotic suggestions.187
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yTp_atr2G9E&feature=user
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GOqe-
JPLKfw&feature=PlayList&p=D2DE4AD0F8 129
8F1&index=0&playnext=1
Young people often respond better to hypnosis than adults, and have the
imagination necessary to make the process work well.
http://www.morpheusclinic.com/content/frequently-asked-questions
Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1

Also discussed on the radio program with Dr. Will Horton cited above, was
how young people under thirty don’t have reference base to compare
information with, and Obama is easily able to implant suggestions that are
unchallenged in people without developed life experiences because they
have nothing to draw from to compare and contrast such absolute truths
with. Younger people do not have prior experience with which to compare
such compelling speech. As adults, many of us have heard at some point
very compelling speech, and know it does not mean that anywhere near the
claimed results will follow.
Younger people are more subject to the influence of hypnosis generally. The
period from age 14 to age 21 is the best period for both speed of induction
and depth of hypnosis.188 After age 20 there is a gradual decline. Younger
people, and people with more intellectual minds, like readers, are also more
subject to the influence of hypnosis techniques that work by distracting the
conscious mind in order to access the subconscious, non-dominant
hemisphere.189 This is because the processing part of the mind in these
people will be more proactive in trying to solve the problems and chasing
the distractions thrown by the hypnotist, as intended, leaving the
subconscious more vulnerable to implanting of suggestion. Same with
younger people being more creative, for similar reasons.
Younger people have a general need to believe. Younger people have
internally a need to be imaginative, to do something different, to change the
world, by their nature. They have a compelling internal drive to be part of
something, and in a way, do something different to make the world a better
place. Obama makes very effective use of this about young people.
However, just because Obama passionately shouts, “its time for change,
new energy, and new ideas”, does not mean he really has any new ideas.
Unfortunately, in helping young people understand that they are being
unduly influenced, they may not want to believe it just like many adults will
not. Perhaps those people not convinced by this document can explain who
Obama sat in Rev. Wright’s church for 20 years but did not know Wright’s
racist and anti-American views. You can never get a hypnotist to admit he is
wrong. When you ask him how he didn’t know Wright’s views, he says he
knew some of them but there were also positive things about the guy. When
you ask him how he stayed in the church, he says he didn’t hear these
particular statements. Obama has played this dance successfully with every
journalist until they gave up and moved on.
Conclusion and commentary
Obama is beguiling us. He is hypnotizing us like sheep. Fooling us like
children. The Obama phenomenon is essentially idol worship, caused by the
well-studied and well-rehearsed mind control tricks of a man who is very
clever, able to play the media, and thinks he has the right take the
Presidency of the United States through such deceptive means. He takes it
upon himself to decide he has the right to do so, and manipulate us without
our knowledge by sidelining our rational judgment. What does such a
person think of Americans?
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p186, Erickson 1967, p423.
Modern Hypnosis, Theory and Practice, Masud Ansari, Ph.D., p31.
Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume
1, p13 – “[Erickson’s] overall strategy while conducting trance inductions
appears to have these three dimensions. 1) pacing and distraction of the
dominant (language) hemisphere.” See also, p137, “The induction of the
altered state of consciousness called trance requires and implies the
distraction and/or utilization of what Milton calls the conscious mind.”
 Worse yet, his hypnosis probably has at least some effect on millions. Jews
voting for the candidate endorsed by Iran, Hamas, Farakhan, and Khalidi
should be a wake up signal that something is not Kosher.
Obama could not have picked a worse list of supporters than Wright, Ayers,
the Black Panther Party, Farakhan, Iran, Hamas, Khalidi, Rezko if he were
the Anti-Christ himself. This unknown man is trying to gain control of the
world’s largest nuclear weapons arsenal by knowingly and intentionally
using a form of hypnosis on America that is the most deceptive and
manipulative form of communication known to man.
We are being played like a violin by someone very smooth, who knows he
can just play his games dodging questions and avoiding issues until the
election. This document barely scratches the surface of his use of hypnosis.
He knows he can promise anything. If questioned with skepticism, he
downplays. Then, he goes right back to promising everything again. He can
take neutral positions covering himself both ways, because what he is doing
is never analyzed closely enough. He easily makes audiences feel like he
has answered a question without having done so, simply by saying he has.
If caught with evidence of his hypnosis, first, he will surely deny it. He will
probably stop doing it. If it is prove, he will admit it, but say it is not his
fault. Then, he may say that all advertising is part subliminal, and that
everyone does it. Nobody has ever tried to gain the Presidency like this. It
literally doesn’t matter what he says, because the conscious mind cannot
override the subconscious, and he knows that.
Obama is an eloquent speaker, and very clever, but the rest is hypnosis. He
is able to tell us exactly what the polls say, exactly what he knows we want
to hear. – even if he has to change positions from one day to the next.190
He knows exactly how to manipulate us. And he is false. Obama’s use of
hypnosis and mind games gets you to make a different decision than you
logically would have, yet he makes you feel like you came to that decision
on your own rational reasoning. our own feelings are false.
If a person is willing to be this deceptive and smile as broadly as Obama
smiles, there is not telling what else he may be lying about, and no telling
even who he really is. One must wonder why someone would risk their
entire political career, so certain that if America was given another four
years to find out who Obama really is, that we would never elect him, and
that he must get the Presidency now, or never. This is a man we know
nothing about, except that he has no virtually accomplishments, many
shady connections, and lacks the judgment and character to disassociate
such persons, and is an influential orator. We as Americans have to be
stronger than to be influenced by words alone, even such powerful ones.
The speaking style of frowning and angrily pointing while speaking angrily
as part of covert hypnosis in public speeches is not used by Obama alone,
but also was used by at least one other hypnotist in history who got millions
to follow him. 191 192 193
190 Jackie Mason on Obama’s change in every major position, See amazing
video of Obama at 4:40 changing his position on Iran at
http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=4169200353336147
16&ei=uffkSIHzBZjUqAOqg-GZCw&q=jackie+mason+obama+iran&vt=lf
.
http://www.theblackvault.com/article-print-8227.html . See also, “He also
maintained his almost hypnotic power over his entourage and the masses”
http://www.grolier.com/wwii/wwii_hitler.html Also, One of the books
Hitler is believed to have been particularly interested in was the work of the
French psychologist Gustave Le Bon. Le Bon (1841-1931), had written a
book entitled Psychology of the Masses. It had been translated into German
in 1908, and records show a copy was delivered to the library frequented by
Hitler that same year. Le Bon's book describes his theories on crowds and
their behaviour. He had identified that group behaviour could be
manipulated by hypnotic suggestion, and that few individuals in a crowd
possess a sufficiently strong personality to resist such suggestion.
http://ezinearticles.com/?Inspiration,-Motivation-and-the-Link-to-
Hypnosis---Article-Five&id=988 173

Obama is even taking away your ability to rationally judge and scrutinize
what he is putting into your subconscious. One must wonder the true nature
of a person who is willing to literally hypnotize us like children, in order to
try and manipulate us into voting for him by sidelining our rational
judgment. Obama is effectively saying, “the voter cannot be trusted to make
this a logical decision, I will decide for them.” This is a frightening
character trait suggestive of someone who almost believes he is some type
of Messiah. Obama’s hyper-confidence alone is frightening. He is neither
simply confident nor overconfident nor even simply arrogant. Obama’s aura
almost suggests he believes himself to be Messianic, and his right to the
Presidency long overdue and unquestionable. Not to mention his right to
hypnotize millions to get that Presidency absolute. There was a moment
during the Clinton primaries, where Bill Clinton made some strong
statements against Obama, and Obama’s reaction to the former President
was clearly one of being annoyed. It is questionable what type of
psychological g-d complex or other abnormality would make Obama look
down upon a former President as annoying.
Obama’s insulting hand gestures provide more insight into his disturbing
true nature that he successfully hides 99% of the time, that of someone who
uses psychologically manipulative subconscious techniques to implant
second-grade school-yard insults in the minds of unaware voters. Obama’s
use of hypnosis on millions of people without our knowledge nor
permission is unparalleled subterfuge. What kind of person presumes that
they have the right to hypnotize Americans like children, and use mind
control techniques which circumvent our rational judgment? But even more
amazingly, what type of person runs for President of the United States with
such behavior? - repeatedly flashing such insulting hand gestures at his
opponents, trying to send subconscious messages? It is beyond obnoxious.
Only a disturbed individual would think he is slippery enough to get away
with something like this. Only a disturbed person would think they should
get away with something like this, and with no accomplishments having
never run anything become leader of the free world. Only a disturbed
individual who thinks he can do absolutely anything would try, because to
any sane person running for President, the risks of being caught would
outweigh the potential rewards of such behavior. The hypnosis, trying to
fool an entire nation, the obscene hand gestures towards his opponents
again and again. Obama’s actions present the frightening picture of a
genuinely perverted man, an egomaniac hypnotist with a g-d complex
grown from his ability to get millions to eat out of his hand. The fact that he
refers to his own message as a light shining down from above. The fact that
he refers to himself as an epiphany. The fact that he does hand gestures to
make it look like he is parting the water like Moses. The fact that he does
all those other things to make people like Nancy Pelosi come out and say he
is ‘sent by g-d.”
One must also wonder what would happen to this country if Obama won,
and only afterwards was it uncovered how he used hypnosis to gain the
Presidency. What if upon discovery, many said they would not have voted
for him otherwise? Those entrusted with protecting our democracy must do
a better job protecting it. Our entire nation was almost lost to a con-man.
The media may avoid this story for a number of reasons. Maybe it is too
complicated for them, doesn’t fit a sound byte mold, or maybe cannot be
delivered in a 60 second news story before moving on. Then again, it may
be the most watched news story from now until the election. This story
must break. People must know what is happening and those who help
spread this word may be looked back on as heroic defenders of
democracy. Let’s learn from history, not learn that we can repeat it. Our
democracy is on the line.
Compare the angry frowning and angry pointing and speaking style of
Obama
http://www.mikefrancesa.com/wordpress/?p=101 1
Compare the angry frowning and angry pointing and speaking style of
Obama 18:00minutes into his California Democratic National Convention
speech with the individual on this video http://video.google.com/videoplay?
docid=-21 1746012802428229&ei=h-
PESJCLBqfcqAO3s5S3BQ&q=adolph+hitler+speech+1933&vt=lf

The effects of his hypnosis must be cancelled out by people starting to take
a rational look at who he is, including the media. It is certainly a concern
that this type of hypnosis is so effective that even after learning what
Obama is doing, many may still not believe and accept that Obama is
hypnotizing them and that they might not otherwise vote for him. 194 It is
my hope that the effects of all of Obama’s hypnotic and subconscious
tactics are wiped away and neutralized completely. ..that everyone now be
allowed to think and make logical and rational decisions.
MK ULTRA

From the Internet, for informational purposes

only.

“The control over a person’s behavior ostensibly achieved in hypnosis

obviously nominates it for use in the difficult process of interrogation.” So
begins a CIA study of “Hypnosis in Interrogation” which appeared in the
agency’s classified journal Studies in Intelligence. Could placing
interrogatees under trance help loosen their lips? That was one of many
operational uses of hypnosis that the CIA pondered and tested.
The Studies in Intelligence article, which was written in 1960 by
Edward F. Deshere, sheds some light on the CIA’s interest in hypnosis, but
it tells only a tiny, incomplete part of the story. Given the potential power of
hypnosis to unlock the secrets of the mind, Deshere found it “surprising that
nobody . . . seems to have used it in this way.” He searched the literature
and consulted top experts, but found no intelligence agency that “admits to
familiarity with applications of the process [of hypnosis] to interrogation.”
In fact, such applications had already been tested by the CIA and others, but
it appears that Deshere—like most CIA officers at the time—was not privy
to information about MKULTRA, the agency’s super-secret program of
mind and behavior control research. The program, launched in 1953 to
expand on previous CIA investigations of related topics, would last until
1963.
In the mid-1970s, congressional committees investigating MKULTRA
discovered that the CIA had become involved with a startling array of
brainwashing techniques. The methods studied under MKULTRA included
electroshock, subliminal communication, sensory deprivation and
stimulation, the use of drugs (from “truth serum” to hard narcotics to LSD),
and yes, even hypnosis. Many of these experiments were conducted on
unwitting human subjects, and several MKULTRA projects are listed
among the most appalling CIA abuses on record. (See Dossier’s
documented feature on MKULTRA for more information.)
Hypnosis, in fact, had attracted the interest of military and intelligence
agencies years before MKULTRA. In The Search for the “Manchurian
Candidate,” a thorough history of the CIA’s mind control work, author John
Marks devoted an entire chapter to the study and use hypnosis. “No mind-
control technique has more captured popular imagination—and kindled
fears—than hypnosis,” Marks noted. For the CIA officials tasked with
turning mental abilities (and vulnerabilities) into Cold War weapons,
“hypnosis offered too much promise not to be pursued.”
The CIA’s first major involvement with hypnosis originated in the Office of
Security, which in 1950 formed special interrogation squads—each of
which was staffed with an expert hypnotist—for the purpose of evaluating
potential foreign agents and defectors from enemy countries. Code-named
BLUEBIRD, the program was put under the command of Morse Allen, a
former officer of both Naval Intelligence and the State Department, who
developed an avid interest in hypnosis when he joined the CIA’s Office of
Security. (Shortly thereafter, BLUEBIRD took on the new codename
ARTICHOKE, the project that directly preceded MKULTRA.)
According to Marks, not only did Allen consult with and employ some of
the top academic experts on hypnosis, he also conducted his own
experiments: “He asked young CIA secretaries to stay after work and ran
them through the hypnotic paces—proving to his own satisfaction that he
could make them do whatever he wanted. He had secretaries steal SECRET
files and pass them on to total strangers, thus violating the most basic CIA
security rules. He got them to steal from each other and start fires. He made
one of them report to the bedroom of a strange man and then go into a deep
sleep.”
Allen recorded the observation that “this activity clearly indicates that
individuals under hypnosis might be compromised and blackmailed.” Those
were helpful abilities for a spy agency, to be sure, but Allen later envisioned
a more extreme use of hypnosis. In 1954 he hypnotized another secretary,
and convinced her while in the trance to pick up and shoot an (unloaded)
gun at another secretary.
The implications were serious: agents could conceivably be induced to
assassinate a target without knowing what they were doing. However, Allen
had learned enough about hypnosis to be skeptical that such an operation
could actually be pulled off. No one could be sure that such experimental
successes could be carried over into the operational realm. Hypnosis was
surely attractive, but it was also unreliable; there were simply too many
variables in how subjects might act under hypnosis or under the power of
post-hypnotic suggestion.
One CIA psychologist who was heavily involved in later hypnosis research,
John Gittinger, saw promise but pratfalls with the technique. “Predictable
absolute control is not possible on a particular individual,” he concluded,
and absolute control, after all, was the objective. The pre-programmed
assassin remained an elusive goal.
Still, the CIA would do everything in its power to identify intelligence uses
of hypnosis. In 1977, the agency informed Congress that of the 149
subprojects that were launched under MKULTRA, eight dealt with hypnosis
—including two that studied “hypnosis and drugs in combination.”
Hypnosis research was conducted by several renowned scientists whose
funding would later be traced to the CIA. At major universities and top
research institutes, as well as military bases and prisons, subjects were put
into trance in experiments that were intended first and foremost to advance
the CIA’s ability to operationalize hypnosis.
In 1960, the CIA’s counterintelligence (CI) staff became involved in the
effort. Intent on discovering and improving on the Soviet Union’s mind
games, the CI offi cers saw hypnosis as a “potential breakthrough in
clandestine technology,” as it was described in one CIA document.
For the CI staff, interest in hypnotism went beyond the theoretical into the
operational. In July 1963, the CIA issued a 128-page “Counterintelligence
Interrogation” manual, a document that was not made public until 1997.
Among the tactics described for “coercive” interrogation of “resistant
sources” was hypnosis. (ParaScope has made available both an online and a
print version of this startling document.)
“The problem of overcoming the resistance of an uncooperative
interrogatee is essentially a problem of inducing regression to a level at
which the resistance can no longer be sustained,” the manual said.
“Hypnosis is one way of regressing people.”
The manual cited the work of Martin Orne, a famous psychologist who
received several CIA subsidies under MKULTRA for his research on
hypnosis and interrogation. Like other experts, Orne concluded that
hypnosis would probably be of marginal use for this purpose. To the CI
staff, Orne’s generally skeptical view of the technique was “somewhat too
cautious or pessimistic.”
The manual suggested, for example, that a CIA interrogator “could tell a
suspect double agent in trance that the KGB is conducting the questioning,
and thus invert the whole frame of reference” for the interrogatee. “[O]nce
the subject is tricked into believing that he is talking to friend rather than
foe, or that divulging the truth is the best way to suit his own purposes, his
resistance will be replaced with cooperation. The value of hypnotic trance is
not that it permits the interrogator to impose his will but rather that it can be
used to convince the interrogatee that there is not valid reason not to be
forthcoming.”
The manual added that hypnosis “offers one advantage not inherent in other
interrogation techniques or aides: the posthypnotic suggestion.” In certain
cases, the manual instructed:
“[I]t should be possible to administer a silent drug to a resistant source,
persuade him as the drug takes effect that he is slipping into a hypnotic
trance, place him under actual hypnosis as consciousness is returning, shift
his frame of reference so that his reasons for resistance become reasons for
cooperation, interrogate him, and conclude the session by implanting the
suggestion that when he emerges from trance he will not remember
anything about what has happened.”
Although the CIA’s hypnosis work had advanced considerably by the early
1960s, you wouldn’t know it from reading Deshere’s report for Studies in
Intelligence. At the same time, Deshere does have plenty to say about
potential roles for hypnosis in the spy trade, exploring several crucial
questions about the utility of the technique. Can interrogatees under trance
be made to tell the truth and nothing but the truth? Can they be hypnotized
without their quiescence or their knowledge? Can they, though post-
hypnotic suggestion, be turned into virtual spy-robots to do the CIA’s
bidding? Can amnesia be induced by the hypno-handlers to erase memories
of spy missions?
After conducting a lengthy analysis, Deshere concluded that there was
probably some use for hypnosis in interrogations, of a very limited nature.
He wrote that “the hypnotic situation, rather than hypnosis itself, could be
used to relieve a person of any sense of guilt for his behavior, giving him
the notion that he is helpless to prevent his manipulation by the
interrogator.” Deshere described how such an operation could work:
“A captive’s anxiety could be heightened, for example, by rumors that the
interrogator possesses semi-magical techniques of extracting information. A
group of collaborating captives could verify that interrogees lose all control
over their actions, and so on. After such preliminary conditioning, a ‘trance’
could be induced with drugs in a setting described by Orne [the MKULTRA
researcher discussed above] as the ‘magic room,’ where a number of
devices could be used to convince the subject that he is responding to
suggestions.”
Once the interrogatee was persuaded that he was under the control of his
handlers, Deshere reasoned, “the individual could legitimately renounce
responsibility for divulging information, much as if he had done it in
delirium.”
Deshere’s elaborate plan was pretty dry stuff, when compared to some of
the more grandiose CIA hypnosis schemes hatched during the early years of
the Cold War. Just how far did the CIA take its investigation of the uses of
hypnosis? We may never know all of the answers, but this once-secret
report offers more clues as to why the trance technique was added to the
CIA’s arsenal of mind control weapons.

CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY

WASHINGTON 25, D. C.

OFFICE OF THE DIRECTOR

25 APR 1956

MEMORANDUM FOR: The Honorable J. Edgar Hoover

Director, Federal Bureau of Investigation

SUBJECT: Brainwashing
The attached study on brainwashing was prepared by my staff in response
to the increasing acute interest in the subject throughout the intelligence and
security components of the Government. I feel you will find it well worth
your personal attention. It represents the thinking of leading psychologists,
psychiatrists and intelligence specialists, based in turn on interviews with
many individuals who have had personal experience with Communist
brainwashing, and on extensive research and testing. While individuals
specialists hold divergent views on various aspects of this most complex
subject, I believe the study reflects a synthesis of majority expert opinion. I
will, of course, appreciate any comments on it that you or your staff may
have.

(signed)
Allen W. Dulles
Director

ENCLOSURE

A REPORT ON COMMUNIST BRAINWASHING

The report that follows is a condensation of a study by training experts of

the important classified and unclassified information available on this
subject.

BACKGROUND

Brainwashing, as a technique, has been used for centuries and is no mystery

to psychologists. In this sense, brainwashing means involuntary reeducation
of basic beliefs and values. All people are being reeducated continually.
New information changes one’s beliefs. Everyone has experienced to some
degree the conflict that ensues when new information is not consistent with
prior belief. The experience of the brainwashed individual differs in that the
inconsistent information is forced upon the individual under controlled
conditions after the possibility of critical judgment has been removed by a
variety of methods.

There is no question that an individual can be broken psychologically by

captors with knowledge and willingness to persist in techniques aimed at
deliberately destroying the integration of a personality. Although it is
probable that everyone reduced to such a confused, disoriented state will
respond to the introduction of new beliefs, this cannot be stated
dogmatically.

PRINCIPLES OF HUMAN CONTROL AND REACTION TO CONTROL

There are progressive steps in exercising control over an individual and
changing his
behaviour and personality integration. The following five steps are typical
of behaviour changes in any controlled individual:

1. Making the individual aware of control is the first stage in changing

his behaviour. A small child is made aware of the physical and
psychological control of his parents and quickly recognizes that an
overwhelming force must be reckoned with. So, a controlled adult comes to
recognize the overwhelming powers of the state and the impersonal,
“incarcerative” machinery in which he is enmeshed. The individual
recognizes that definite limits have been put upon the ways he can respond.

(Approved for Release) (62-80750-2712X)

(Date: 8 FEB 1984)

2. Realization of his complete dependence upon the controlling system

is a major factor in the controlling of his behavior. The controlled adult is
forced to accept the fact that food, tobacco, praise, and the only social
contact that he will get come from the very interrogator who exercises
control over him.
3. The awareness of control and recognition of dependence result in
causing internal conflict and breakdown of previous patterns of behaviour.
Although this transition can be relatively mild in the case of a child, it is
almost invariably severe for the adult undergoing brainwashing. Only an
individual who holds his values lightly can change them easily. Since the
brainwasher-interrogators aim to have the individuals undergo profound
emotional change, they force their victims to seek out painfully what is
desired by the controlling individual. During this period the victim is likely
to have a mental breakdown characterized by delusions and hallucinations.
4. Discovery that there is an acceptable solution to his problem is the
first stage of reducing the individual’s conflict. It is characteristically
reported by victims of brainwashing that this discovery led to an
overwhelming feeling of relief that the horror of internal conflict would
cease and that perhaps they would not, after all, be driven insane. It is at
this point that they are prepared to make major changes in their value-
system. This is an automatic rather than voluntary choice. They have lost
their ability to be critical.
5. Reintergration of values and identification with the controlling
system is the final stage in changing the behaviour of the controlled
individual. A child who has learned a new, socially desirable behaviour
demonstrates its importance by attempting to as—apt the new behaviour to
a variety of other situations. Similar states in the brainwashed adult are

(SECTION DELETED BY CIA)

pitiful. His new value-system, his manner of perceiving, organizing, and

giving meaning to events, is virtually independent of his former value—
system. He is no longer capable of thinking or speaking in concepts other
than those he has adopted. He tends to identify by expressing thanks to his
captors for helping him see the light. Brainwashing can be achieved without
using illegal means. Anyone willing to use known principles of control and
reactions to control and capable of demonstrating the patience needed in
raising a child can probably achieve successful brainwashing.

COMMUNIST CONTROL TECHNIQUES AND THEIR EFFECTS

A description of usual communist control techniques follows.

1. Interrogation. There are at least two ways in which “interrogation”

is used:

a. Elicitation, which is designed to get the individual to surrender

protected information, is a form of interrogation. One major difference
between elicitation and interrogation used to achieve brainwashing is that
the mind of the individual must be kept clear to permit coherent, undistorted
disclosure of protected information.
b. Elicitation for the purpose of brainwashing consists of questioning,
argument, indoctrination, threats, cajolery, praise, hostility, and a variety of
other pressures. The aim of this interrogation is to hasten the breakdown of
the individual’s value system and to encourage the substitution of a
different value-system. The procurement of protected information is
secondary and is used as a device to increase pressure upon the individual.
The term “interrogation” in this paper will refer, in general, to this type. The
“interrogator” is the individual who conducts this type of interrogation and
who controls the administration of the other pressures. He is the protagonist
against whom the victim develops his conflict, and upon whom the victim
develops a state of dependency as he seeks some solution to his conflict.

2. Physical Torture and Threats of Torture. Two types of physical

torture are distinguishable more by their psychological effect in inducing
conflict than by the degree of painfulness:

a. The first type is one in which the victim has a passive role in the
pain inflicted on him (e.g., beatings). His conflict involves the decision of
whether or not to give in to demands in order to avoid further pain.
Generally, brutality of this type was not found to achieve the desired results.
Threats of torture were found more effective, as fear of pain causes greater
conflict within the individual than does pain itself.
b. The second type of torture is represented by requiring the individual
to stand in one spot for several hours or assume some other pain-inducing
position. Such a requirement often engenders in the individual a
determination to “stick it out.” This internal act of resistance provide a
feeling of moral superiority at first. As time passes and his pain mounts,
however, the individual becomes aware that it is his own original
determination to resist that is causing the continuance of pain. A conflict
develops within the individual between his moral determination and his
desire to collapse and discontinue the pain. It is this extra internal conflict,
in addition to the conflict over whether or not to give in to the demands
made of him, that tends to make this method of torture more effective in the
breakdown of the individual personality.

3. Isolation. Individual differences in reaction to isolation are probably

greater than to any other method. Some individuals appear to be able to
withstand prolonged periods of isolation without deleterious effects, while a
relatively short period of isolation reduces others to the verge of psychosis.
Reaction varies with the conditions of the isolation cell. Some sources have
indicated a strong reaction to filth and vermin, although they had negligible
reactions to the isolation. Others reacted violently to isolation in relatively
clean cells. The predominant cause of breakdown in such situations is a lack
of sensory stimulation (i.e., grayness of walls, lack of sound, absence of
social contact, etc.). Experimental subjects exposed to this condition have
reported vivid hallucinations and overwhelming fears of losing their sanity.

4. Control of Communication. This is one of the most effective

methods for creating a sense of helplessness and despair. This measure
might well be considered the cornerstone of the communist system of
control. It consists of strict regulation of the mail, reading materials,
broadcast materials, and social contact available to the individual. The need
to communicate is so great that when the usual channels are blocked, the
individual will resort to any open channel, almost regardless of the
implications of using that particular channel. Many POWs in Korea, whose
only act of “collaboration” was to sign petitions and “peace appeals,”
defended their actions on the ground that this was the only method of letting
the outside world know they were still alive. May stated that their morale
and fortitude would have been increased immeasurably had leafl ets of
encouragement been dropped to them. When the only contact with the
outside world is via the interrogator, the prisoner comes to develop extreme
dependency on his interrogator and hence loses another prop to his morale.
Another wrinkle in communication control is the informer system. The
recruitment of informers in POW camps discouraged communication
between inmates. POWs who feared that every act or thought of resistance
would be communicated to the camp administrators, lost faith in their
fellow man and were forced to “untrusting individualism.” Informers are
also under several stages of brainwashing and elicitation to develop and
maintain control over the victims.
5. Induction of Fatigue. This is a well-known device for breaking will
power and critical powers of judgment. Deprivation of sleep results in more
intense psychological debilitation than does any other method of
engendering fatigue. The communists vary their methods. “Conveyor belt”
interrogation that last 50-60 hours will make almost any individual
compromise, but there is danger that this will kill the victim. It is safer to
conduct interrogations of 8-10 hours at night while forcing the prisoner to
remain awake during the day. Additional interruptions in the remaining 2-3
hours of allotted sleep quickly reduce the most resilient individual.
Alternate administration of drug stimulants and depressants hastens the
process of fatigue and sharpens the psychological reactions of excitement
and depression. Fatigue, in addition to reducing the will to resist, also
produces irritation and fear that arise from increased “slips of the tongue,”
forgetfulness, and decreased ability to maintain orderly thought processes.

6. Control of Food, Water and Tobacco. The controlled individual is

made intensely aware of his dependence upon his interrogator for the
quality and quantity of his food and tobacco. The exercise of this control
usually follows a pattern. No food and little or no water is permitted the
individual for several days prior to interrogation. When the prisoner first
complains of this to the interrogator, the latter expresses surprise at such
inhumane treatment. He makes a demand of the prisoner. If the latter
complies, he receives a good meal. If he does not, he gets a diet of
unappetizing food containing limited vitamins, minerals, and calories. This
diet is supplemented occasionally by the interrogator if the prisoner
“cooperates.” Studies of controlled starvation indicate that the whole value-
system of the subjects underwent a change. Their irritation increased as
their ability to think clearly decreased. The control of tobacco presented an
even greater source of conflict for heavy smokers. Because tobacco is not
necessary to life, being manipulated by his craving for it can in the
individual a strong sense of guilt.

7. Criticism and Self-Criticism. There are mechanisms of communist

thought control. Self-criticism gains its effectiveness from the fact that
although it is not a crime for a man to be wrong, it is a major crime to be
stubborn and to refuse to learn. Many individuals feel intensely relieved in
being able to share their sense of guilt. Those individuals however, who
have adjusted to handling their guilt internally have difficulty adapting to
criticism and self-criticism. In brainwashing, after a sufficient sense of guilt
has been created in the individual, sharing and self-criticism permit relief.
The price paid for this relief, however, is loss of individuality and increased
dependency.

8. Hypnosis and Drugs as Controls. There is no reliable evidence that

the communists are making widespread use of drugs or hypnosis in
brainwashing or elicitation. The exception to this is the use of common
stimulants or depressants in inducing fatigue and “mood swings.”
9. Other methods of control, which when used in conjunction with the
basic processes, hasten the deterioration of prisoners’ sense of values and
resistance are:
a. Requiring a case history or autobiography of the prisoner provides a
mine of information for the interrogator in establishing and “documenting”
accusations.
b. Friendliness of the interrogator, when least expected, upsets the
prisoner’s ability to maintain a critical attitude.
c. Petty demands, such as severely limiting the allotted time for use of
toilet facilities or requiring the POW to kill hundreds of flies, are
harassment methods.
d. Prisoners are often humiliated by refusing them the use of toilet
facilities during interrogation until they soil themselves. Often prisoners
were not permitted to bathe for weeks until they felt contemptible.
e. Conviction as a war criminal appears to be a potent factor in
creating despair in the individual. One official analysis of the pressures
exerted by the ChiComs on “confessors” and “non-confessors” to
participation in bacteriological warfare in Korea showed that actual trial
and conviction of “war crimes” was overwhelmingly associated with
breakdown and confession.
f. Attempted elicitation of protected information at various times
during the brainwashing process diverted the individual from awareness of
the deterioration of his value-system. The fact that, in most cases, the
ChiComs did not want or need such intelligence was not known to the
prisoner. His attempts to protect such information was made at the expense
of hastening his own breakdown.

THE EXERCISE OF CONTROL: A “SCHEDULE” FOR

BRAINWASHING

From the many fragmentary accounts reviewed, the following appears to be

the most likely description of what occurs during brainwashing.

In the period immediately following capture, the captors are faced with the
problem of deciding on best ways of exploitation of the prisoners.
Therefore, early treatment is similar both for those who are to be exploited
through elicitation and those who are to undergo brainwashing.
Concurrently with being interrogated and required to write a detailed
personal history, the prisoner undergoes a physical and psychological
“softening-up” which includes: limited unpalatable food rations,
withholding of tobacco, possible work details, severely inadequate use of
toilet facilities, no use of facilities for personal cleanliness, limitation of
sleep such as requiring a subject to sleep with a bright light in his eyes.
Apparently the interrogation and autobiographical material, the reports of
the prisoner’s behaviour in confinement, and tentative “personality typing”
by the interrogators, provide the basis upon which exploitation plans are
made.

There is a major difference between preparation for elicitation and for

brainwashing. Prisoners exploited through elicitation must retain suffi cient
clarity of thought to be able to give coherent, factual accounts. In
brainwashing, on the other hand, the fi rst thing attacked is clarity of
thought. To develop a strategy of defense, the controlled individual must
determine what plans have been made for his exploitation. Perhaps the best
cues he can get are internal reactions to the pressures he undergoes.

The most important aspect of the brainwashing process is the interrogation.

The other pressures are designed primarily to help the interrogator achieve
his goals. The following states are created systematically within the
individual. These may vary in order, but all are necessary to the
brainwashing process:

1. A feeling of helplessness in attempting to deal with the impersonal

machinery of control.
2. An initial reaction of “surprise.”
3. A feeling of uncertainty about what is required of him.
4. A developing feeling of dependence upon the interrogator.
5. A sense of doubt and loss of objectivity.
6. Feelings of guilt.
7. A questioning attitude toward his own value-system.
8. A feeling of potential “breakdown,” i.e., that he might go crazy.
9. A need to defend his acquired principles.
10. A final sense of “belonging” (identification).
A feeling of helplessness in the face of the impersonal machinery of control
is carefully engendered within the prisoner. The individual who receives the
preliminary treatment described above not only begins to feel like an
“animal” but also feels that nothing can be done about it. No one pays any
personal attention to him. His complaints fall on deaf ears. His loss of
communication, if he has been isolated, creates a feeling that he has been
“forgotten.” Everything that happens to him occurs according to an
impersonal; time schedule that has nothing to do with his needs. The voices
and footsteps of the guards are muted. He notes many contrasts, e.g., his
greasy, unpalatable food may be served on battered tin dishes by guards
immaculately dressed in white. The first steps in “depersonalization” of the
prisoner have begun. He has no idea what to expect. Ample opportunity is
allotted for him to ruminate upon all the unpleasant or painful things that
could happen to him. He approaches the main interrogator with mixed
feelings of relief and fright.

Surprise is commonly used in the brainwashing process. The prisoner is

rarely prepared for the fact that the interrogators are usually friendly and
considerate at first. They make every effort to demonstrate that they are
reasonable human beings. Often they apologize for bad treatment received
by the prisoner and promise to improve his lot if he, too, is reasonable. This
behaviour is not what he has steeled himself for. He lets down some of his
defenses and tries to take a reasonable attitude. The first occasion he balks
at satisfying a request of the interrogator, however, he is in for another
surprise. The formerly reasonable interrogator unexpectedly turns into a
furious maniac. The interrogator is likely to slap the prisoner or draw his
pistol and threaten to shoot him. Usually this storm of emotion ceases as
suddenly as it began and the interrogator stalks from the room. These
surprising changes create doubt in the prisoner as to his very ability to
perceive another person’s motivations correctly. His next interrogation
probably will be marked by impassivity in the interrogator’s mien.

A feeling of uncertainty about what is required of him is likewise carefully

engendered within the individual. Pleas of the prisoner to learn specifically
of what he is accused and by whom are side-stepped by the interrogator.
Instead, the prisoner is asked to tell why he thinks he is held and what he
feels he is guilty of. If the prisoner fails to come up with anything, he is
accused in terms of broad generalities (e.g., espionage, sabotage, acts of
treason against the “people”). This usually provokes the prisoner to make
some statement about his activities. If this takes the form of a denial, he is
usually sent to isolation on further decreased food rations to “think over”
his crimes. This process can be repeated again and again. As soon as the
prisoner can think of something that might be considered self-incriminating,
the interrogator appears momentarily satisfied. The prisoner is asked to
write down his statement in his own words and sign it.

Meanwhile a strong sense of dependence upon the interrogator is

developed. It does not take long for the prisoner to realize that the
interrogator is the source of all punishment, all gratification, and all
communication. The interrogator, meanwhile, demonstrates his
unpredictability. He is perceived by the prisoner as a creature of whim. At
times, the interrogator can be pleased very easily and at other times no
effort on the part of the prisoner will placate him. The prisoner may begin
to channel so much energy into trying to predict the behaviour of the
unpredictable interrogator that he loses track of what is happening inside
himself.

After the prisoner has developed the above psychological and emotional
reactions to a sufficient degree, the brainwashing begins in earnest. First,
the prisoner’s remaining critical faculties must be destroyed. He undergoes
long, fatiguing interrogations while looking at a bright light. He is called
back again and again for interrogations after minimal sleep. He may
undergo torture that tends to create internal confl ict. Drugs may be used to
accentuate his “mood swings.” He develops depression when the
interrogator is being kind and becomes euphoric when the interrogator is
threatening the direst penalties. Then the cycle is reversed. The prisoner fi
nds himself in a constant state of anxiety which prevents him from relaxing
even when he is permitted to sleep. Short periods of isolation now bring on
visual and auditory hallucinations. The prisoner feels himself losing his
objectivity. It is in this state that the prisoner must keep up an endless
argument with the interrogator. He may be faced with the confessions of
other individuals who “collaborated” with him in his crimes. The prisoner
seriously begins to doubts his own memory. This feeling is heightened by
his inability to recall little things like the names of the people he knows
very well or the date of his birth. The interrogator patiently sharpens this
feeling of doubt by more questioning. This tends to create a serious state of
uncertainty when the individual has lost most of his critical faculties.

The prisoner must undergo additional internal conflict when strong feelings
of guilt are aroused within him. As any clinical psychologist is aware, it is
not at all difficult to create such feelings. Military servicemen are
particularly vulnerable. No one can morally justify killing even in wartime.
The usual justification is on the grounds of necessity or self-defense. The
interrogator is careful to circumvent such justification. He keeps the
interrogation directed toward the prisoner’s moral code. Every moral
vulnerability is exploited by incessant questioning along this line until the
prisoner begins to question the very fundamentals of his own value-system.
The prisoner must constantly fight a potential breakdown. He finds that his
mind is “going blank” for longer and longer periods of time. He can not
think constructively. If he is to maintain any semblance of psychological
integrity, he must bring to an end this state of interminable internal conflict.
He signifies a willingness to write a confession.

If this were truly the end, no brainwashing would have occurred. The
individual would simply have given in to intolerable pressure. Actually, the
final stage of the brainwashing process has just begun. No matter what the
prisoner writes in his confession the interrogator is not satisfied. The
interrogator questions every sentence of the confession. He begins to edit it
with the prisoner. The prisoner is forced to argue against every change. This
is the essence of brainwashing. Every time that he gives in on a point to the
interrogator, he must rewrite his whole confession. Still the interrogator is
not satisfied. In a desperate attempt to maintain some semblance of integrity
and to avoid further brainwashing, the prisoner must begin to argue that
what he has already confessed to is true. He begins to accept as his own the
statements he has written. He uses many of the interrogator’s earlier
arguments to buttress his position. By this process, identification with the
interrogator’s value-system becomes complete. It is extremely important to
recognize that a qualitative change has taken place within the prisoner. The
brainwashed victim does not consciously change his value-system; rather
the change occurs despite his efforts. He is no more responsible for this
change than is an individual who “snaps” and becomes psychotic. And like
the psychotic, the prisoner is not even aware of the transition.

DEFENSIVE MEASURES OTHER THAN ON THE POLICY AND

PLANNING LEVEL

1. Training of Individuals potentially subject to communist control.

Training should provide for the trainee a realistic appraisal of what control
pressures the communists are likely to exert and what the usual human
reactions are to such pressures. The trainee must learn the most effective
ways of combating his own reactions to such pressures and he must learn
reasonable expectations as to what his behaviour should be. Training has
two decidedly positive effects; first, it provides the trainee with ways of
combatting control; second, it provides the basis for developing an
immeasurable boost in morale. Any positive action that the individual can
take, even if it is only slightly effective, gives him a sense of control over a
situation that is otherwise controlling him.

2. Training must provide the individual with the means of recognizing

realistic goals for himself.

a. Delay in yielding may be the only achievement that can be hoped

for. In any particular operation, the agent needs the support of knowing
specifically how long he must hold out to save an operation, protect his
cohorts, or gain some other goal.
b. The individual should be taught how to achieve the most favorable
treatment and how to behave and make necessary concessions to obtain
minimum penalties.
c. Individual behavioural responses to the various communist control
pressures differ markedly. Therefore, each trainee should know his own
particular assets and limitations in resisting specific pressures. He can learn
these only under laboratory conditions simulating the actual pressures he
may have to face.
d. Training must provide knowledge of the goals and the restrictions
placed upon his communist interrogator. The trainee should know what
controls are on his interrogator and to what extent he can manipulate the
interrogator. For example, the interrogator is not permitted to fail to gain
“something” from the controlled individual. The knowledge that, after the
victim has proved that he is a “tough nut to crack” he can sometimes
indicate that he might compromise on some little point to help the
interrogator in return for more favorable treatment, may be useful indeed.
Above all, the potential victim of communist control can gain a great deal
of psychological support from the knowledge that the communist
interrogator is not a completely free agent who can do whatever he wills
with his victim.
e. The trainee must learn what practical cues might aid him in
recognizing the specific goals of his interrogator. The strategy of defense
against elicitation may differ markedly from the strategy to prevent
brainwashing. To prevent elicitation, the individual may hasten his own
state of mental confusion; whereas, to prevent brainwashing, maintaining
clarity of thought processes is imperative.
f. The trainee should obtain knowledge about communist “carrots” as
well as “sticks.” The communists keep certain of their promises and always
renege on others. For example, the demonstrable fact that “informers”
receive no better treatment than other prisoners should do much to prevent
this particular evil. On the other hand, certain meaningless concessions will
often get a prisoner a good meal.
g. In particular, it should be emphasized to the trainee that, although
little can be done to control the pressures exerted upon him, he can learn
something about controlling his personal reactions to specific pressures.
The trainee can gain much from learning something about internal conflict
and conflict-producing mechanisms. He should learn to recognize when
someone is trying to arouse guilt feelings and what behavioural reactions
can occur as a response to guilt. Finally, the training must teach some
methods that can be utilized in thwarting particular communist control
techniques:

Elicitation. In general, individuals who are the hardest to interrogate for

information are those who have experienced previous interrogations.
Practice in being the victim of interrogation is a sound training device.

Torture. The trainee should learn something about the principles of pain and
shock. There is a maximum to the amount of pain that can actually be felt.
Any amount of pain can be tolerated for a limited period of time. In
addition, the trainee can be fortified by the knowledge that there are legal
limitations upon the amount of torture that can be inflicted by communist
jailors.

Isolation. The psychological effects of isolation can probably be thwarted

best by mental gymnastics and systematic efforts on the part of the isolate
to obtain stimulation for his neural end organs.

Controls on Food and Tobacco. Foods given by the communists will always
be enough to maintain survival. Sometimes the victim gets unexpected
opportunities to supplement his diet with special minerals, vitamins and
other nutrients (e.g., “iron” from the rust of prison bars). In some instances,
experience has shown that individuals could exploit refusal to eat. Such
refusal usually resulted in the transfer of the individual to a hospital where
he received vitamin injections and nutritious food. Evidently attempts of
this kind to commit suicide arouse the greatest concern in communist
officials. If deprivation of tobacco is the control being exerted, the victim
can gain moral satisfaction from “giving up” tobacco. He can’t lose since he
is not likely to get any anyway.

Fatigue. The trainee should learn reactions to fatigue and how to overcome
them insofar as possible. For example, mild physical exercise “clears the
head” in a fatigue state.

Writing Personal Accounts and Self-Criticism. Experience has indicated

that one of the most effective ways of combatting these pressures is to enter
into the spirit with an overabundance of enthusiasm. Endless written
accounts of inconsequential material have virtually “smothered” some eager
interrogators. In the same spirit, sober, detailed self-criticisms of the most
minute “sins” has sometimes brought good results.

Guidance as to the priority of positions he should defend. Perfectly

compatible responsibilities in the normal execution of an individual’s duties
may become mutually incompatible in this situation. Take the example of a
senior grade military offi cer. He has the knowledge of sensitive strategic
intelligence which it is his duty to protect. He has the responsibility of
maintaining the physical fi tness of his men and serving as a model example
for their behaviour. The offi cer may go to the camp commandant to protest
the treatment of the POWs and the commandant assures him that treatment
could be improved if he will swap something for it. Thus to satisfy one
responsibility he must compromise another. The offi cer, in short, is in a
constant state of internal confl ict. But if the offi cer is given the relative
priority of his different responsibilities, he is supported by the knowledge
that he won’t be held accountable for any other behaviour if he does his
utmost to carry out his highest priority responsibility. There is considerable
evidence that many individuals tried to evaluate the priority of their
responsibilities on their own, but were in confl ict over whether others
would subsequently accept their evaluations. More than one individual was
probably brainwashed while he was trying to protect himself against
elicitation.

CONCLUSIONS

The application of known psychological principles can lead to an

understanding of brainwashing.

1. There is nothing mysterious about personality changes resulting

from the brainwashing process.
2. Brainwashing is a complex process. Principles of motivation,
perception, learning, and physiological deprivation are needed to account
for the results achieved in brainwashing.
3. Brainwashing is an involuntary reeducation of the fundamental
beliefs of the individual. To attack the problem successfully, the
brainwashing process must be differentiated clearly from general education
methods for thought-control or mass indoctrination, and elicitation.
4. It appears possible for the individual, through training, to develop
limited defensive techniques against brainwashing. Such defensive
measures are likely to be most effective if directed toward thwarting
individual emotional reactions to brainwashing techniques rather than
toward thwarting the techniques themselves.

15 August 1955

—
(note Declassified)

SECRET

CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY WASHINGTON 25, D. C.

19 JUN 1964

(Commission No. 1131)

MEMORANDUM FOR: Mr. J. Lee Rankin

General Counsel
President’s Commission on the Assassination of President Kennedy

SUBJECT: Soviet Brainwashing Techniques

1. Reference is made to your memorandum of 19 May 1964,
requesting that materials relative to Soviet techniques in mind conditioning
and brainwashing be made available to the Commission.
2. At my request, experts on these subjects within the CIA have
prepared a brief survey of Soviet research in the direction and control of
human behavior, a copy of which is attached. The Commission may retain
this document. Please note that the use of certain sensitive materials
requires that a sensitivity indicator be affixed.
3. In the immediate future, this Agency will make available to you a
collection of overt and classified materials on these subjects, which the
Commission may retain.
4. I hope that these documents will be responsive to the Commission’s
needs.

(SIGNED)

(DECLASSIFIED) Richard Helms

(By C.I.A.) Deputy Director for Plans
(letter of ) (--------------------------)
Attachment

CD 1131 SECRET

MEMORANDUM

SUBJECT: Soviet Research and Development in the Field of Direction and

Control of Human Behavior.

1. There are two major methods of altering or controlling human

behavior, and the Soviets are interested in both. The first is psychological;
the second, pharmacological. The two may be used as individual methods
or for mutual reinforcement. For long-term control of large numbers of
people, the former method is more promising than the latter. In dealing with
individuals, the U.S. experience suggests the pharmacological approach
(assisted by psychological techniques) would be the only effective method.
Neither method would be very effective for single individuals on a long
term basis.

2. Soviet research on the pharmacological agents producing behavioral

effects has consistently lagged about five years behind Western research.
They have been interested in such research, however, and are now pursuing
research on such chemicals as LSD-25, amphetamines, tranquillizers,
hypnotics, and similar materials. There is no present evidence that the
Soviets have any singular, new, potent drugs to force a course of action on
an individual. They are aware, however, of the tremendous drive produced
by drug addiction, and PERHAPS could couple this with psychological
direction to achieve control of an individual.

3. The psychological aspects of behavior control would include not

only conditioning by repetition and training, but such things as hypnosis,
deprivation, isolation, manipulation of guilt feelings, subtle or overt threats,
social pressure, and so on. Some of the newer trends in the USSR are as
follows:
a. The adoption of a multidisciplinary approach integrating biological,
social and physical-mathematical research in attempts better to understand,
and eventually, to control human behavior in a manner consonant with
national plans.
b. The outstanding feature, in addition to the interdisciplinary
approach, is a new concern for mathematical approaches to an
understanding of behavior. Particularly notable are attempts to use modern
information theory, automata theory, and feedback concepts in interpreting
the mechanisms by which the “second signal system,” i.e., speech and
associated phenomena, affect human behavior. Implied by this “second
signal system,” using INFORMATION inputs as causative agents rather
than chemical agents, electrodes or other more exotic techniques applicable,
perhaps, to individuals rather than groups.
c. This new trend, observed in the early Post-Stalin Period, continues.
By 1960 the word “cybernetics” was used by the Soviets to designate this
new trend. This new science is considered by some as the key to
understanding the human brain and the product of its functioning—psychic
activity and personality—to the development of means for controlling it and
to ways for molding the character of the “New Communist Man.” As one
Soviet author puts it: Cybernetics can be used in “molding of a child’s
character, the inculcation of knowledge and techniques, the amassing of
experience, the establishment of social behavior patterns . . . all functions
which can be summarized as ‘control’ of the growth process of the
individual.” 1/Students of particular disciplines in the USSR, such as
psychologist and social scientists, also support the general cybernetic trend.
2/ (Blanked by CIA)

4. In summary, therefore, there is no evidence that the Soviets have

any techniques or agents capable of producing particular behavioral patterns
which are not available in the West. Current research indicates that the
Soviets are attempting to develop a technology for controlling the
development of behavioral patterns among the citizenry of the USSR in
accordance with politically determined requirements of the system.
Furthermore, the same technology can be applied to more sophisticated
approaches to the “coding” of information for transmittal to population
targets in the “battle for the minds of men.” Some of the more esoteric
techniques such as ESP or, as the Soviets call it, “biological radio-
communication,” and psychogenic agents such as LSD, are receiving some
overt attention with, possibly, applications in mind for individual behavior
control under clandestine conditions. However, we require more
information than is currently available in order to establish or disprove
planned or actual applications of various methodologies by Soviet scientists
to the control of actions of particular individuals.

References
1. Itelson, Lev, “Pedagogy: An Exact Science?” USSR October 1963, p. 10.
2. Borzek, Joseph, “Recent Developments in Soviet Psychology,” Annual
Review of
Psychology, vol. 15, 1964, p. 493-594.

The first letter and attachment are from DECLASSIFIED DOCUMENTS

1984 microfilms under MKULTRA (84) 002258, published by Research
Publication Woodbridge, CT 06525. Some original markings were not
retyped, but the content is the same.

The second letter and attachment are from the Warren Commission
documents. Notice should be paid to the different tone Helms gives to his
letter, keeping in mind he was found guilty of lying to Congress. He places
greater emphasis on “Soviet” practices and tries to diminish breakthroughs
gained by Americans. Some thought should be given as to WHY the Warren
Commission sought such documents (remembering that ALLEN DULLES
was a member of that Commission). They were exploring the Manchurian
candidate theory. It was revealed during the Church Committee hearings of
1975 that Helms had been in charge of Project AMLASH, a program to
assassinate
Castro (Cuba), Trujillo (Dominican Republic), Diem (RVN), Schneider
(Chile) using MAFIA figures John Roselli and Santos Trafficante to do the
job.

Care was used to insure lines appear in same length and order. Page length
will have to be adjusted if you desire to print this. Look for other specials
soon. David John
Moses.
Appendix 2
Glossary of Common NLP Terms
Our primary goal is to provide you with reference experiences for the
attitudes that characterize the NLP way of perceiving reality and for the
trail of techniques that have been generated as a consequence. Since many
people desire a map (no matter how vague) of the territory before
proceeding with their journey, we also offer this glossary of terms. We trust
that you understand that dictionary definitions are, of necessity, “circular”
and are most useful when they direct you to the reference experiences.

Accessing Cues—Behaviors that are correlated with the use of a particular

representational system; i.e., eye movements, postures, breathing, etc.

Analog Change—A change which varies continuously; e.g., a dimmer

control for lights or a shift in body position.

Analog Marking—Emphasizing a part of a sentence using verbal or

nonverbal means; e.g., a louder tone or a hand gesture.

Anchor—A trigger that leads to an experience as fully and completely as

possible (with all the senses); looking out from one’s own eyes.

Auditory—Referring to the sense of hearing.

Backtrack—To review or summarize.

Break State—To change a person’s state dramatically.

Behavioral Flexibility—The ability to vary one’s behavior in order to elicit

a response from another person.

Calibrate—To “read” another person’s verbal and nonverbal responses and

associate specific behaviors with specific internal processes or states.
Calibrated Loop—An ongoing interaction in which specific behaviors of
each person trigger specific responses in the other.

Chaining Anchors—Firing anchors sequentially in order to direct a person’s

experience along that sequence.

Channel—One of the five senses or representational systems.

Chunk Size—The size of the object, situation, or experience being

considered. This can be altered by chunking up (a broader focus), chunking
down (a more specific focus), or chunking sideways or laterally (focusing
on others of the same type of class). For example, beginning with a car,
“chunking down” might be to a Ford, “chunking up” might be to a means of
transportation, and “chunking sideways” might be to a plane or train.

Collapsing Anchors—Firing anchors simultaneously in order to promote

integration of the experiences.

Complex Equivalent—A linguistic term to describe the complex set of

behaviors that equal a certain nominalization in a person’s map of reality;
e.g., the behaviors that are “proof” that a certain person “loves” you.

Congruent—When all of a person’s internal strategies, behaviors, and parts

are in agreement and working together.

Contrastive Analysis—To determine the differences between the

submodalities of two or more representations.

Conversational Postulates—Behavioral presuppositions which are part of

the culture and language patterns but are not identified overtly; e.g., “Do
you have a watch?” leads the other person to tell you the time.

Critical Submodalities—The submodalities which most determine a

person’s response.

Crossover Mirroring—Matching a person’s rhythms but with a different

type of behavior.
Deep Trance Identification—See second position.

Digital Change—A change which is all-or-none, on-or-off with no steps or

positions in between the ends; e.g., a light is on or off, language.

Dissociated—Experiencing from a perspective other than your own.

Driver—The most crucial submodality so that changing it “automatically”

changes many other submodalities.

Dovetail—To fit together more than one outcome, story, etc.

Ecology—Considering the effects on the whole system instead of on just

one part or one person.

Embedded Command—Nesting a command so that it is grammatically not

a command but is marked out as a command by your analogs; e.g., “It
might be worthwhile considering how to do that!

Eye-Accessing Cues—Movements of a person’s eyes that indicate the

representational system being used.

Firing an Anchor—Repeating the overt behavior that triggers a certain

response.

First Position—Experiencing the world from your own perspective or being

associated into yourself.

Flexibility—Having more than one choice in a situation.

Future Pace—Rehearsing (mentally and physically) so that a specific

behavior will occur naturally and automatically in a future situation.

Generative Intervention—An intervention that solves the presenting

problem and also generates other changes that make the person’s life better
in many other ways.
Gustatory—Referring to the sense of taste.

Incongruent—When two or more of a person’s parts or programs are in

conflict.

Installation—Acquiring a new strategy or behavior.

Kinesthetic—Referring to the sense of feeling. May be subdivided into

tactile feelings
(Kt—physically feeling the outside world), proprioceptive feelings (Kp—
internal body sensations such as muscle tension or relaxation), and meta
feelings (Km—“emotional” responses about some object, situation or
experience.)

Lead System—The representational system initially used to access stored

information.

Leading—Guiding another person in a specific direction.

Lost Performative—A linguistic pattern in which the person performing the

action or judgment is missing from the sentence.

Map of Reality—A person’s perception of reality.

Mask—See perceptual filter.

Meta-Model—A model of language patterns that focuses attention on words

people use to delete, distort, generalize, limit, or specify their realities and
also provides a series of outcome specification questions useful for
recovering lost or unspecified information and or loosening rigid patterns of
thinking.

Metaphor—Usually a story, parable, or analogy that relates one situation,

experience or phenomenon to another.
Meta-Outcome—The outcome that is more general than the stated one; e.g.,
getting my self-respect back is the meta-outcome in “Killing that person
will get my self-respect back.” It is the “chunked up” outcome, so that
killing that person becomes only one member of a class of behaviors that
can be used to recover self-respect.

Meta-Person—Being in third positions.

Milton Model—A categorization of language patterns useful for delivering

a message in such a way that the person readily accepts it.

Mirroring—Approximately matching one’s behavior to that of another

person.

Modal Operators—A linguistic term for the way one judges or evaluates
actions; e.g., choice, possibility, impossibility, desire, necessity.

Modality—One of the five senses.

Modeling—Observing and specifying how something happens or how

someone thinks or behaves, and then demonstrating the process for others.

Negative Command—A command that is marked out with analogs although

it is grammatically stated in the negative; e.g., “Wouldn’t that be a good
idea!”

Nest—To fit one thing (outcome, story, etc.) within another.

Nominalization—A linguistic term for the words which result from the
process of taking actions (verbs) and converting them into things (nouns)
which actually have no existence as things; e.g., you can’t put them in a
wheelbarrow. Examples of nominalizations are “love,” “freedom,”
“happiness,” “respect,” “frustration,” etc. See complex equivalent.

Olfactory—Referring to the sense of smell.

Organ Language—Words that refer to specific body parts or activities; e.g.,
“Get off my back,” “pain in the rear,” etc.

Outcome—Desired goal or result.

Pacing—Matching or mirroring another person’s verbal and/or nonverbal

behavior. Useful for gaining short-term rapport.

Parts—Metaphoric representations of different facets of a person’s

strategies, programs, “personality” or ego states; e.g., the “parts” that want
you to be safe, independent, in control, loved, respected, spiritual, etc. To be
distinguished from the specific behaviors adopted by the “parts” to get their
positive outcomes.

Perceptual Filter—An attitude, point of view, perspective or set of

presuppositions about the object, person or situation. Also called a “mask.”

Polarity Response—A response which reverses, negates, or takes the

opposite position from the previous statement.

Predicates—Process words or words that express action or relationship with

respect to a subject (verbs, adverbs and adjectives). The words may reflect
the representational system being used or they may be nonspecific; e.g.,
“That looks good,” “Sounds right to me,” “That feels fine,” or “I agree.”

Preferred Representational System—The representational system which a

person habitually uses to process information or experiences; usually the
one in which the person can make the finest distinctions.

Process Words—See predicates.

Quotes—A method of expressing the desired message in quotations as if

someone else said it.

Rapport—A condition in which trust, understanding, harmony, and

cooperation has been established.
Reframing—A process by which a person’s perception of a specific
behavior is altered. Usually subdivided into context, meaning, and six-step
reframing.

Remedial Intervention—An intervention that only solves the presenting

problem.

Representational Systems—Referring to the five sense of seeing (visual),

hearing (auditory), feeling (kinesthetic), tasting (gustatory), and smelling
(olfactory).

Resource State—The experience of an ability, attitude, behavior,

characteristic, perspective, or quality that is useful.

Second Position—Experiencing the world from the perspective of another

person.

Secondary Gain—The positive or desired result (often hidden) of a

seemingly undesired or problem behavior.

Sensory Acuity—The ability to use the senses to make distinctions between

different bits of incoming information.

Sensory Based—Information which is correlated with what has been

received by the five senses (as opposed to “Hallucinations”).

Separator State—See break state.

Shift Referential Index—To take the perspective of someone else but to

keep your own criteria.

Six-Step Reframe—A process in which an undesirable behavior is

metaphorically separated from the desired outcome of the “part” so that the
“part” can more easily adopt new behaviors that satisfy its positive intention
and do not have the undesirable effects of the original behavior.
Sorting Polarities—Separating tendencies or “parts” that pull a person in
opposite directions.

Stacking Anchors—Using the same anchor for a number of resources.

State—A state of being or a condition of body/mind or an experience at a

particular moment.

Stealing an Anchor—Identifying an anchored sequence (stimulus-response)

and then firing that anchor.

Stimulus-Response—The repeated association between an experience and a

particular response; e.g., Pavlovian conditioning.

Strategy—A sequence of mental and behavioral steps which leads to a

specific outcome; e.g., decision, learning, motivation, specific skills.

Submodalities—The subdivisions of the processing of the representational

systems;
e.g., visual information can be divided in black-and-white, color, 2-D, 3-D,
bright, dim, clear, fuzzy, moving, still, large, small, etc.

Switch Referential Index—To take the perspective and the criteria of

someone else.

Synthesia—An overlap between representational systems such as “see/feel”

(feelings overlap with what is seen) or “hear/feel” (feelings overlap with
what is heard).

Tag Questions—Negative questions tagged onto the end of a sentence in

order to diffuse polarity responses; e.g., “Don’t you?” “Can’t you?” “Aren’t
you?” etc.

Tape Editing—A process of reviewing past behavior and then future pacing
in order to alter future responses in similar situations.
Third Position—Experiencing the world from a distant position, outside all
the persons in the interaction (as an “Observer,” “Fair Witness,” “Guardian
Angel,” etc.).

Transderivational Search—The process of searching back through one’s

memories to find a reference experience.

Translating—The process of rephrasing words from one representational

system into another.
Bio
Dr. William Horton was trained in crisis/hostage negotiation by the FBI at
the FBI Academy in Quantico, Virginia. He is a licensed psychologist, an
alcohol and drug counselor, and went through the Red Cross training for
Critical Incident Stress Debriefing training. A veteran of the Army and
Naval Reserve, Dr. Horton is considered one of the leading experts in
subconscious communications. He has hypnotized over
100,000 people in his career! He has won more awards in the field of
hypnosis than anyone in the last few years. He has lead trainings in
hypnosis and NLP all over the world. His first book, Primary Objective,
Neuro-Linguistic Psychology and Guerrilla Warfare, is being considered for
a feature film. He has coauthored the best-selling Selling Yourself to
Others: the New Psychology of Sales. He used these skills to overcome an
injury and receive a black belt in three styles of karate. Join us and see why
Dr. William Horton was awarded the Rexford North Award, the highest
award in the field of hypnosis. He has also won the 2001 Educator of the
Year from the International Association of Counselors and Therapists and
the highest award from the international Hypnosis Hall of Fame.

For Training in NLP, Hypnosis, and Mind Control

Techniques contact Dr. Horton
941-408-8551
www.Drwillhorton.com
www.nfnlp.com